Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
WELCOME TO BMW.
Owner's Manual.
BMW 8 Series Convertible.
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on
the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also use the
Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important information
on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features
available in your BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining
the value of your BMW.
At the time of production at the plant, the printed Owner's Manual is the most
current resource. After a vehicle software update – such as, a Remote Soft‐
ware Upgrade – the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the
latest information.
You can find supplementary information in the additional brochures in the on‐
board literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.
3
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
TABLE OF CONTENTS
After a vehicle software update – such as, a Remote Software Upgrade –
the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest infor‐
mation.
NOTES
Information ......................................................................................................................... 8
Owner's Manual media ................................................................................................ 16
QUICK REFERENCE
Entering ............................................................................................................................ 20
Set-up and use ............................................................................................................... 24
On the road ...................................................................................................................... 28
CONTROLS
Cockpit .............................................................................................................................. 36
Operating state of the vehicle .................................................................................... 41
iDrive .................................................................................................................................. 44
BMW Remote Software Upgrade ............................................................................. 56
General settings ............................................................................................................. 59
Opening and closing ..................................................................................................... 72
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel ......................................................................... 108
Transporting children safely ..................................................................................... 120
Driving ............................................................................................................................. 125
Displays .......................................................................................................................... 142
Lights .............................................................................................................................. 158
Safety .............................................................................................................................. 166
Driving stability control systems .............................................................................. 203
Driver assistance systems ........................................................................................ 207
Driving comfort ............................................................................................................. 251
Climate control ............................................................................................................. 253
Interior equipment ....................................................................................................... 265
Storage compartments .............................................................................................. 272
Cargo area ..................................................................................................................... 275
4
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving ......................................................................... 282
Saving fuel ..................................................................................................................... 286
MOBILITY
Refueling ........................................................................................................................ 294
Wheels and tires .......................................................................................................... 296
Engine compartment ................................................................................................. 323
Operating materials .................................................................................................... 326
Maintenance ................................................................................................................. 333
Replacing components .............................................................................................. 335
Breakdown assistance ............................................................................................... 338
Care ................................................................................................................................. 345
REFERENCE
Technical data .............................................................................................................. 352
Appendix ........................................................................................................................ 354
Everything from A to Z ............................................................................................... 356
© 2019 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID7 II/19, 03 19 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
5
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
NOTES
Information .................................................................................................... 8
Owner's Manual media ............................................................................. 16
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Information
Using this Owner's Manual
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a particu‐
lar topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Validity of the Owner's Manual
Production of the vehicle
At the time of production at the plant, the printed
Owner's Manual is the most current resource.
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐
ences may exist between the printed Owner's
Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle.
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
After a software update in the
vehicle
After a vehicle software update – such as, a Re‐
mote Software Upgrade – the Integrated Own‐
er's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest
information.
Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as a
printed book from the service center.
The topics are also discussed in the Integrated
Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Additional sources of
information
Service center
A service center will be glad to answer questions
at any time.
Internet
Vehicle information and general information on
BMW, for instance. on technology, are available
on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.
Integrated Owner's Manual in the
vehicle
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
cle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display. Additional
information, refer to page 16.
BMW Driver’s Guide app
The BMW Driver's Guide app specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
cle. The app can be displayed on smartphones
and tablets.
BMW Driver’s Guide Web
Driver’s Guide Web shows the most suitable in‐
formation for the selected vehicle. If possible,
only equipment and functions that are actually in‐
stalled in the vehicle will be explained. Driver’s
Guide Web can be displayed in any current
browser.
Seite 8
NOTES
Information
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Symbols and displays
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Symbol Meaning
Precautions that must be followed in
order to avoid the possibility of injury
to yourself and to others as well as
serious damage to the vehicle.
Measures that can be taken to help
protect the environment.
"..." Texts in vehicle used to select
individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the
voice activation system.
››...‹‹ Responses generated by the voice
activation system.
Action steps
Action steps to be carried out are presented as a
numbered list. The steps must be carried out in
the defined order.
1.
First action step.
2. Second action step.
Enumerations
Enumerations without mandatory order or alter‐
native possibilities are presented as a list with
bullet points.
▷ First possibility.
▷ Second possibility.
Symbols on vehicle components
This symbol on a vehicle component
indicates that further information on the
component is available in the Owner's Manual.
Vehicle features and
options
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all standard, country-specific and optional equip‐
ment that is offered in the model series. There‐
fore, this Owner's Manual also describes and il‐
lustrates features and functions that are not
available in a vehicle, for example because of the
selected optional features or the country-specific
version.
This also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
For any options and equipment not described in
this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supplementary
Owner's Manuals.
Your BMW service center is happy to answer any
questions that you may have about the features
and options applicable to your vehicle.
Status of the Owner's
Manual
Basic information
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol‐
icy of constant development that is conceived to
ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the
highest quality and safety standards. In rare
cases, therefore, the features described in this
Owner's Manual may differ from those in your
vehicle.
Validity of the Owner's Manual
Production of the vehicle
At the time of production at the plant, the printed
Owner's Manual is the most current resource.
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐
ences may exist between the printed Owner's
Seite 9
Information
NOTES
9
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle.
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
After a software update in the
vehicle
After a vehicle software update – such as, a Re‐
mote Software Upgrade – the Integrated Own‐
er's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest
information.
For Your Own Safety
Intended use
Heed the following when using the vehicle:
▷ Owner's Manual.
▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove
stickers.
▷ Technical vehicle data.
▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where the
vehicle is driven.
▷ Vehicle documents and statutory documents.
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for the op‐
erating conditions and registration requirements
applying in the country of first delivery, also
known as homologation. If your vehicle is to be
operated in a different country it might be neces‐
sary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing
operating conditions and registration require‐
ments. If your vehicle does not comply with the
homologation requirements in a certain country
you may not be able to lodge warranty claims for
your vehicle there. Further information on war‐
ranty is available from a service center.
Maintenance and repairs
Warning
Improperly performed work on the vehicle paint
can lead to a failure or malfunction of the radar
sensors and thereby result in a safety risk.
There may be a risk of accident or risk of dam‐
age to property. Have paintwork or paintwork
repairs on bumpers of vehicles with radar sen‐
sors performed by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop
only.
Advanced technology, for instance the use of
modern materials and high-performance elec‐
tronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair
work.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to a
BMW center. If you choose to use another serv‐
ice facility, BMW recommends use of a facility
that performs work, e.g., maintenance and repair,
according to BMW specifications with properly
trained personnel, referred to in the Owner's
Manual as "another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop".
If work is performed improperly, for instance
maintenance and repair, there is a risk of subse‐
quent damage and related safety risks.
Parts and accessories
BMW recommends the use of parts and acces‐
sory products approved by BMW.
Approved parts and accessories, and advice on
their use and installation are available from a
BMW center.
BMW parts and accessories have been tested by
BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW vehi‐
cles.
BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐
sories.
BMW does not evaluate whether each individual
product from another manufacturer can be used
Seite 10
NOTES
Information
10
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
with BMW vehicles without presenting a safety
hazard, even if a country-specific official approval
was issued. BMW does not evaluate whether
these products are suitable for BMW vehicles
under all usage conditions.
California Proposition 65
Warning
For vehicles sold in California, the law requires
vehicle manufacturers to provide the following
warning:
Warning
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Automo‐
bile components and parts, including compo‐
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer‐
tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
pounds. Batteries also contain other chemicals
known to the State of California to cause can‐
cer. Wash your hands after handling. Used en‐
gine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
water. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
Warning
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passen‐
ger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can
expose you to chemicals including engine ex‐
haust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead,
which are known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine ex‐
cept as necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing your ve‐
hicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the follow‐
ing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▷ California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating condi‐
tions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to deliver
the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is oper‐
ated under those conditions. If you wish to oper‐
ate your vehicle in another country or region, you
may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet
different prevailing operating conditions and ho‐
mologation requirements. You should also be
aware of any applicable warranty limitations or
exclusions for such country or region. In such
case, please contact Customer Relations for fur‐
ther information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road
safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
▷ BMW Maintenance system.
Seite 11
Information
NOTES
11
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet for
US models.
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models.
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in damag‐
ing the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by
the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Data memory
General information
Electronic control devices are installed in the ve‐
hicle. Electronic control units process data they
receive from vehicle sensors, self-generate or
exchange with each other. Some control units
are necessary for the vehicle to function safely or
provide assistance during driving, for instance
driver assistance systems. Furthermore, control
units facilitate comfort or infotainment functions.
Information about stored or exchanged data can
be requested from the manufacturer of the vehi‐
cle, in a separate booklet, for example.
Personal reference
Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehicle
identification number. Depending on the country,
the vehicle owner can be identified with the vehi‐
cle identification number, license plate and corre‐
sponding authorities. In addition, there are other
options to track data collected in the vehicle to
the driver or vehicle owner, for instance, via the
ConnectedDrive account that is used.
Operating data in the vehicle
Control units process data to operate the vehicle.
For example, this includes:
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and its indi‐
vidual components, e.g., wheel rotational
speed, wheel speed, deceleration, transverse
acceleration, engaged safety belt indicator.
▷ Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain
sensor signals.
The processed data is only processed in the ve‐
hicle itself and generally volatile. The data is not
stored beyond the operating period.
Electronic components, e.g. control units and ig‐
nition keys, contain components for storing tech‐
nical information. Information about the vehicle
condition, component usage, maintenance re‐
quirements events or faults can be stored tem‐
porarily or permanently.
This information generally records the state of a
component, a module, a system, or the environ‐
ment, for instance:
▷ Operating states of system components, for
instance, fill levels, tire inflation pressure, bat‐
tery status.
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important system
components, for instance lights and brakes.
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
tions such as airbag deployment or engage‐
ment of the driving stability control systems.
▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events.
The data is required to perform the control unit
functions. Furthermore, it also serves to recog‐
nize and correct malfunctions, and helps the ve‐
hicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle functions.
The majority of this data is volatile and is only
processed within the vehicle itself. Only a small
share of the data is stored event-related in event
or fault memories.
When servicing, for instance during repairs, serv‐
ice processes, warranty cases, and quality assur‐
ance measures, this technical information can be
read out from the vehicle together with the vehi‐
cle identification number.
A dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop can read out the in‐
formation. The socket for OBD Onboard Diagno‐
sis required by law in the vehicle is used to read
out the data.
The data is collected, processed, and used by
the relevant organizations in the service network.
Seite 12
NOTES
Information
12
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
The data documents technical conditions of the
vehicle, helps with the identification of the fault,
compliance with warranty obligations and quality
improvement.
Furthermore, the manufacturer has product
monitoring duties to meet in line with product lia‐
bility law. To fulfill these duties, the vehicle man‐
ufacturer needs technical data from the vehicle.
The data from the vehicle can also be used to
check customer claims for warranty and guar‐
anty.
Fault and event memories in the vehicle can be
reset when a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop performs
repair or servicing work.
Data entry and data transfer into
the vehicle
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, comfort
and individual settings can be stored in the vehi‐
cle and modified or reset at any time.
For example, this includes:
▷ Settings for the seat and steering wheel posi‐
tions.
▷ Suspension and climate control settings.
If necessary, data can be transferred to the en‐
tertainment and communication system of the
vehicle, for instance via smartphone.
This includes the following depending on the re‐
spective equipment:
▷ Multimedia data such as music, films or pho‐
tos for playback in an integrated multimedia
system.
▷ Address book data for use in conjunction with
an integrated hands-free system or an
integrated navigation system.
▷ Entered navigation destinations.
▷ Data on the use of Internet services.
This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or is
found on a device that has been connected to
the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or
MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle, it
can be deleted at any time.
This data is only transmitted to third parties upon
personal request as part of the use of online
services. The transmission depends on the se‐
lected settings for the use of the services.
Incorporation of mobile devices
Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile de‐
vices connected to the vehicle, for instance
smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle
control elements.
The sound and picture from the mobile device
can be played back and displayed through the
multimedia system. Certain information is trans‐
ferred to the mobile device at the same time. De‐
pending on the type of incorporation, this in‐
cludes, for instance position data and other
general vehicle information. This optimizes the
way in which selected apps, for instance naviga‐
tion or music playback, work.
There is no further interaction between the mo‐
bile device and the vehicle, such as active access
to vehicle data.
How the data will be processed further is deter‐
mined by the provider of the particular app being
used. The extent of the possible settings de‐
pends on the respective app and the operating
system of the mobile device.
Services
General information
If the vehicle has a wireless network connection,
this enables data to be exchanged between the
vehicle and other systems. The wireless network
connection is realized via an in-vehicle transmit‐
ter and receiver unit or via personal mobile devi‐
ces brought into the vehicle, for instance smart‐
phones. This wireless network connection
enables 'online functions' to be used. These in‐
clude online services and apps supplied by the
vehicle manufacturer or by other providers.
Seite 13
Information
NOTES
13
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Services from the vehicle
manufacturer
Where online services from the vehicle manufac‐
turer are concerned, the corresponding functions
are described in the appropriate place, for in‐
stance the Owner's Manual or manufacturer's
website. The relevant legal information pertaining
to data protection is provided there too. Personal
data may be used to perform online services.
Data is exchanged over a secure connection,
for instance with the IT systems of the vehicle
manufacturer intended for this purpose.
Any collection, processing, and use of personal
data above and beyond that needed to provide
the services must always be based on a legal
permission, contractual arrangement or consent.
It is also possible to activate or deactivate the
data connection as a whole. That is, with the ex‐
ception of functions and services required by law
such as Assist systems.
Services from other providers
When using online services from other providers,
these services are the responsibility of the rele‐
vant provider and subject to their data privacy
conditions and terms of use. The vehicle manu‐
facturer has no influence on the content ex‐
changed during this process. Information on the
way in which personal data is collected and used
in relation to services from third parties, the
scope of such data, and its purpose, can be ob‐
tained from the relevant service provider.
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understand‐
ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were op‐
erating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
This data can help provide a better understand‐
ing of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur.
EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re‐
corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐
tions and no personal data, for instance name,
gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip‐
ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu‐
facturer, other parties, such as law enforcement,
that have the special equipment, can read the in‐
formation if they have access to the vehicle or
the EDR.
Seite 14
NOTES
Information
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Vehicle identification
number
Engine compartment
The vehicle identification number can be found
in the engine compartment, on the right-hand
side of the vehicle.
Windshield
The vehicle identification number can also be
found behind the windshield.
iDrive
It is also possible to display the vehicle identifica‐
tion number via iDrive, refer to page 65.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned and
operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the Na‐
tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in in‐
dividual problems between you, your dealer, or
BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-
related defect to Transport Canada, Defect In‐
vestigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free
hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
Seite 15
Information
NOTES
15
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Owner's Manual media
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
General information
Media at a glance
You can use various media formats to call up the
content in the Owner's Manual. The following
Owner's Manual media formats are available:
▷ Printed Owner's Manual, refer to page 16.
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle, re‐
fer to page 16.
Validity of the Owner's Manual
Production of the vehicle
At the time of production at the plant, the printed
Owner's Manual is the most current resource.
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐
ences may exist between the printed Owner's
Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle.
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
After a software update in the
vehicle
After a vehicle software update – such as, a Re‐
mote Software Upgrade – the Integrated Own‐
er's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest
information.
Printed Owner's Manual
Concept
The printed Owner's Manual describes all stand‐
ard, country-specific, and optional features of‐
fered with the series.
General information
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as a
printed book from the service center.
Supplementary Owner's Manuals
Also follow the instructions of the Supplementary
Owner's Manuals, which are included in addition
to the onboard literature.
Integrated Owner's Manual
in the vehicle
Concept
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
cle.
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be displayed
on the Control Display.
Seite 16
NOTES
Owner's Manual media
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Selecting the Owner's Manual
1.
Press the button.
2. "CAR"
3. "Owner's Manual"
4. Select the desired method of accessing the
contents.
Scrolling through the Owner's
Manual
Turn the Controller, until the next or previous
contents are displayed.
Context help
General information
The section of the Owner's Manual relating to
the function that is currently selected can be dis‐
played directly.
Opening via iDrive
Change directly to the Options menu from the
function on the Control Display:
1. Press the button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on the
Control Display:
"Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and
the Owner's Manual
To switch from a function, for instance radio, to
the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and
to alternate between the two displays:
1. Press the button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4.
Press the button again to return to the
last displayed function.
5.
Press the button to return to the page
of the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate continuously between the last dis‐
played function and the last displayed page of
the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4 & 5. Opens
a new display every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The entry points into the Owner's Manual can be
stored on the programmable memory buttons,
refer to page 46, and called up directly.
Storing
1.
Select the desired entry point via iDrive:
▷ "Keyword search"
▷ "Picture search"
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "User help"
▷ "Topics"
▷ "Quick link"
2.
Press the desired programmable
memory button and hold for more than 2 sec‐
onds.
Executing
Press the corresponding button.
The owner's manual is directly dis‐
played at the selected entry point.
Seite 17
Owner's Manual media
NOTES
17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
QUICK REFERENCE
Entering ....................................................................................................... 20
Set-up and use ........................................................................................... 24
On the road ................................................................................................. 28
19
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Entering
Opening and closing
Buttons on the remote control
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Opening the trunk lid
4 Press and hold or press three times in quick
succession: panic mode
Press briefly: headlight courtesy delay feature
Unlocking the vehicle
Press the button on the remote control.
Depending on the settings, either only the driv‐
er's door or all vehicle access points are un‐
locked.
If only the driver's door is unlocked, press the
button on the remote control again to unlock the
other vehicle access points.
Locking the vehicle
1.
Close the driver's door.
2.
Press the button on the remote control.
All vehicle access points are locked.
Buttons for the central locking
system
Overview
Buttons for the central locking system.
Locking
Pressing the button locks the vehicle if
the front doors are closed.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Unlocking
Pressing the button unlocks the vehicle.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
self in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press the button on the remote con‐
trol and hold for at least 3 seconds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote control
three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Seite 20
QUICK REFERENCE
Entering
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Comfort Access
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote control
with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the car's
interior.
Unlocking the vehicle
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.
Locking the vehicle
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a
closed vehicle door with your finger for approx.
1 second without grasping the door handle.
Opening and closing the trunk lid
with no-touch activation
Concept
The trunk lid can be opened and closed with no-
touch activation using the remote control you are
carrying.
Performing the foot movement
1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at ap‐
prox. one arm's length away from the rear of
the vehicle.
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direction
of travel and immediately pull it back. With
this movement, the leg must pass through
the ranges of both sensors.
Trunk lid
Opening
▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the button
on the outside of the trunk lid.
▷ Press and hold the button on the re‐
mote control for approx. 1 second.
Seite 21
Entering
QUICK REFERENCE
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Depending on the setting, the doors may also
be unlocked.
Closing
Press the button on the inside of the
trunk lid.
Convertible top
Overview
Convertible top switch
Opening
Push the switch and hold it.
The windows roll down and the convertible top
opens while the switch is being pushed.
Closing
Pull the switch and hold it.
The windows are lowered, the convertible top is
closed, and the windows are raised again while
the switch is being pulled.
Displays and control
elements
In the vicinity of the steering
wheel
1 Light switch element
2 Turn signal indicator, high beams
3 Instrument cluster
4 Wipers
Indicator/warning lights
Instrument cluster
The indicator/warning lights can light up in a vari‐
ety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper func‐
tioning and light up temporarily when the engine
is started or standby state is switched on.
Driver's door
1 Seats, comfort features
2 Central locking system
Seite 22
QUICK REFERENCE
Entering
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
3 Power windows, all
4 Power windows, individual
5 Exterior mirrors
6 Opening/closing trunk lid
Switch console
1 Selector lever
2 Controller
3 Parking brake, Automatic Hold
4 Driving Dynamics Control
5 Start/Stop button
6 Assistance systems
iDrive
Concept
iDrive includes a large number of functions.
These functions can be operated via Controller
and, depending on the equipment version, via
touch screen or voice activation system.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Opens the main menu.
Opens the Apps menu.
Opens the Communication menu.
Button Function
Opens the Media/Radio menu.
Opens destination input menu for
navigation.
Opens navigation map.
Opens the previous display.
Opens the Options menu.
Voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
The symbol on the Control Display indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is
active.
If no other commands are possible, operate the
function via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation system
Press the button on the steering wheel
or ›Cancel‹.
Seite 23
Entering
QUICK REFERENCE
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Set-up and use
Seats, mirrors, and steering
wheel
Electrically adjustable seats
1 Backrest width
2 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
3 Backrest tilt, head restraint
4 Lumbar support
Adjusting the head restraint
Height
Push switch up or down.
Distance to back of head
▷ Back: press the button and push the head re‐
straint toward the rear.
▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the
front.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
1 Adjusting
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out
Seite 24
QUICK REFERENCE
Set-up and use
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Adjusting the steering wheel
Electrical steering wheel adjustment
Move the steering wheel to the preferred height
and angle to suit your seating position by press‐
ing the switch.
Memory function
Concept
The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐
essary, retrieved using the memory function:
▷ Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
▷ Steering wheel position.
▷ Height of the Head-up Display.
Storing
1.
Set the desired position.
2.
Press button on the door. The writ‐
ing on the button lights up.
3. Press the desired button 1 or 2 at the door
while the writing is lit. A signal sounds.
Calling up settings
Press the desired button 1 or 2.
Entering the rear
Fold the rear seat backrest down
1. Pull the strap.
2. Fold the rear seat backrest forward.
To make the entry to the rear easier, the seat will
automatically move to the most forward position.
Fold the rear seat backrest back
Fold the rear seat backrest back and engage.
The seat moves automatically to the last seat po‐
sition that was stored.
Infotainment
Radio
1 Changing the entertainment source
2 Sound output on/off, volume
3 Programmable memory buttons
4 Changing the station/track
5 Waveband/satellite radio
Seite 25
Set-up and use
QUICK REFERENCE
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Navigation destination entry
Entering a destination via quick
search
1.
Press the button on the Controller.
2. "Where to?"
3. Enter at least two letters or characters.
The search term may be completed automat‐
ically in gray print.
Press or move the controller up to apply the
suggested search term.
4. Select the symbol, if needed.
Results are displayed in a list.
5. "Search location": select search location.
6. Move the Controller to the right.
7. Select desired destination.
Connecting a mobile phone
General information
After the mobile phone is connected once to the
vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated using
iDrive, the steering wheel buttons, voice activa‐
tion, and gestures.
Connecting the mobile phone via
Bluetooth
Via iDrive:
1.
"COM"
2. If necessary, select the following setting:
"Telephone"
3. "Connect new phone"
4. To perform additional steps on the mobile
phone, refer to the mobile phone owner's
manual: e.g., search for or connect the Blue‐
tooth device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile phone display. Select the Blue‐
tooth name of the vehicle.
5. Depending on the mobile device, a control
number is displayed or the control number
must be entered.
▷ Compare the control number displayed
on the Control Display with the control
number on the display of the device.
Confirm the control number on the device
and on the Control Display.
▷ Enter and confirm the same control num‐
ber on the device and via iDrive.
The device is connected and displayed in the
device list.
Using the phone
Accepting a call
Depending on the equipment, incoming calls can
be answered in several ways.
▷ Via iDrive:
"Accept"
▷ Press the button on the steering
wheel.
▷ Via the selection list in the instrument cluster:
Use the thumbwheel on the steering wheel to
select: "Accept"
▷ Via touch screen: tap on the corresponding
entry on the Control Display.
▷ Via gestures: point the index finger into the
direction of the Control Display.
Dialing a number
Via iDrive:
1.
"COM"
2. If necessary, "Telephone"
3. "Dial number"
Seite 26
QUICK REFERENCE
Set-up and use
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
4. Enter the numbers.
5. Select the symbol. The connection is es‐
tablished via the mobile phone to which this
function has been assigned.
If connection is to be set up via the additional
phone:
1.
Press the button.
2. "Call via"
Apple CarPlay preparation
Concept
CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible
Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation
and iDrive.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible iPhone.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
▷ Corresponding mobile contract.
▷ Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice operation are
activated on the iPhone.
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay
Via iDrive:
1.
"COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. "Settings"
5. Select the following setting:
"Apple CarPlay"
6. Activate the function.
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay
Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle.
Select CarPlay as the function:
"Apple CarPlay"
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐
played in the device list.
Seite 27
Set-up and use
QUICK REFERENCE
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
On the road
Driving
Drive-ready state
Switching on drive-ready state
▷ Depress the brake pedal.
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
Switching off drive-ready state
1.
Engage selector lever position P with the ve‐
hicle stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
3. Set the parking brake.
Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function switches the en‐
gine off automatically while stationary to save
fuel. The engine starts automatically under the
following preconditions:
Steptronic transmission:
▷ By releasing the brake pedal.
▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: step on
the accelerator pedal.
Parking brake
Setting
Pull the switch.
The LED and indicator light light up.
Releasing
With drive-ready state switched on:
Press the switch while stepping on the brake
pedal or selector lever position P is set.
The LED and indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
Parking
The parking brake is automatically set if the vehi‐
cle is being held by Automatic Hold and the
drive-ready state is switched off or the vehicle is
exited.
Steptronic transmission
Engaging selector lever position D,
N, R
▷ Drive mode D.
▷ Neutral N.
▷ R is reverse.
With the driver's safety belt fastened, briefly push
the selector lever in the desired direction, past a
resistance point, if needed. The selector lever re‐
turns to the center position in each case.
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a drive mode or reverse, maintain pressure
on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.
A selector lever lock prevents the inadvertent
shifting to selector lever position R or the inad‐
vertent shifting from selector lever position P.
Seite 28
QUICK REFERENCE
On the road
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Engage selector lever position R only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Releasing the selector lever lock
Press the button.
Engaging P
Engage selector lever position P only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Press button P.
Steptronic transmission, Sport
program and manual mode
Activate the Sport program/manual mode:
Press the selector lever to the left from selector
lever position D.
Manual mode:
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.
End the sport program/manual mode:
Push the selector lever to the right.
High beams, headlight flasher,
turn signal
High beams, headlight flasher
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
The high beams light up when the low beams
are switched on.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Turn signal
▷ On: press the lever past the resistance point.
▷ Off: press the lever past the resistance point
in the opposite direction.
Seite 29
On the road
QUICK REFERENCE
29
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap the
lever up or down.
▷ Brief signaling: press the lever to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there for as long as you
want the turn signal to flash.
Lights and lighting
Light functions
Symbol Function
Night vision.
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
Parking lights.
Automatic headlight control.
Adaptive light functions.
Low beams.
Instrument lighting.
Right roadside parking light.
Left roadside parking light.
Wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and
brief wipe
Switching on
Press the lever up until the desired position is
reached.
▷ Resting position of the wipers: position 0.
▷ Rain sensor: position 1.
▷ Normal wiper speed: position 2.
▷ Fast wiper speed: position 3.
Brief wipe and switching off
Press the lever down.
▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it
reaches its standard position.
▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the
standard position.
Seite 30
QUICK REFERENCE
On the road
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Rain sensor
Activating/deactivating
To activate: press the lever up once from its
standard position, arrow 1.
To deactivate: press the lever back into the
standard position.
Adjusting the sensitivity
Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the wiper lever towards you.
Climate control
Automatic climate control
Button Function
Temperature.
Climate control operation.
Maximum cooling.
AUTO program.
Recirculated-air mode.
Air flow, manual.
Air distribution, manual.
Defrost and defog the wind‐
shield.
Rear window defroster.
Active seat ventilation.
Seat and armrest heating.
Opening the Climate menu.
For the following settings, for in‐
stance: upper body temperature
adjustment, parked-car ventila‐
tion.
Seite 31
On the road
QUICK REFERENCE
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Refueling
Refueling
Fuel cap
1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear
edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Gasoline
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used.
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure specifications can be
found in the tire inflation pressure table in the
printed Owner's Manual.
After correcting the tire inflation
pressure
With runflat tires:
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
With Tire Pressure Monitor TPM:
The corrected tire inflation pressures are applied
automatically. Make sure that the correct tire set‐
tings have been made.
With tires that cannot be found in the tire pres‐
sure values on the Control Display, reset the Tire
Pressure Monitor TPM.
Checking the tire inflation pressure
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and
correct it as needed:
▷ At least twice a month.
▷ Before embarking on an extended trip.
Cleaning the wheels
The friction during hard braking may produce
brake dust and make the rims dirty. Brake dust
can be removed by cleaning the rims. BMW rec‐
ommends using vehicle care and cleaning prod‐
ucts from BMW.
Electronic oil measurement
Functional requirements
A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of normal driving.
Displaying the engine oil level
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
Different messages appear on the Control Dis‐
play depending on the engine oil level. Pay atten‐
tion to these messages.
Adding engine oil
General information
Safely park the vehicle and switch off drive-ready
state before adding engine oil.
Seite 32
QUICK REFERENCE
On the road
32
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Adding
Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Observe the quantity to be added in the mes‐
sage.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Observe recommended engine oil types.
Providing assistance
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located in the center console.
Breakdown assistance
BMW Roadside Assistance
Via iDrive:
1.
"COM"
2. "BMW Assist"
3. If necessary, "BMW Roadside Assistance"
A voice connection is established.
ConnectedDrive
Concierge service
The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor‐
mation on events, gas stations or hotels, and
provides phone numbers and addresses. Many
hotels can be booked directly by the BMW Con‐
cierge service. The Concierge service is part of
the optional BMW Assist Response Center.
Via iDrive:
1. "COM"
2. "BMW Assist"
3. If necessary, "Concierge"
A voice connection to the Concierge service is
established.
Teleservices
Teleservices are services that help to maintain
vehicle mobility.
Teleservices can comprise the following serv‐
ices:
▷ BMW Roadside Assistance.
▷ BMW Accident Assistance.
▷ Service Request.
▷ Teleservice Report.
▷ Teleservice Battery Guard.
▷ Your dealer’s service center.
Seite 33
On the road
QUICK REFERENCE
33
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
CONTROLS
Cockpit ........................................................................................................ 36
Operating state of the vehicle .................................................................. 41
iDrive ............................................................................................................ 44
BMW Remote Software Upgrade ........................................................... 56
General settings ......................................................................................... 59
Opening and closing ................................................................................. 72
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel ....................................................... 108
Transporting children safely .................................................................. 120
Driving ....................................................................................................... 125
Displays ..................................................................................................... 142
Lights ......................................................................................................... 158
Safety ........................................................................................................ 166
Driving stability control systems ........................................................... 203
Driver assistance systems ..................................................................... 207
Driving comfort ........................................................................................ 251
Climate control ......................................................................................... 253
Interior equipment ................................................................................... 265
Storage compartments .......................................................................... 272
Cargo area ................................................................................................ 275
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Cockpit
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Power windows, all 99
2 Power windows, individual 99
3 Exterior mirror operation 113
4 Opening/closing trunk lid 89
5 Seating comfort features
Memory function 116
6 Central locking system
Unlocking 82
Locking 82
7 Lights
Seite 36
CONTROLS
Cockpit
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Night Vision 185
Light switch 158
Lights off
Daytime running lights 160
Parking lights 159
Automatic headlight control 158
Adaptive light functions 160
High-beam Assistant 161
Low beams 159
Instrument lighting 163
Right roadside parking light 159
Left roadside parking light 159
8 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 133
High beams, head‐
light flasher 134
High-beam Assistant 161
Widgets in the instrument clus‐
ter 143
Trip data 153
9 Shift paddle, left
10 Steering wheel buttons, left
Manual Speed Limiter 207
Depending on the equipment:
Cruise control on/off 209
Active Cruise Control on/off 211
Depending on the equipment:
Active Cruise Control on/off 211
With steering and traffic jam assis‐
tant 221:
Cruise control, distance control and
lane guidance on/off
Cruise control: to store the speed
Pause or continue cruise control
Active Cruise Control: increase dis‐
tance
Active Cruise Control: reduce dis‐
tance
Cruise control rocker switch
11 Instrument cluster 142
12 Steering wheel buttons, right
Selection lists 152
Volume, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 8
Voice activation system 52
Telephone, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 8
Thumbwheel for selection lists 152
13 Shift paddle, right
14 Steering column stalk, right
Seite 37
Cockpit
CONTROLS
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Wipers 134
Rain sensor 135
Cleaning the windshield and head‐
lights 135
15 Horn, entire surface
16 Heated steering wheel 115
17 Adjusting the steering wheel 115
18 Unlocking the hood 324
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Control Display 47
2 Hazard warning system 338
Intelligent Safety 170
3 Ventilation 258
4 Glove compartment 272
5 Automatic climate control 253
6 Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, and Communica‐
tion 8
7 Controller with buttons 47
8 Opening and closing the
convertible top 100
Air collar 117
Seite 38
CONTROLS
Cockpit
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
9 Parking brake 130
Automatic Hold 131
10 Driving Dynamics Control 128
SPORT driving mode
COMFORT driving mode
ECO PRO driving mode
ADAPTIVE driving mode
11 Switching drive-ready state on/
off 125
12 Auto Start/Stop function 125
PDC Park Distance Control 227
Without Surround View: rearview
camera 232
Surround View 234
Cross traffic warning 248
Parking assistant 241
Surround View: Panorama
View 234
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 203
13 Steptronic transmission selector lever 137
Seite 39
Cockpit
CONTROLS
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Operating state of the vehicle
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
General information
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in one
of the three states:
▷ Idle state.
▷ Standby state.
▷ Drive-ready state.
Idle state
Concept
If the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched off. All
power consumers are deactivated.
General information
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening from
the outside and after exiting and locking.
Safety information
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Automatic idle state
The idle state is automatically established under
the following conditions:
Seite 41
Operating state of the vehicle
CONTROLS
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ After several minutes, if no operation takes
place on the vehicle.
▷ If the charge state of the vehicle battery is
low.
▷ Depending on the setting via iDrive, if one of
the front doors is opened when exiting the
vehicle.
The idle state is not automatically established
while a phone call is active.
Establishing idle state when
opening the front doors
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/Access"
4. "Turn off vehicle after opening door"
Manual idle state
To establish idle state in the vehicle after end of
trip:
Press and hold the button until
the OFF indicator on the instru‐
ment cluster goes out.
Standby state
Concept
When standby state is switched on, most func‐
tions can be used while the vehicle is stationary.
Desired settings can be adjusted.
General information
The vehicle is in the standby state after the front
doors are opened from the outside.
Display in the instrument cluster
OFF is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster. The drivetrain is
switched off and standby state
switched on.
Drive-ready state
Concept
Switching on drive-ready state corresponds to
starting the engine.
General information
Some functions, such as DSC Dynamic Stability
Control, can only be used with drive-ready state
switched on.
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐
sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into
the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐
tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐
closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐
late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to
life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐
ficient ventilation.
Seite 42
CONTROLS
Operating state of the vehicle
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
NOTICE
In the case of repeated starting attempts or re‐
peated starting in quick succession, the fuel is
not burned or is inadequately burned. The cata‐
lytic converter can overheat. There is a risk of
damage to property. Avoid repeated starting in
quick succession.
Switching on drive-ready state
Concept
Drive-ready state is switched on
via the Start/Stop button:
Steptronic transmission
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a brief
time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the instru‐
ment cluster light up for a varied length of time.
Gasoline engine
Depending on the motorization, the full drive
power may not be available for approximately
30 seconds after starting the engine. In this case,
the vehicle will not accelerate as usual.
Display in the instrument cluster
When drive-ready state is switched on, the tach‐
ometer shows the current engine speed.
Switching off drive-ready state
Steptronic transmission
1.
Engage selector lever position P with the ve‐
hicle stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off. The vehicle
switches into standby state.
3. Set the parking brake.
Seite 43
Operating state of the vehicle
CONTROLS
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
iDrive
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Operating concept
Concept
iDrive includes a large number of functions.
These functions can be operated via Controller
and, depending on the equipment version, via
touch screen or voice activation system.
Safety information
Warning
Operating the integrated information systems
and communication devices while driving can
distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only
use the systems or devices when the traffic sit‐
uation allows. As warranted, stop and use the
systems and devices while the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.
Input and display
Main menu
General information
The main menu is divided into two areas. The
left area contains menu items that can be used
to call up all the iDrive functions. The right area
contains widgets that provide quick access to
certain functions.
Media/Radio
All functions of the entertainment system,
e.g., radio and TV stations, connection with ex‐
ternal devices and music collection.
Communication
Phone and message functions, e-mail and
calendar, and also the connection and manage‐
ment of mobile devices, such as smartphones.
Navigation
Access to the navigation system, destination
input and traffic bulletins. Configurable map
views and other functions, such as Points of In‐
terest and areas to be avoided.
My Car
Information about vehicle status and trips.
Access to the Integrated Owner's Manual and
also administration of driver profiles and range of
adjustments for vehicle and iDrive.
Seite 44
CONTROLS
iDrive
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Apps
Management and access to apps and vehicle
functions. Additional apps can be purchased
from the BMW Store.
Widgets
Widgets provide quick access to fre‐
quently used functions. The configured widgets
display dynamic contents such as the navigation
map, and serve as interfaces at the same time.
Letters and numbers
Letters and numbers can be selected when the
destination is entered, for example.
Letters and numbers can be entered using the
Controller, touchscreen or the voice activation
system. The keyboard's display changes auto‐
matically.
Symbol Function
or
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Enter a blank space.
Use voice activation.
Confirm entry.
Slide the input area to the left or
right.
Entry comparison
When entering names and addresses, the choice
is narrowed down with every letter and number
and added automatically as needed.
Entries are continuously compared with data
stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters and numbers are offered
during entry for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: place names can be en‐
tered in all languages that are available in
iDrive.
Activating/deactivating the
functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
menu item activates or deactivates the function.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Status information
General information
The status field can be found in the upper area of
the Control Display. Status information is dis‐
played in the form of symbols.
Radio symbols
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being received.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Signal strength of cellular network.
Network search.
Cellular network is not available.
The critical charge state of the mo‐
bile phone has been reached.
Roaming is active.
Locating is active.
SMS text message received.
Message received.
Seite 45
iDrive
CONTROLS
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Symbol Meaning
Reminder.
Sending not possible.
Entertainment symbols
Symbol Meaning
Bluetooth audio.
USB audio interface.
WiFi.
Other symbols
Symbol Meaning
Check Control message.
The sound output has been
switched off.
Request for the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
Checking the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
Driver profile.
Messages.
Service requirements.
Information.
Stop.
New data protection-related service
available.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, for instance radio stations, navigation des‐
tinations, phone numbers and menu entries or
pages in the Integrated Owner's Manual.
Settings are stored for the driver profile currently
used.
Overview
1 Programmable memory buttons
Storing a function
A function can be stored on a programmable
memory button. A button with a stored function
can be overwritten with another function.
1.
Select function via iDrive.
2.
Press and hold the desired button
until the displayed bar on the Control Display
has loaded completely.
Executing a function
Press the button.
The function will work immediately. This means,
for instance that the number is dialed when a
phone number is selected.
Displaying the key assignment
Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or
use objects.
The button assignment is displayed at the top
edge of screen.
Seite 46
CONTROLS
iDrive
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Deleting all button assignments
All button assignments can be deleted.
1. Press and hold buttons 1 and 8 at the same
time.
2. "OK"
Control Display and
Controller
Concept
The iDrive functions are displayed on the Control
Display. The Control Display can be operated us‐
ing the Controller, touchpad, and touch screen.
Overview
1 Control Display with touchscreen
2 Controller with buttons and touchpad
Control Display
General information
To clean the Control Display, follow the care in‐
structions, refer to page 349.
Safety information
NOTICE
Objects in the area in the front of the Control
Display can shift and damage the Control Dis‐
play. There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not place objects in the area in front of the
Control Display.
Switching on/off automatically
The Control Display is switched on automatically
after unlocking.
In certain situations, the Control Display is
switched off automatically, for instance if no op‐
eration is performed on the vehicle for several
minutes.
Switching on/off manually
The Control Display can also be switched off
manually.
1.
Tip the Controller up.
2. "Screen off"
Press the Controller or any button on the Con‐
troller to switch it back on again.
System limits
In the case of very high temperatures on the
Control Display, for instance due to intense solar
radiation, the brightness may be reduced down
to complete deactivation. Once the temperature
is reduced, for instance through shade or air con‐
ditioning, the normal functions are restored.
Controller
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐
rectly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using the
touchpad on the Controller, refer to page 50.
Seite 47
iDrive
CONTROLS
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Operation
▷ Turn to switch between menu items, for ex‐
ample.
▷ Press to select a menu item, for example.
▷ Tilt in four directions to switch between dis‐
plays, for example.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Opens the main menu.
Opens the Apps menu.
Button Function
Opens the Communication menu.
Opens the Media/Radio menu.
Opens destination input menu for
navigation.
Opens navigation map.
Opens the previous display.
Opens the Options menu.
Operating via the Controller
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
Selecting a menu
Selecting menu items
1.
Turn the Controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the Controller.
Select a widget
1.
Move the Controller to the right.
2. Select a widget.
3. Press the Controller.
Seite 48
CONTROLS
iDrive
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
It is also possible to select widgets in the instru‐
ment cluster, refer to page 143.
Adjusting the menu
Adjusting widgets
The widgets can be adjusted in the main menu.
It is possible to create multiple pages with widg‐
ets and switch between pages. The adjustments
can only be performed when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.
Via iDrive:
1.
Select the desired page in the main menu.
Only the currently selected page can be ad‐
justed.
2. Tip the Controller up.
3. "Adjust main menu"
4. Select the desired adjustment:
▷ Add new widget: "Add widget".
A maximum of four widgets can be dis‐
played per page.
▷ Add new page: "Add page".
▷ Delete selected page: "Delete page".
▷ Adjust the content of the widget: select
widget.
5. "Done"
Adjusting menu contents
The display of the menus of "MEDIA", "COM"
and "NAV" can be adjusted, for instance to re‐
move the entries of functions that are not used
from the menu.
Via iDrive:
1.
Select the menu.
2. "Personalize menu"
3. Select desired menu contents to be dis‐
played.
Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, for instance
"Settings", a new display appears.
▷ Move the Controller to the left.
The current display closes and the previous
display is shown.
▷
Press the button.
The previous display re-opens.
▷ Move the Controller to the right.
The new display opens.
An arrow indicates that additional displays can be
opened.
Opening the Options menu
Press the button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
The menu consists of various areas:
▷ Help for the selected menu, for instance
"Help".
▷ System settings, for instance "Control display
off".
▷ Control options for the selected main menu,
for instance for "Media/Radio".
Changing settings
Settings, such as brightness, can be entered.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
displayed.
7. Press the Controller.
Entering letters and numbers
Input
1.
Turn the Controller: select letters or numbers.
2. : confirm entry.
Seite 49
iDrive
CONTROLS
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Deleting
Symbol Function
Press the Controller: delete letters or
number.
Hold the Controller down: delete all
letters or numbers.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries,
the letters for which an entry exists can be dis‐
played in a text box.
1.
Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly.
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.
The first entry of the selected letter is dis‐
played in the list.
Operation via touchpad
General information
Some iDrive functions can be operated using the
touchpad on the Controller.
Selecting functions
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Touchpad"
5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Character input": enter letters and num‐
bers.
▷ "Map": use the map.
▷ "Search fields": to write letters without se‐
lecting the list field.
▷ "Audio confirmation": pronounces entered
letters and numbers.
Entering letters and numbers
▷ The system distinguishes between upper
and lower-case letters and numbers. The en‐
try may require switching between letters and
numbers, refer to page 44.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on the
Control Display.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such as
accents or periods so that the letter can be
clearly recognized.
▷ The set language determines what input is
possible. Where necessary, enter special
characters via the Controller.
Entering special characters
Input Operation
Delete a charac‐
ter.
Swipe to the left on the
touchpad.
Enter a blank
space.
Swipe to the right in the
center of the touchpad.
Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the up‐
per area of the touchpad.
Enter an under‐
score.
Swipe to the right in the
lower area of the touchpad.
Using the map
The map in the navigation system can be moved
via the touchpad.
Function Operation
Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di‐
rection.
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out on the touch‐
pad with fingers.
Display menu. Tap once.
Seite 50
CONTROLS
iDrive
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Operation via touchscreen
General information
The Control Display is equipped with a touch‐
screen.
You can tap on menu items and widgets. Touch
the screen with your fingers. Do not use any ob‐
jects.
Opening the main menu
Tap on the symbol.
The main menu is displayed.
Adjusting widgets
The widgets can be adjusted in the main menu.
It is possible to create multiple pages with widg‐
ets and switch between pages. The adjustments
can only be performed when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.
Via iDrive:
1.
Select the desired page in the main menu.
Only the currently selected page can be ad‐
justed.
2. Tap the symbol in the main menu.
3. Select the desired adjustment:
▷ Add new widget: Tap symbol and se‐
lect desired widget.
The requested widget will be inserted in
the relevant position. A maximum of four
widgets can be displayed per page.
▷ Delete selected widget: Tap symbol.
▷ Add new page: tap "Add page".
▷ Delete selected page: tap "Delete page".
▷ Adjust content of the widget: tap center of
widget.
4. Tap "Done".
Showing/hiding the display bar
At the top edge of the screen, it is possible to
show or hide a display bar with additional func‐
tions.
▷ To show the display bar, pull down the dis‐
play bar at the top edge of the screen.
▷ To hide the display bar, pull up the display bar
at the top edge of the screen.
Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, a new display
opens.
An arrow indicates that additional displays can be
opened.
▷ Swipe to the left.
▷ Tap arrow.
The new display opens.
Changing settings
Settings such as brightness can be changed via
the touchscreen.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. To perform the desired setting:
▷ Slide in the selected field to the right or
left, until the desired setting is displayed.
▷ , Tap on the symbol.
Seite 51
iDrive
CONTROLS
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Entering letters and numbers
Input
1. Tap the symbol on the touchscreen.
A keyboard appears in the Control Display.
2. Enter letters and numbers.
Deleting
Symbol Function
Tapping the symbol: deletes the let‐
ter or number.
Tapping and holding the symbol all
letters: deletes all letters or numbers.
Using the map
The navigation map can be moved using the
touchscreen.
Function Operation
Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di‐
rection.
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out with the fin‐
gers.
Display menu. Tap once.
Voice activation system
Concept
The voice activation system can be used to op‐
erate functions with spoken commands. The
system supports you with announcements dur‐
ing input.
The voice control system and the feedback it
provides are not a substitute for the printed or
Integrated Owner's Manual.
General information
▷ Functions that can only be used when the ve‐
hicle is stationary can only be operated via
the voice activation system to a limited ex‐
tent.
▷ The system includes special microphones on
the driver side and the front passenger side.
▷ ›...‹ denotes commands to use with the voice
activation system.
Functional requirements
▷ A language must be set via iDrive that is sup‐
ported by the voice activation system. To set
the language, refer to page 61.
▷ Always say commands in the language of the
voice activation system.
Activating the voice activation
system
General information
There are various methods for activating the
voice activation feature:
▷
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
▷ Say the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or a personal
wake word.
▷ Active voice processing.
Then say the command. No other commands
may be available. In this case, operate the func‐
tion via iDrive.
The voice activation can be terminated:
Press the button on the steering wheel
again or press ›Cancel‹.
Button on the steering wheel
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
Seite 52
CONTROLS
iDrive
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
The symbol on the Control Display indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is
active.
Wake word
General information
Speaking the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ will start
the system. Immediately following, the voice acti‐
vation can be continued with voice commands.
1. Say the wake word ›Hello BMW‹.
2. Say the command.
Preset wake word
The preset wake word ›Hello BMW‹ can be acti‐
vated and deactivated. The ›Hello BMW‹ option
activates the preset and personal wake word.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Language"
5. "Activation with "Hello BMW""
Personal wake word
In addition to a preset wake word ›Hello BMW‹, a
personal wake word can be set up.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Language"
5. "Personal keyword"
6. "Start recording"
For the "Start recording" option, online
speech processing must be available and ac‐
tivated. Alternatively, the personal wake word
can be entered using the Controller.
7. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
Active voice processing
General information
Active voice processing recognizes keywords
that are spoken in the car's interior. For instance,
if the name of a city is named, information for the
navigation will be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Activating/deactivating
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Language"
5. "Active speech processing"
Possible commands
General information
Most contents on the Control Display can be
spoken as commands, e.g. menu items or list en‐
tries. Speak these list entries out loud exactly as
they are shown in the list.
Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, emphasis,
and speed.
The status of the voice recognition is displayed
in the upper area of the Control Display.
Example for function
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the Controller.
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. ›Media and radio‹
3. ›Presets‹
The stored stations are displayed on the Control
Display.
Seite 53
iDrive
CONTROLS
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
The voice activation system can also be used to
operate most climate control functions, refer to
page 264.
The voice activation system can be used to enter
the destination, refer to Owner's Manual for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Communication.
Help on the voice activation system
▷ To have the available spoken instructions
read out loud: ›Voice commands‹.
▷ To have information on the operating princi‐
ple of the voice activation system read out
loud: ›General information on voice control‹.
▷ To have help for the current menu read out
loud: ›Help‹.
Information for Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations,
the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
unnecessarily delay the establishment of a
phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 340,
close to the interior mirror.
BMW Intelligent Personal
Assistant
Concept
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant expands the
voice activation function to include additional
functions that improve interaction in the vehicle.
It is possible to ask questions about the current
state of the vehicle, for instance.
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is connected
to other digital services such as the Concierge
service and is continually being developed.
Functional requirement
The driver's profile is activated.
Activate the following settings to access the full
range of functions:
▷ "Online speech processing".
▷ "Synchronize driver profile" under
"Personalization" in the data protection
menu.
▷ All settings under "BMW ConnectedDrive" in
the data protection menu.
Example for function
1. Say the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or a personal
wake word.
2. ›How high is the outside temperature‹
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant provides
information about the external temperature.
Adjusting
Setting the language
The language to be used for voice activation and
system announcements can be set.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Language"
5. "System language"
6. Select the desired language.
Setting the voice dialog
You can set the system to use standard dialog or
a short version.
The short version of the voice dialog plays back
short messages in abbreviated form.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Language"
5. "Speech mode"
6. Select the desired setting.
Seite 54
CONTROLS
iDrive
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Speaking during voice output
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the
voice activation system. The function can be de‐
activated if inquiries are often undesirably inter‐
rupted, for instance due to background noise or
talking.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Language"
5. "Speaking during voice output"
Online speech processing
Online speech processing provides a dictation
function, a natural method of entering destina‐
tions and improves the quality of voice recogni‐
tion. To use the functions, data is transmitted to
a service provider via an encrypted connection
and stored locally there.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Language"
5. "Online speech processing"
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the vol‐
ume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
System limits
▷ Certain noises can be detected and may lead
to problems. Keep the doors and windows
closed.
▷ Noises from the front passenger or the rear
seat bench can impair the system. Avoid
making other noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
▷ Major language dialects can cause problems
with the voice recognition feature. Speak loud
and clear.
Using the voice activation
system of the smartphone
A smartphone connected to the vehicle can be
used via voice activation.
Activate voice command response on the smart‐
phone for this purpose.
1. Press and hold the button on the
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.
Voice command response is activated on the
smartphone.
2.
Release the button.
If activation is successful, a confirmation ap‐
pears on the Control Display.
If it was not possible to activate voice command
response, the list of Bluetooth devices appears
on the Control Display.
Seite 55
iDrive
CONTROLS
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
BMW Remote Software
Upgrade
Concept
Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up‐
date the software of the vehicle. Remote Soft‐
ware Upgrade makes new functions, functional
enhancements or quality improvements availa‐
ble.
General information
BMW recommends performing the Remote
Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes availa‐
ble.
The upgrade will not be installed until it was con‐
firmed on the vehicle.
▷ The installation may take around 20 minutes.
▷ The installation cannot be terminated.
▷ The vehicle cannot be used during the instal‐
lation.
▷ The vehicle can be exited during the installa‐
tion.
Validity of the Owner's Manual
Production of the vehicle
At the time of production at the plant, the printed
Owner's Manual is the most current resource.
After a software update in the
vehicle
After a vehicle software update – such as, a Re‐
mote Software Upgrade – the Integrated Own‐
er's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest
information.
Functional requirement
The use of the Remote Software Upgrade re‐
quires an active ConnectedDrive contract.
Information about the version
General information
The information about the version contains a de‐
scription of the updates that are included in the
Remote Software Upgrade. During the download
and after the installation has been completed
successfully, the information about the version
can be displayed on the Control Display. The in‐
formation is available in the ConnectedDrive cus‐
tomer portal at any time.
Displaying information about the
version
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. "Installed version:"
Seite 56
CONTROLS
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Safety information
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Search for and download of an
upgrade
General information
There are various options to search for and
download an upgrade:
▷ Automatic.
▷ Via iDrive.
▷ Via BMW Connected app.
Automatic
The available data for Remote Software Upgrade
is automatically loaded into the vehicle.
Via iDrive
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. "Search for upgrades"
6. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
Via BMW Connected app
1. Download the available upgrade to the smart‐
phone in the BMW Connected app.
2. Follow the instructions in the BMW Con‐
nected app.
3. Establish a WiFi and Bluetooth connection
between the smartphone and the vehicle.
The data transfer of the upgrade from the
smartphone to the vehicle occurs while driv‐
ing.
4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
Install the upgrade
General information
After successful download completion, installa‐
tion is offered once the vehicle is parked.
Follow the instructions on the Control Display.
After the successful completion of the upgrade,
booked services, for example RTTI, will be reacti‐
vated automatically while driving.
Functional requirements
▷ The battery is sufficiently charged.
▷ The external temperature is above
14 ℉/-10 ℃.
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ Hazard warning system is switched off.
▷ Transmission position P is engaged.
Preparing the vehicle
▷ Park the vehicle safely away from the public
road.
▷ Ensure cellular network reception so that an
error message can be sent, for example if the
installation is terminated.
Seite 57
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ Close the convertible top.
▷ Close the windows.
▷ Close the trunk lid.
▷ Remove energy consuming devices, such as
a mobile phone.
▷ The remote control is in the vehicle at the
start of the installation.
▷ Switch off the exterior lighting.
Additional vehicle related functional require‐
ments are shown on the Control Display.
Install the upgrade later
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. "Start upgrade now"
Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
Functional limitations
During the upgrade, the majority of functions is
temporarily unavailable, for instance:
▷ Hazard warning system.
▷ Central locking system.
▷ Parking lights.
▷ Horn.
▷ Alarm system.
▷ Emergency Request.
▷ Power windows.
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
from the outside using the integrated key.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, follow the instruc‐
tions on the Control Display or in the BMW Con‐
nected app.
If the malfunction cannot be remedied, contact a
dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
Seite 58
CONTROLS
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
General settings
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Messages
Concept
The menu centrally displays all messages arriv‐
ing in the vehicle in list form.
General information
The following messages can be displayed:
▷ Traffic messages.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Service requirements messages.
▷ Communication messages, for example e-
mails, SMS text messages or reminders.
▷ Messages from, e.g., the Concierge service
or the BMW Connected app.
▷ Messages from the vehicle manufacturer.
The number of messages is additionally dis‐
played in the status field.
The Messages menu can also be created as
Widget, refer to page 48.
Retrieving messages
Via iDrive:
1. Tip the Controller up.
2. "Notifications"
3. Select the desired message.
Deleting messages
All messages, except Check Control messages
or messages from the vehicle manufacturer, can
be deleted from the list.
Check Control messages or messages from the
vehicle manufacturer are displayed as long as
they are relevant.
Via iDrive:
1.
Tip the Controller up.
2. "Notifications"
3. Select desired message, for instance. SMS.
4.
Press the button.
5. "Delete"
Adjusting
The following settings can be adjusted:
▷ Select the applications, from which mes‐
sages will be permitted.
▷ All messages or a limited time period for re‐
ceived messages.
Via iDrive:
1.
Tip the Controller up.
2. "Notifications"
3. "Settings"
4. Move the Controller to the right.
5. Select the desired setting.
Seite 59
General settings
CONTROLS
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Time
Setting the time zone
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Date and time"
5. "Time zone:"
6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the time
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Date and time"
5. "Time"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are
displayed.
7. Press the Controller.
8. Turn the Controller until the desired minutes
are displayed.
9. "OK"
Setting the time format
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Date and time"
5. "Time format:"
6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Automatic time setting
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
updated automatically.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Date and time"
5. "Automatic time setting"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Date
Setting the date
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Date and time"
5. "Date:"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired day is
displayed.
7. Press the Controller.
8. Make the settings for the month and year.
9. "OK"
Setting the date format
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Date and time"
5. "Date format:"
6. Select the desired setting.
Seite 60
CONTROLS
General settings
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Language
Setting the language
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Language:"
5. "System language"
6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the voice dialog
For voice dialog for the voice activation system,
refer to page 54.
Setting the units of
measurement
Depending on the country version, you can set
the units of measurement for some values, for in‐
stance consumption, distances, and tempera‐
ture.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Units"
5. Select the desired menu item.
6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Trip data settings
Concept
The intervals in which the trip data, refer to
page 153, will be reset can be configured.
Resetting trip data
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Reset trip data"
5. Select the desired setting.
Speed warning
Concept
A speed limit can be set that when reached will
cause a warning to be issued.
General information
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed ex‐
ceeds the set speed limit again, after it has drop‐
ped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.
Adjusting
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Speed warning"
5. "Warning at:"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is
displayed.
7. Press the Controller.
Seite 61
General settings
CONTROLS
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Activating/deactivating
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Speed warning"
5. "Speed warning"
Setting your current speed as
the speed warning
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Speed warning"
5. "Select current speed"
Driver Attention Camera
Concept
A camera that monitors driver activity is located
in the instrument cluster. The camera evaluates
the head position and eye opening and uses the
data to analyze the attention of the driver. This
system supports various vehicle assistance sys‐
tems, e.g.:
▷ Fatigue alert, refer to page 201.
▷ Steering and traffic jam assistant with As‐
sisted Driving Plus, refer to page 221.
For the position in the instrument cluster, refer to
page 142.
Activating/deactivating
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Driver Attention Camera"
5. Select the desired setting.
System limits
The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully
functional in the following situations:
▷ When the Driver Attention Camera is covered
by the steering wheel rim.
▷ When the driver is wearing infrared imperme‐
able sunglasses.
Activating/deactivating
popup windows
For some functions, popup windows are dis‐
played automatically on the Control Display.
Some of these popup windows can be activated
or deactivated.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Pop-ups"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Activating/deactivating the
display of the current
vehicle position
Concept
If vehicle tracking has been activated, the current
vehicle position can be displayed in the BMW
Connected app or in the ConnectedDrive cus‐
tomer portal.
Seite 62
CONTROLS
General settings
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Activating/deactivating
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Vehicle tracking"
5. Select the desired setting.
Control Display
Brightness
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
7. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness settings may not be clearly visible.
Data protection
Data transfer
Concept
The vehicle offers different services, whose use
requires a data transfer to BMW or a service pro‐
vider. The data transfer can be deactivated for
some services.
General information
When the data transfer is deactivated, the re‐
spective service cannot be used.
Only make these settings while stationary.
Activating/deactivating
Follow the instructions on the Control Display.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. "Agree and activate all"
All services and functions that are relevant for
data protection will be activated or deacti‐
vated.
Configuring the data transfer
The data transfer can be configured individually
for separate services.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. "Configure services"
6. Select the desired setting.
Deleting personal data in the
vehicle
Concept
Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores per‐
sonal data, such as stored radio stations. This
personal data can be permanently deleted using
iDrive.
General information
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing data can be deleted:
▷ Driver profile settings.
▷ Stored radio stations.
Seite 63
General settings
CONTROLS
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ Stored programmable memory buttons.
▷ Travel and Onboard Computer information.
▷ Music hard disk.
▷ Navigation, for instance stored destinations.
▷ Phone book.
▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cookies.
▷ Office data, for instance voice notes.
▷ Login accounts.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
to 15 minutes.
Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Deleting data
The personal data in the vehicle will be deleted
when the vehicle is reset to the factory settings.
For resetting the vehicle to factory settings, refer
to page 71.
Connecting mobile devices
to the vehicle
Concept
Various connection types are available for using
mobile devices in the vehicle. The connection
type to select depends on the mobile device and
the desired function.
General information
The following overview shows possible functions
and the suitable connection types for them. The
scope of functions depends on the mobile de‐
vice.
Function Connec‐
tion type
Making calls via the hands-free
system.
Using phone functions via iDrive
or touchscreen.
Other functions, e.g. Contacts or
SMS.
Bluetooth.
Playing music from the smart‐
phone or the audio player.
Bluetooth or
USB.
USB storage device:
Playing music.
USB.
Playing videos from the smart‐
phone or the USB storage de‐
vice.
USB.
Using the vehicle Internet ac‐
cess.
WiFi hotspot
via WiFi.
Using Apple CarPlay apps via
iDrive and voice operation.
Bluetooth
and WiFi.
Screen Mirroring:
Showing the smartphone display
on the Control Display.
WiFi.
The following connection types require one-time
pairing with the vehicle:
▷ Bluetooth.
▷ WiFi hotspot.
▷ Apple CarPlay.
▷ Screen Mirroring.
Paired devices are automatically recognized later
on and connected to the vehicle.
Seite 64
CONTROLS
General settings
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Safety information
Warning
Operating the integrated information systems
and communication devices while driving can
distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only
use the systems or devices when the traffic sit‐
uation allows. As warranted, stop and use the
systems and devices while the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.
Compatible devices
General information
Information on mobile devices compatible with
the vehicle can be found at www.bmwusa.com/
bluetooth.
Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed
or deviating software versions.
Displaying the vehicle identification
number and software part number
When looking for compatible devices, you may
have to state the vehicle identification number
and the software part number. These numbers
can be displayed in the vehicle.
Via iDrive:
1.
"COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth® info"
6. "System information"
Bluetooth connection
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 65, with
Bluetooth interface.
▷ The remote control or BMW display key is in
the vehicle.
▷ The device is ready for operation.
▷ Bluetooth is switched on in the vehicle, refer
to page 65, and on the device.
▷ The pairing readiness is displayed on the
Control Display.
▷ Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility, may
be required on the device; refer to the own‐
er's manual of the device.
Switching on Bluetooth
Via iDrive:
1.
"COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth®"
6. Select setting.
Activating/deactivating
telephone functions
To use all supported functions of a mobile
phone, activate the desired functions in the vehi‐
cle prior to pairing the mobile phone with the ve‐
hicle as needed.
Via iDrive:
1.
"COM"
2. "Personalize menu"
3. Select the desired settings, for instance"Text
messages".
Seite 65
General settings
CONTROLS
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Pairing the mobile device with
the vehicle
Via iDrive:
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. "New device"
5. Select the desired function:
▷ "Phone calls and Bluetooth® audio"
▷ "Audio"
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on
the Control Display.
6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth
devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle.
A control number is displayed.
7. Compare the control number displayed on
the Control Display with the control number
on the display of the mobile device, and con‐
firm that the two match.
8. Select Bluetooth connection if necessary:
"Use BMW iDrive for phone calls, Bluetooth®
audio, and apps."
The mobile device is connected to the vehicle
and displayed in the device list, refer to
page 70.
Frequently Asked Questions
All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐
pected.
In this case, the following explanations can help:
Why could the mobile phone not be paired or
connected?
▷ There are too many Bluetooth devices con‐
nected to the mobile phone or vehicle.
In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connections
with other devices.
Delete the Bluetooth connection from the de‐
vice list on the mobile phone and start a new
device search.
Too many Bluetooth devices with the same
function are paired.
▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode or
has only a limited remaining battery life.
Charge the mobile phone and deactivate the
power-save mode where required.
Why does the mobile phone no longer react?
▷ The applications on the mobile phone do not
function anymore.
Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
▷ Too high or too low ambient temperature for
mobile phone operation.
Do not subject the mobile phone to extreme
ambient temperatures.
Why can phone functions not be used via iDrive?
▷ Phone functions are not configured for the
mobile phone.
Connect the mobile phone with the tele‐
phone function.
Why are no or not all phone book entries dis‐
played or why are they incomplete?
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete.
▷ It is possible that only the phone book entries
of the mobile phone or the SIM card are
transmitted.
▷ It may not be possible to display phone book
entries with special characters.
▷ It may not be possible to transmit contacts
from social networks.
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
transmitted is too high.
▷ Data volume of the contact too large, for in‐
stance due to stored information such as
notes.
Reduce the data volume of the contact.
▷ A mobile phone can only be connected as
audio source or as telephone.
Seite 66
CONTROLS
General settings
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Configure the mobile phone and connect it
with the telephone function.
▷ Contact was created in the contact list of the
phone after the last synchronization.
Synchronize contacts again: "Reload
contacts"
How can the phone connection quality be im‐
proved?
▷ Adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal on
the mobile phone, depending on the mobile
phone.
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the wireless
charging tray.
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone sepa‐
rately in the sound settings.
If all points in this list have been checked and the
required function is still not available, contact the
hotline, a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
USB connection
General information
Mobile devices with a USB port are connected to
the USB interface.
▷ Mobile phones.
▷ Audio devices such as MP3 players.
▷ USB storage devices.
Common file systems are supported. FAT32
and exFAT are the recommended formats.
A connected USB storage device will be sup‐
plied with charge current via the USB interface if
the device supports this. Follow the maximum
charge current of the USB interface.
The following uses are possible on USB interfa‐
ces with data transfer:
▷ Playing music files.
▷ Playing videos.
Follow the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the connec‐
tor into the USB interface.
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
▷ Protect the USB storage device against me‐
chanical damage.
▷ Due to the large number of USB storage de‐
vices available on the market, it cannot be
guaranteed that every device is operable on
the vehicle.
▷ Do not expose USB storage devices to ex‐
treme environmental conditions, such as very
high temperatures; refer to the owner's
manual of the device.
▷ Due to the many different compression tech‐
niques, proper playback of the media stored
on the USB storage device cannot be guar‐
anteed in all cases.
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the stored
data, do not charge a USB storage device via
the onboard socket, when it is connected to
the USB interface.
▷ Depending on how the USB storage device is
being used, settings may be required on the
USB storage device, refer to the owner's
manual of the device.
Not compatible USB media:
▷ USB hard drives.
▷ USB hubs.
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple slots.
▷ HFS-formatted USB storage devices.
▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.
Functional requirement
Compatible device, refer to page 65, with USB
interface.
Connecting the device
Connect the USB storage device using a suitable
adapter cable to a USB interface, refer to
page 270.
The USB storage device is displayed in the de‐
vice list, refer to page 70.
Seite 67
General settings
CONTROLS
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
WiFi hotspot
Concept
Compatible devices with WiFi interface can use
the Internet connection of the vehicle via the
WiFi hotspot.
General information
Up to 10 devices can be connected to the
WiFi hotspot simultaneously.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 65, with ac‐
tivated WiFi interface.
▷ WiFi is activated on the vehicle.
▷ Internet use is activated for the vehicle.
▷ Registration and data contract with a service
provider where required.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
Connecting a device to the
Internet via the WiFi hotspot
Using the Internet for the first time via the
WiFi hotspot requires registration and possibly a
data volume purchase from a service provider.
Depending on the country version, data volume
can be purchased via the connected mobile de‐
vice or from the ConnectedDrive Store.
Via iDrive:
1.
"COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. "New device"
5. "Internet"
Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis‐
played on the Control Display.
6. Activate Internet usage via WiFi if necessary.
"Open settings"
7. Activate Internet usage.
"Internet connection"
8. Move the Controller to the left.
9. Search for WiFi networks on the mobile de‐
vice. Select network name on the device.
10.Enter hotspot code on the device and con‐
nect.
The device is displayed in the device list, refer to
page 70.
Additionally, a QR code will be displayed on the
Control Display. Alternatively, this QR code can
be used to pair the mobile device with the hot‐
spot.
All devices connected via the hotspot use this
data volume.
Deactivating Internet usage via
the WiFi hotspot
Internet usage may be deactivated if the data
volume is used up, for instance.
Via iDrive:
1.
"COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. "Settings"
5. "Internet connection"
6. Select the required setting.
Apple CarPlay preparation
Concept
CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible
Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation
and iDrive.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible iPhone, refer to page 65.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
▷ Corresponding mobile contract.
Seite 68
CONTROLS
General settings
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice operation are
activated on the iPhone.
▷ Booking the ConnectedDrive service: Apple
CarPlay preparation.
Switching on Bluetooth and
CarPlay
Via iDrive:
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. "Settings"
5. Select the following setting:
"Apple CarPlay"
6. Activate the function.
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay
Via iDrive:
1.
"COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. "New device"
5. "Phone calls and Bluetooth® audio"
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on
the Control Display.
6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth
devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle.
A control number is displayed.
7. Compare the control number displayed on
the Control Display with the control number
on the display of the mobile device, and con‐
firm that the two match.
8. Select CarPlay:
"Confirm note and connect to Apple CarPlay"
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐
played in the device list, refer to page 70.
Operation
For more information, refer to the Integrated
Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Communication.
Frequently Asked Questions
All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐
pected.
In this case, the following explanations can help:
The iPhone has already been paired with Apple
CarPlay. When a new connection is established,
CarPlay can no longer be selected.
▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the device
list.
▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle concerned
from the list of stored connections under
Bluetooth and under WiFi.
▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device.
If the steps listed have been carried out and the
required function is still not available: contact the
hotline, a dealer's service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Screen Mirroring
General information
Screen Mirroring enables mirroring (outputting)
of the smartphone display on the Control Dis‐
play.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible smartphone, refer to page 65,
with Screen Mirroring interface.
▷ Screen Mirroring is switched on on the
smartphone.
▷ WiFi is switched on in the vehicle.
Seite 69
General settings
CONTROLS
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Activate WiFi in the vehicle
Via iDrive:
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. "Settings"
5. "Wi-Fi®"
Pairing a smartphone with
Screen Mirroring
Via iDrive:
1.
"COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. "New device"
5. "Screen Mirroring"
The WiFi name of the vehicle is displayed on
the Control Display.
6. Search for WiFi devices in the surroundings
of the smartphone.
The WiFi name of the vehicle appears on the
device display. Select the WiFi name of the
vehicle.
7. Confirm the connection via iDrive.
The device is connected and displayed in the
device list, refer to page 70.
Managing mobile devices
General information
▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are auto‐
matically recognized and reconnected when
standby state is switched on.
▷ After stored content on the SIM card or the
mobile phone, such as contacts, has been
detected, the data is transmitted to the vehi‐
cle and can be used via iDrive.
▷ For some devices, certain settings are neces‐
sary, for instance authorization; see the own‐
er's manual of the device.
Displaying the device list
All devices paired with or connected to the vehi‐
cle are displayed in the device list.
A maximum of 4 devices can be connected to
the vehicle via Bluetooth, and a maximum of 10
devices can be connected to the vehicle via WiFi.
A maximum of 20 devices will be detected.
Via iDrive:
1.
"COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
A symbol indicates, for which function a device is
used. When the icon is displayed in white, this
function is actively connected to the vehicle. The
icon is displayed in gray when the function of the
device is inactive.
Symbol Meaning
Telephone.
Bluetooth audio.
WiFi hotspot.
Apple CarPlay.
Screen Mirroring.
Configuring the device
Functions can be activated or deactivated for
paired and connected devices.
If a function is assigned to a device, the function
will be deactivated where appropriate for a de‐
vice that is already connected and the device will
be disconnected. Follow the information on the
Control Display.
Via iDrive:
1.
"COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
Seite 70
CONTROLS
General settings
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
3. Select the desired device.
4. Select the desired setting.
▷ "Disconnect device"
The device remains paired and can be
connected again.
▷ "Connect device"
The functions that were assigned to the
device before disconnecting are assigned
to the device when it is reconnected. The
functions may be deactivated on a device
already connected.
▷ "Delete device"
The device is disconnected and removed
from the device list.
Priority of the phones
When two mobile phones are connected to the
vehicle, you can specify the priority of the mobile
phones for reconnection.
Via iDrive:
1.
"COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. "Settings"
5. "Priorities for telephones"
6. Select the desired device.
7. Turn the controller to select the priority for
the selected mobile phone.
Select the desired priority by sliding.
Resetting the vehicle
configuration
All individual settings can be reset to the factory
settings when the drive-ready state is switched
off.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Reset vehicle data"
5. "Reset vehicle data"
When the stored settings in a driver profile are
synchronized with the ConnectedDrive account,
these settings will remain in the ConnectedDrive
account.
Seite 71
General settings
CONTROLS
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Remote control
General information
Depending on the equipment version, the vehicle
is delivered with two remote controls or one re‐
mote control and the BMW display key, refer to
page 77.
Each remote control contains a replaceable bat‐
tery, refer to page 75.
Depending on the equipment and country ver‐
sion, various settings, refer to page 96, can be
configured for the button functions.
A driver profile, refer to page 91, with personal
settings can be assigned to a remote control.
To provide information on maintenance require‐
ments, the service data is stored in the remote
control, refer to page 333.
To prevent possible locking in of the remote
control, take the remote control with you when
exiting the vehicle.
Safety information
Warning
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In
this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the
remote control with you so that the vehicle can
be opened from the outside.
Warning
For some country versions, unlocking from the
inside is only possible with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Seite 72
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Overview
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
Stationary climate control through Remote
Engine Start 261
3 Opening the trunk lid
4 Press and hold or press three times in quick
succession: panic mode
Press briefly: headlight courtesy delay feature
Unlocking
General information
The behavior of the vehicle when unlocking with
the remote control depends on the following set‐
tings, refer to page 96, for unlocking and lock‐
ing:
▷ If only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap
or all access to the vehicle will be unlocked.
▷ If the unlocking of the vehicle is confirmed
with a light signal or a sound signal.
▷ If the welcome light, refer to page 160, is
switched on when the vehicle is being un‐
locked.
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded
out and in when the vehicle is unlocked and
locked.
Unlocking the vehicle
Press the button on the remote control.
If, due to the settings, only the driver's door and
fuel filler flap were unlocked, press the button on
the remote control again to unlock the other ve‐
hicle access points.
In addition, the following functions are executed:
▷ If a driver profile, refer to page 91, was as‐
signed to the remote control, this driver pro‐
file will be activated and the settings that are
stored in it will be applied.
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off. For switch‐
ing the interior lights on/off manually, refer to
page 163.
▷ With alarm system: The alarm system, refer
to page 97, will be switched off.
After opening one of the front doors, the vehicle
is ready for operation, refer to page 42.
The light functions may depend on the ambient
brightness.
Convenient opening
Safety information
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when opening and
closing the convertible top. There is a risk of in‐
jury. When opening and closing the convertible
top, observe the movement and keep the area
of movement clear.
Opening
Press and hold the button on the re‐
mote control.
The windows open for as long as the button on
the remote control is pressed.
With Comfort Access:
If close to the vehicle, the convertible top is also
opened.
Press and hold this button on the re‐
mote control until the convertible top is
Seite 73
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
fully opened and the convertible top well storage
cover is fully closed. Leaving the vicinity of the
vehicle stops the motion.
Locking
General information
The behavior of the vehicle during locking with
the remote control depends on the following set‐
tings, refer to page 96:
▷ If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed with
a light signal or a sound signal.
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded
in and out when the vehicle is locked and un‐
locked.
▷ If the headlight courtesy delay feature, refer
to page 160, is activated during locking.
Locking the vehicle
1.
Close the driver's door.
2.
Press the button on the remote control.
The following functions are executed:
▷ All doors, the trunk lid, and the fuel filler flap
are locked.
▷ With alarm system: The alarm system, refer
to page 97, will be switched on.
If the drive-ready state is still switched on when
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn honks
twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must be
switched off by means of the Start/Stop button.
With Comfort Access:
convenient closing
Safety information
Warning
With convenient closing, body parts can be
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.
Closing
Press and hold the button on the remote
control after locking.
The windows and the convertible top are closed
in the area close to the vehicle, as long as the
button on the remote control is pressed.
Press and hold this button on the remote
control until the convertible top is fully
closed and the convertible top well storage cover
is fully closed. Leaving the vicinity of the vehicle
stops the motion.
Switching on the interior and
exterior lights
Press the button on the remote control
with the vehicle locked.
The function is not available for the first 10 sec‐
onds after locking.
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off. For switch‐
ing the interior lights on/off manually, refer to
page 163.
▷ Depending on the settings, the exterior light‐
ing, refer to page 160, will be switched on.
The light functions may depend on the ambient
brightness.
Seite 74
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Trunk lid
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the
remote control in the cargo area.
You can set up if the doors will be unlocked
when the trunk lid is opened with the remote
control. Settings, refer to page 96.
Safety information
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear
during opening and closing.
NOTICE
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid
is clear during opening and closing.
Opening
Press and hold the button on the re‐
mote control for approx. 1 second.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
self in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press the button on the remote con‐
trol and hold for at least 3 seconds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote control
three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Headlight courtesy delay feature
on
Press and hold the button on the re‐
mote control for approx. 1 second.
It is possible to adjust the duration of the head‐
light courtesy delay feature, refer to page 160.
Replacing the battery
1. Remove the integrated key from the remote
control, refer to page 81.
2. Place the integrated key underneath the bat‐
tery compartment cover, arrow 1, and lift the
cover with a lever movement of the
integrated key, arrow 2.
3. Push battery in the direction of the arrow us‐
ing a pointed object and lift it out.
4. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the posi‐
tive side facing up.
5. Press the cover closed.
Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop or take
them to a collection point.
Seite 75
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Additional remote controls
Additional remote controls are available from a
dealer's service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
Loss of the remote controls
A lost remote control can be blocked and re‐
placed by a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
If the lost remote control has an assigned driver
profile, refer to page 91, the connection to this
remote control must be deleted. A new remote
control can then be assigned to the driver profile.
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message, refer to page 144, is
displayed.
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. For replacing the battery, refer to
page 75.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment with
high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal
objects.
Do not transport the remote control together
with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐
bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐
rect proximity to the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control together
with electronic devices.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a charg‐
ing process of mobile devices, for instance
charging of a mobile phone.
▷ The remote control is in direct proximity of
the wireless charging tray.
Place the remote control down at a different
location.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can be
unlocked and locked from the outside with the
integrated key, refer to page 81.
Switching the drive-ready state on
via emergency detection of the
remote control
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
state if the remote control has not been de‐
tected.
Proceed as follows in this case:
1.
Hold the remote control with its back against
the marked area on the steering column. Pay
attention to the display in the instrument
cluster.
2. If the remote control is detected:
Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐
onds.
If the remote control is not detected, slightly
change the position of the remote control and re‐
peat the procedure.
Frequently Asked Questions
What precautions can be taken to be able to
open a vehicle with an accidentally locked in re‐
mote control?
▷ The options provided by the Remote Serv‐
ices of the BMW Connected app include the
ability to lock and unlock a vehicle.
Seite 76
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
This requires an active BMW Connected‐
Drive contract and the BMW Connected app
must be installed on a smartphone.
▷ Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via
the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center.
An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is
required.
BMW display key
General information
The BMW display key is supplied with an addi‐
tional mechanical key. If the display key is used,
the mechanical key should be carried with you,
for instance in the wallet. The mechanical key is
used like the integrated key, refer to page 81.
The display key supports all functions of the
standard remote control.
In addition, the following functions are also avail‐
able:
▷ Display status of doors and windows.
▷ Display status of the anti-theft warning sys‐
tem.
▷ Display service information.
▷ Call up range with available fuel.
▷ Stationary climate control through Remote
Engine Start
Safety information
Warning
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In
this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the
remote control with you so that the vehicle can
be opened from the outside.
Warning
For some country versions, unlocking from the
inside is only possible with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Overview
1 Opening the trunk lid
2 Unlocking
3 Press and hold or press three times in quick
succession: panic mode
Seite 77
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Press briefly: headlight courtesy delay feature
4 Locking
5 Display
6 Back
7 Switch the display on/off
8 Micro-USB charging socket
Reception range
The number of available display key functions
depends on the distance from the vehicle.
▷ When you are in close proximity to the vehi‐
cle, all functions of the display key are availa‐
ble.
▷ The status information can be called up in the
extended reception range.
With parked-car heating: the parked-car heat‐
ing can be operated.
Without parked-car heating: the parked-car
ventilation can be operated.
▷ Outside of the reception range of the vehicle,
you can display the last transmitted status in‐
formation from the vehicle.
The symbol is shown on the display if one of
the buttons is pressed outside of the reception
range.
Display
General information
The display is divided into the upper status line,
the information area, and the lower status line.
Upper status line
The upper status line displays the following infor‐
mation:
▷ Vehicle secured.
Vehicle not secured.
▷ Set time in the vehicle.
▷ Charge state of the display key battery.
Information area
The information area can be used to access in‐
formation and perform additional functions.
If the information area contains more than one
page, then page indicators are shown beneath
the information.
A solid indicator denotes the current
page.
Swipe to the right or left with a finger to change
between the pages.
If further information is available on a page, tap
the appropriate symbol.
To return to the original page: tap on the
symbol beneath the display.
Lower status line
The lower status line indicates whether or not
the display key is within reception range, refer to
page 78.
▷ "Connected": the display key is within recep‐
tion range.
▷ "Updated": the display key is not within re‐
ception range. It indicates when the last data
transfer from the vehicle took place.
Switching on/off
The display will go out automatically after a brief
period to conserve battery power.
To hide the display manually:
Press the button on the left side of the display
key. For an overview, refer to page 77.
To show the display:
1.
Press the button on the left side of the dis‐
play key.
2. Then, swipe with your finger from bottom to
top to unlock the screen lock.
To switch off the display to increase the usable
battery life:
1.
If necessary, cancel the screen lock.
Seite 78
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
2. Press and hold the button on the left side of
the display key for longer than 4 seconds.
3. "OK"
To switch the display on:
Press the button on the left side of the display
key.
Operating concept
The relevant submenus can be accessed from
the following main menus:
Main menu Information/Function
"Security
information"
/
Door status.
Alarm system status.
After alarm triggering: date,
time, and reason for triggering
the alarm.
Window status.
"Vehicle
information"
Maintenance indicators of Con‐
dition Based Service CBS, refer
to page 333.
Status of the roadside parking
lights.
"Mobility info" Range with available fuel.
"Precondit.
setting"
With parked-car heating: oper‐
ate parked-car heating, refer to
page 259.
Without parked-car heating:
operate parked-car ventilation,
refer to page 259.
Stationary climate control
through Remote Engine Start,
refer to page 261
Display key battery
General information
Follow the following information:
▷ If the charge state of the display key battery
declines, the display is switched off automati‐
cally. The battery must be recharged so that
the display can be switched back on. The op‐
erability of the standard buttons is retained
until the battery is completely discharged.
▷ Charge the battery for at least three hours
before using the display key for the first time
or if the key has not been used for an ex‐
tended period.
▷ The display key can be used while it is being
charged via the USB port. If the battery is fully
discharged, it may take some time before the
display key can be used again.
▷ Due to the large number of USB chargers
available on the market, it cannot be guaran‐
teed that every charger will function properly.
The charging duration depends on the
charger used.
▷ Charging via the USB port may heat up the
charger and the display key.
Charging in the wireless charging tray may
heat up the tray and the display key.
At higher temperatures, the charge current
through the display key may be reduced, and
in isolated cases the charge process may be
interrupted temporarily.
▷ When inserting the display key into the wire‐
less charging tray, make sure there are no
objects between it and the wireless charging
tray.
Safety information
Warning
When charging a device that meets the Qi
standard in the wireless charging tray, any
metal objects located between the device and
the tray can become very hot. If smart cards,
memory cards or cards with magnetic strips are
placed between the device and the tray, this
may impair card function. There is a risk of in‐
jury and risk of damage to property. When
Seite 79
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
charging mobile devices, make sure there are
no objects between the device and the tray.
Charging
Via USB
Connect the display key via the micro-USB
charging socket to a USB port.
In the wireless charging tray
1. Open the tray cover.
2. Place the display key into the middle of the
wireless charging tray in front of the cup
holder.
Ensure that the display is facing up.
3. Close the tray cover.
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
BMW display key detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
▷ The battery of the display key is discharged.
Charge the battery, refer to page 79.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment with
high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the display key due to metal ob‐
jects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐
bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐
rect proximity.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a charg‐
ing process of mobile devices, for instance
charging of a mobile phone.
Do not transport the display key together with
metal objects or electronic devices.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also
be unlocked and locked from the outside with
the mechanical key.
Switching on drive-ready state via
emergency detection of the BMW
display key
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
state if the display key has not been detected.
Proceed as follows in this case:
1.
Hold the display key with its back against the
marked area on the steering column. Pay at‐
tention to the display in the instrument clus‐
ter.
2. If the display key is detected:
Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐
onds.
If the display key is not detected, slightly change
the position of the display key and repeat the
procedure.
Resetting the BMW display key
If the charged display key cannot be switched on
anymore or if the display does not respond to
entries anymore, the display key can be reset.
Seite 80
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Press and hold the button on the left side of the
display key for at least 20 seconds, until some‐
thing appears on the display.
Integrated key
General information
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
without the remote control using the integrated
key.
The integrated key also fits the glove compart‐
ment.
Safety information
Warning
For some country versions, unlocking from the
inside is only possible with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.
NOTICE
The door lock is permanently joined with the
door. The door handle can be moved. When
pulling the door handle with the integrated key
inserted, paint or the integrated key can be
damaged. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Remove the integrated key before pulling
the outside door handle.
Removing
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
integrated key, arrow 2.
Locking/unlocking via the door
lock
1.
Pull and hold the door handle outward with
one hand.
2. Guide one finger of your other hand from the
back under the cover and push the cover out.
Use the thumb for counter support to prevent
the cover from falling out of the door handle.
Seite 81
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
3. Remove the cover.
4. Unlock or lock the door lock using the
integrated key.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
from the inside.
Alarm system
The alarm system is not switched on if the vehi‐
cle is locked with the integrated key.
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via the
door lock.
In order to stop the alarm, unlock the vehicle with
the remote control, if necessary through emer‐
gency detection of the remote control, refer to
page 76.
Buttons for the central
locking system
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning sys‐
tem and interior lights come on.
Overview
Buttons for the central locking system.
Locking
Press the button with the front doors
closed.
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
▷ The vehicle is not secured against theft when
locking.
Unlocking
Press the button.
Opening
▷ Press the button to unlock all the
doors.
Pull the door opener above the armrest.
▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on the door
to open the door. The other doors remain
locked.
▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handle on
the door to be opened; the first time unlocks
the door, the second time opens it. The other
doors remain locked.
Comfort Access
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control.
Seite 82
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
All you need to do is to have the remote control
with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the car's
interior.
General information
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle from the
door handle.
▷ Touchless unlocking and locking of the vehi‐
cle.
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle using the
BMW Digital Key.
▷ Opening trunk lid.
▷ Opening and closing the trunk lid with no-
touch activation.
Functional requirements
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control must
be located outside of the vehicle near the
doors.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
Unlocking
General information
The behavior of the vehicle during unlocking via
the Comfort Access depends on the following
settings, refer to page 96:
▷ If the unlocking of the vehicle is confirmed
with a light signal or a sound signal.
▷ If the welcome light, refer to page 160, is
switched on when the vehicle is being un‐
locked.
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded
out and in when the vehicle is unlocked and
locked.
Unlocking the vehicle
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.
Locking
General information
The behavior of the vehicle during locking via the
Comfort Access depends on the following set‐
tings, refer to page 96:
▷ If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed with
a light signal or a sound signal.
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded
out and in when the vehicle is unlocked and
locked.
▷ If the headlight courtesy delay feature, refer
to page 160, is activated during locking.
Locking the vehicle
Close the driver's door.
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a
closed vehicle door with your finger for approx.
1 second without grasping the door handle.
Seite 83
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Opening the trunk lid
General information
If you open the trunk lid via Comfort Access,
locked doors will not be unlocked.
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the
remote control in the cargo area.
Safety information
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear
during opening and closing.
NOTICE
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid
is clear during opening and closing.
Opening
Press the button on the exterior of the trunk lid.
Opening and closing the trunk lid
with no-touch activation
Concept
The trunk lid can be opened and closed with no-
touch activation using the remote control you are
carrying. Two sensors detect a forward-directed
foot motion in the central rear area and the trunk
lid is opened or closed.
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the
remote control in the cargo area.
If the remote control is in the sensor area, the
trunk lid may open or close inadvertently if you
unintentionally move your foot or if a foot move‐
ment is detected.
The sensor has an approximate range of
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehi‐
cle.
If you open the trunk lid with no-touch activation,
locked doors will not be unlocked.
Safety information
Warning
During no-touch activation, vehicle parts may
be touched, such as the hot exhaust gas sys‐
tem. There is a risk of injury. When moving your
foot, make sure you have a firm stance and do
not touch the vehicle.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear
during opening and closing.
NOTICE
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid
is clear during opening and closing.
Seite 84
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Performing the foot movement
1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at ap‐
prox. one arm's length away from the rear of
the vehicle.
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direction
of travel and immediately pull it back. With
this movement, the leg must pass through
the ranges of both sensors.
Opening
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
Before the trunk lid opens, the hazard warning
system flashes.
Moving your foot again will stop the opening mo‐
tion, and moving it one more time after that will
close the trunk lid.
Closing
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
The hazard warning system flashes and an
acoustic signal sounds.
Moving your foot again will stop the closing mo‐
tion, and moving it one more time after that will
re-open the trunk lid.
Touchless vehicle unlocking and
locking
Concept
The vehicle will be unlocked when the driver ap‐
proaches the locked vehicle with the remote
control.
When the driver walks away from the unlocked
vehicle with the remote control, the vehicle will
be locked.
General information
The vehicle will be unlocked when an authorized
remote control is detected in the unlocking zone.
The unlocking zone is located within a radius of
approx. 3 ft/1 m around the door handles.
The vehicle will be locked when the remote con‐
trol leaves the locking zone.
The locking zone is located within a radius of ap‐
prox. 7 ft/2 m around the door handles.
If the remote control is located in the unlocking
zone for an extended period of time without
movement, the vehicle will be locked automati‐
cally.
If a passenger is detected in the front passenger
seat during locking and the safety belt of the
front passenger is engaged in the safety belt
buckle during locking:
▷ The vehicle will be locked but not secured
against theft.
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
The behavior of the vehicle during touchless un‐
locking and locking depends on the following
settings, refer to page 96:
▷ If the automatic unlocking is active.
▷ If the automatic locking is active.
▷ If only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap
or all access to the vehicle will be unlocked.
Only driver's door and fuel filler flap: the driv‐
er's door and fuel filler flap will only be un‐
locked when the driver approaches the vehi‐
cle on the driver's side.
All vehicle entry points: the vehicle will be un‐
locked regardless of the side on which the
driver approaches the vehicle.
▷ If the unlocking and locking of the vehicle is
confirmed with a light signal or a sound sig‐
nal.
Seite 85
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ If the welcome light, refer to page 160, is
switched on when the vehicle is being un‐
locked.
▷ If the headlight courtesy delay feature, refer
to page 160, is activated during locking.
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded
out and in when the vehicle is unlocked and
locked.
Functional requirements
▷ The drive-ready state must be turned off.
▷ Unlocking: when entering the unlocking zone,
the doors and trunk lid must be closed.
▷ Locking: when leaving the locking zone, the
doors and trunk lid must be closed.
▷ If the vehicle was locked with the remote
control, it cannot be unlocked touchless. In
this case, unlock the vehicle using the out‐
side door handle.
▷ If the vehicle was unlocked with the remote
control, it cannot be locked touchless without
driving the vehicle first. In this case, lock the
vehicle using the outside door handle.
▷ For touchless locking of the vehicle, no sec‐
ond remote control can be located in the
locking zone.
▷ If the vehicle has been in the idle state for
several days, touchless unlocking and locking
is not possible until after the vehicle has been
driven.
BMW Digital Key
Concept
BMW Digital Key allows the vehicle to be un‐
locked and locked, as well as started, with a
compatible smartphone, refer to page 65.
General information
BMW Digital Key varies by country and may be
unavailable.
To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible
smartphone, a digital key must be installed on
this smartphone. Digital keys are installed, man‐
aged and forwarded via the BMW Connected
app.
A driver profile, refer to page 91, with individual
settings can be assigned to a digital key.
When using a smartphone with a digital key, al‐
ways carry a remote control with you too, so the
vehicle can still be accessed even if your smart‐
phone is not working. It is also useful to carry the
remote control with you if the vehicle has to be
handed over to another person or a service cen‐
ter. You can then hand over the remote control,
instead of your smartphone.
Key card
The vehicle is delivered with a key card. The key
card can be used in the same way as a compati‐
ble smartphone with a digital key.
A digital key that has already been paired with
the vehicle is installed on the key card. The digi‐
tal key must be activated via iDrive, refer to
page 87.
When you exit the vehicle, take the key card with
you, as it can be used to start the vehicle.
Connection to the vehicle
The communication between the vehicle and the
smartphone uses near-field communication,
NFC.
The vehicle is unlocked with the outside door
handle on the driver's side. The smartphone
must be placed into the smartphone tray to pair a
digital key and to start the engine.
The vehicle also detects a digital key when the
smartphone is switched off.
Functional requirements
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract.
▷ The BMW Connected app is installed on a
compatible smartphone.
▷ The rechargeable battery of the smartphone
has a sufficient charge. The necessary mini‐
Seite 86
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
mum charge of the rechargeable battery de‐
pends on the smartphone.
▷ A digital key for the vehicle is installed on the
smartphone.
▷ BMW Digital Key is activated for the vehicle.
Proving authorization
The vehicle owner must present proof of authori‐
zation for his vehicle at the service center to be
able to use BMW Digital Key. It is possible to use
the key card without proving authorization.
The vehicle owner configures a digital key code
at the service center so that digital keys can be
transferred at a later time.
Purchasing digital keys
An initial digital key is provided in the BMW Con‐
nected app when the vehicle is purchased.
Additional digital keys can be purchased via the
BMW ConnectedDrive Store. The purchase of
digital keys can cause costs.
The period of validity of a digital key is limited.
The expiration date of the validity can be
checked in the BMW Connected app and in the
vehicle.
If a digital key has expired, the vehicle can only
be unlocked and locked for a limited period and a
limited number of engine starts is possible. The
corresponding information is shown on the Con‐
trol Display.
Transferring digital keys
The vehicle owner can transfer a digital key for
his/her vehicle to another person with a compati‐
ble smartphone via the BMW Connected app.
When a digital key is transferred, a transaction
number TAN will be generated. Another person
can pair the digital key in the vehicle with this
TAN and the Digital Key Code. This makes it
possible to allow another person to use the vehi‐
cle without having to be at the vehicle.
The TAN and the Digital Key Code should only
be disclosed in person or by phone.
The transferred digital key can be removed in the
vehicle or via the BMW Connected app at any
time.
If the digital key has been removed via the BMW
Connected App, the vehicle can still be unlocked
and locked for a limited period of time and only a
limited number of engine starts will be possible. If
the vehicle is then used with another digital key
or with a remote control, the removed digital key
can no longer be used.
The corresponding information is shown on the
Control Display.
Pairing digital keys in the vehicle
To pair a digital key, a remote control must be lo‐
cated in the vehicle or an active digital key of the
vehicle owner must be in the smartphone tray.
If the digital key was transferred by the vehicle
owner, it may not be possible to meet this re‐
quirement. In this case, it is necessary to enter
the Digital Key Code and the TAN. The vehicle
can already be unlocked with the transferred dig‐
ital key before it is paired.
Place the smartphone with the digital key to be
paired into the smartphone tray.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/Access"
4. "BMW Digital Key"
5. "Add new digital key"
6. If necessary, enter the Digital Key Code and
the TAN.
After the digital key has been paired, its name will
be displayed in the list of digital keys.
Activating/deactivating digital keys
in the vehicle
A digital key can be deactivated temporarily.
To activate or deactivate a digital key, a remote
control must be located in the vehicle or an ac‐
Seite 87
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
tive digital key of the vehicle owner must be in
the smartphone tray.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/Access"
4. "BMW Digital Key"
5. Select the desired digital key.
6. "Digital key active"
A deactivated digital key remains in the list of
paired digital keys.
Removing digital keys in the vehicle
To remove a digital key, a remote control must
be located in the vehicle or another active digital
key of the vehicle owner must be in the smart‐
phone tray. To remove all digital keys, a remote
control must be located in the vehicle.
The key card cannot be removed.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/Access"
4. "BMW Digital Key"
5. If necessary, select the digital key.
6.
▷ "Remove digital key"
The digital key will be removed from the
list of paired digital keys.
▷ "Remove all digital keys"
Resetting BMW Digital Key
To reset BMW Digital Key, an authorized remote
control must be located in the vehicle.
After the reset, the vehicle can no longer be un‐
locked, locked or started with a digital key.
The vehicle owner must present proof of authori‐
zation for his vehicle again at the service center
to be able to use BMW Digital Key again.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/Access"
4. "BMW Digital Key"
5. "Reset function"
Unlocking and locking the vehicle
Hold the smartphone or key card directly on the
outside door handle of the driver's door.
Starting the engine
1.
Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
2. Place the smartphone or key card centered
into the smartphone tray in front of the cup
holders.
3. After the digital key has been detected as au‐
thorized, the engine can be started.
Sale of the smartphone/vehicle
When a smartphone with a digital key is sold, all
digital keys should be deleted from this smart‐
phone.
Seite 88
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
When a vehicle is sold, BMW Digital Key should
be reset in this vehicle. The new vehicle owner
should make sure that BMW Digital Key has
been reset. This ensures that the previous vehi‐
cle owner no longer has access to the vehicle.
Malfunction
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. For replacing the battery, refer to
page 75.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment with
high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal
objects.
Do not transport the remote control together
with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐
bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐
rect proximity to the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control together
with electronic devices.
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the locking
request recognition function on the door han‐
dles.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the
vehicle using the buttons of the remote control
or using the integrated key, refer to page 81.
Trunk lid
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the
remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try version, it is also possible to have the doors
unlocked. To perform settings, refer to
page 96.
The trunk lid cannot be opened when the vehicle
is in valet parking mode, refer to page 94.
The trunk lid can normally not be opened if the
convertible top is not fully opened or closed. If
the trunk lid can be opened, make sure it does
not collide with the convertible top well storage
cover.
Safety information
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear
during opening and closing.
NOTICE
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid
is clear during opening and closing.
Opening and Closing
Opening
From the outside
▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle,
then press the button on the outside of the
trunk lid.
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or
carry the remote control with you and then
press the button on the outside of the trunk
lid.
Seite 89
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ Press and hold the button on the re‐
mote control for approx. 1 second.
Depending on the setting, the doors may also
be unlocked. Opening with the remote con‐
trol, refer to page 75.
From the inside
Press the button in the storage compart‐
ment of the driver's door.
Interruption of the opening procedure
The opening operation is interrupted:
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of the
trunk lid. Pressing again closes the trunk lid.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
trunk lid. Pressing again closes the trunk lid.
▷ By pressing the button on the remote control.
Pressing again continues the opening mo‐
tion.
▷ By pressing or pulling the button in the driv‐
er's door. Pressing again continues the open‐
ing motion.
Closing
From the outside
▷
Press the button on the inside of the
trunk lid.
With Comfort Access:
▷
Press the button on the inside of the
trunk lid.
The vehicle will be locked after closing the
trunk lid. The driver's door must be closed for
this purpose and the remote control must be
outside of the vehicle in the area of the trunk
lid.
From the inside
Pull and hold the button in the storage
compartmenr of the driver's door.
The remote control must be located inside the
vehicle for this function.
An acoustic signal sounds before the trunk lid is
closed.
Interruption of the closing procedure
The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ If the vehicle starts off with a jerky movement.
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of the
trunk lid. Pressing again re-opens the trunk
lid.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
trunk lid. Pressing again re-opens the trunk
lid.
▷ By releasing the button in the driver's door.
Pulling again and holding continues the clos‐
ing motion.
Malfunction
In the event of an electrical malfunction, operate
the unlocked trunk lid manually with a slow and
smooth motion.
Trunk emergency unlocking
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.
The trunk lid unlocks.
Seite 90
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Automatic Soft Closing
Safety information
Warning
Body parts can be jammed while operating the
doors. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the doors is clear dur‐
ing opening and closing.
Closing
To close the doors, push lightly.
Closing occurs automatically.
Driver profiles
Concept
Driver profiles can be created to store personal
vehicle settings. If the vehicle is used by multiple
drivers, each driver can create his personal driver
profile. When a driver profile is selected, the vehi‐
cle will automatically apply the stored settings in
the driver profile.
General information
Three personal driver profiles can be created.
Each driver profile can be protected with a PIN to
prevent other drivers from viewing and modifying
the stored settings.
In addition, a guest profile is available that can be
selected by any driver. The guest profile is active
when a personal driver profile has not been se‐
lected.
Changes to the vehicle settings are automatically
stored in the active driver profile or in the guest
profile.
The recognition via remote control and a digital
key, refer to page 86, can be assigned to a driver
profile so that the vehicle will apply the settings
as soon as the driver unlocks the car. As soon as
the vehicle detects the remote control or the dig‐
ital key, the corresponding driver profile will be
activated.
ConnectedDrive countries: The settings stored
in the driver's profile can be synchronized with
the personal BMW ConnectedDrive account. It is
thereby possible to use these settings in other
BMW vehicles as well.
Functional requirements
When switching the driver profile, the vehicle
must move at a maximum of walking speed.
Welcome screen
After the Control Display is switched on, the Wel‐
come screen will be displayed.
The following actions can be carried out on the
Welcome screen:
▷ Selecting a driver profile.
▷ Starting the set-up assistant.
This option is offered in new vehicle for a lim‐
ited period of time.
As soon as the engine is started or any button is
pressed, the Welcome screen will be hidden.
Setup assistant
The setup assistant is offered in new vehicles for
a limited period of time on the Welcome screen
to configure the most important settings for the
vehicle.
The driver is guided step by step through the fol‐
lowing functions:
▷ Setting the system language.
▷ Pairing mobile devices with the vehicle.
▷ Non-ConnectedDrive countries: Assign pro‐
file name.
▷ ConnectedDrive countries:
Enable continuous synchronization between
the ConnectedDrive account and the driver
profile.
Seite 91
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Stored settings in the ConnectedDrive ac‐
count are transferred to the vehicle. If a Con‐
nectedDrive account has not yet been cre‐
ated, it must be created in the
ConnectedDrive portal.
▷ Confirm the consent for the transmission of
vehicle related data.
▷ Configure the voice command to start the
voice command response.
The selected settings are stored in the active
driver's profile.
Guest profile
The guest profile can be activated by any driver.
Vehicle settings that are entered when the guest
profile is active will be stored in the guest profile.
In the following cases the guest profile is auto‐
matically active:
▷ A driver profile has not been created yet.
▷ No driver profile has been assigned to the re‐
mote control that was used to unlock the ve‐
hicle.
▷ No driver profile has been assigned to the
digital key that was used to unlock the vehi‐
cle.
▷ It is not clear which driver profile must be ac‐
tivated.
The following limitations apply:
▷ The guest profile cannot be renamed.
▷ It is not possible to assign the recognition to
the guest profile.
▷ PIN protection is not possible.
▷ ConnectedDrive countries: It is not possible
to synchronize with a ConnectedDrive ac‐
count.
The guest profile is selected on the Welcome
screen or via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Guest"
4. "Log in"
Creating a driver profile
A driver profile is created on the Welcome
screen or via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. "Create driver profile"
ConnectedDrive countries: A ConnectedDrive
account must be assigned to a driver profile. An
existing account can be used or a new account
must be created.
Selecting recognition
The settings for the recognition are entered on
the Welcome screen or via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. "Driver recognition"
5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "with vehicle key"
A remote control is assigned to the driver
profile. As soon as the vehicle detects the
remote control, the corresponding driver
profile will be activated.
If the remote control is not carried with
you or the remote control is not recog‐
nized, the driver profile can only be se‐
lected on the Welcome screen when the
PIN protection has been set up.
▷ "with Digital key"
A digital key is assigned to the driver pro‐
file. As soon as the vehicle recognizes the
digital key, the corresponding driver pro‐
file will be activated.
If the smartphone with the digital key is
not carried with you or the digital key is
not recognized, the driver profile can only
Seite 92
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
be selected on the Welcome screen when
the PIN protection has been set up.
6. "Activate linkage"
Setting up PIN protection
A driver profile without recognition and without
PIN protection can be activated and changed by
any driver.
A driver profile with recognition cannot be acti‐
vated without remote control and without digital
key if the PIN protection was not set up.
Non-ConnectedDrive countries: If PIN protection
was not set up or the PIN is not known, the driv‐
er's profile cannot be activated.
ConnectedDrive countries: If PIN protection was
not set up or the PIN is not known, the driver's
profile can be activated with the access data of
the corresponding ConnectedDrive account.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Driver recognition"
4. "using PIN"
Changing/canceling the
recognition function
If the vehicle and remote control will be handed
over for maintenance, for instance, the recogni‐
tion function should be canceled with the remote
control. The handed over remote control can
then no longer be used to access the personal
driver profile. If the driver profile was protected
with a PIN, undesired access will no longer be
possible.
If another remote control or another digital key is
assigned to a driver profile, the current assign‐
ment must be canceled first.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Driver recognition"
4. "with vehicle key"
or
"with Digital key"
5. "Activate linkage"
Selecting a driver profile
Depending on the recognition setting, the driver
profile will be selected automatically.
If the guest profile is active, the driver profile will
be selected on the Welcome screen or via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
4. "Log in"
All settings stored in the selected driver profile
are automatically applied.
Switching synchronization with
the ConnectedDrive account
on/off
ConnectedDrive countries:
The settings stored in the driver's profile are
synchronized with the personal ConnectedDrive
account. This means that it is possible to use the
personal settings in other BMW vehicles with
ConnectedDrive access as well.
The synchronization with the ConnectedDrive
account is enabled in the setup assistant or via
iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Settings"
4. "Synchronize driver profile"
5. "Synchronize driver profile"
Renaming a driver profile
Non-ConnectedDrive countries:
Seite 93
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
The name that was assigned when the driver
profile was set up can be changed via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
4. "Settings"
5. Enter a profile name.
6. Select the symbol.
Selecting a profile picture
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Avatar"
4. Select the desired profile picture.
Deleting the driver profile
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Settings"
4. "Remove driver profile"
5. Select the desired driver profile.
6. "Delete now"
ConnectedDrive countries: If the driver profile
was synchronized with a ConnectedDrive ac‐
count, the stored data in the ConnectedDrive ac‐
count will be retained.
System limits
A clear detection of the desired remote control
may not be possible in the following cases, for in‐
stance:
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort
Access and has multiple remote controls with
him or her.
▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not
locked and unlocked.
▷ When multiple remote controls are located
outside on the driver's side of the vehicle.
If the remote control was not detected clearly,
unlock the vehicle by pressing button for the de‐
sired remote control.
ConnectedDrive countries:
A driver profile can only be created and
synchronized with the ConnectedDrive account
when cellular network reception is available.
The use of personal settings that are stored in
the ConnectedDrive account in other vehicles is
subject to technical limitations. For example, set‐
tings may be stored for a system that is not avail‐
able, or available in a non-compatible version, in
other vehicles.
Valet parking mode
Concept
In the valet parking mode, the Control Display is
locked and operation via iDrive is no longer pos‐
sible.
For example, this mode can be used when the
vehicle is handed over for valet parking.
General information
In the valet parking mode, it is not possible to
change vehicle settings via iDrive. Personal set‐
tings cannot be changed and personal data can‐
not be displayed.
Additionally, the following actions are carried out:
▷ The volume of the audio system is limited.
▷ The integrated remote control is deactivated.
▷ DSC cannot be switched off.
▷ The trunk lid can be locked and disconnected
from the central locking system.
Functional requirements
▷ At least one driver profile has been created.
▷ A driver profile or the guest profile is active.
Seite 94
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ At least one driver profile has an assigned
ConnectedDrive account.
Accessing the menu for the valet
parking mode
Via the switch-off screen
After switching off drive-ready state the switch-
off screen will be displayed. Select the entry for
the valet parking mode on the switch-off screen.
Via the display bar at the upper edge
of the Control Display
1.
Tip the Controller up
2. "Valet parking mode"
Via the vehicle settings
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Valet parking mode"
Activating the valet parking
mode
General information
Before activating the valet parking mode, a PIN
must be set up to be able to deactivate the valet
parking mode at a future time.
The procedure for entering the PIN varies de‐
pending on the active driver profile.
Driver profile with PIN
A PIN has been stored for the active driver pro‐
file.
It is not necessary to enter another PIN.
1.
Select the desired setting:
"Lock tailgate as well"
The trunk lid will be locked and disconnected
from the central locking system.
2. "Activate now"
Driver profile without PIN
A PIN must be assigned to the driver profile.
1. "PIN"
2. Enter PIN.
3. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Lock tailgate as well"
The trunk lid will be locked and discon‐
nected from the central locking system.
▷ "Activate linkage"
This PIN will be stored for the active driver
profile.
4. "Activate now"
Guest profile
The guest profile is the active driver profile.
A PIN must be entered.
1.
"PIN"
2. Enter PIN.
3. Select the desired setting:
"Lock tailgate as well"
The trunk lid will be locked and disconnected
from the central locking system.
4. "Activate now"
This PIN can be used once to deactivate the
valet parking mode for the active guest pro‐
file.
Deactivating valet parking mode
General information
The lock screen of the valet parking mode is dis‐
played on the Control Display.
The deactivation of the valet parking mode de‐
pends on which driver profile is selected on the
lock screen.
Seite 95
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Driver profile with PIN
Regardless of which driver activated the valet
parking mode, a driver can deactivate the valet
parking mode by entering his/her PIN.
1. Select driver profile.
2. Enter the assigned PIN for the driver profile.
If you forgot the PIN, the valet parking mode
must be deactivated by entering the assigned
ConnectedDrive access data.
Driver profile without PIN
The valet parking mode was activated by another
person. To deactivate the valet parking mode, a
driver without a PIN has to enter the access data
for his ConnectedDrive account.
1.
Select driver profile.
2. Enter the ConnectedDrive access data as‐
signed to the driver profile.
Guest profile
In the guest profile, the valet parking mode can
only be deactivated if the valet parking mode was
activated in the guest profile.
1.
Select guest profile.
2. Enter the PIN that was specified during acti‐
vation.
If the PIN has been forgotten, the valet parking
mode must be deactivated via a personal driver
profile.
Adjusting
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try version, various settings for opening and clos‐
ing are possible.
These settings are stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Unlocking and locking
Doors
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Key button settings"
4. Select the symbol.
5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks
the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Confirmation signals from the
vehicle
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/Access"
4. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma‐
tion signals:
▷ "Flash when locking/unlocking"
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, lock‐
ing by one.
▷ With alarm system:
"Sound when locking/unlocking"
Unlocking is confirmed with two sound
signals, locking is confirmed with one
sound signal.
Folding mirrors automatically
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
Seite 96
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
3. "Doors/Access"
4. "Fold mirrors in when locked"
Locking the vehicle folds in the exterior mir‐
rors automatically. Unlocking the vehicle au‐
tomatically folds out the exterior mirrors.
Automatic unlocking
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/Access"
4. "Unlock at end of trip"
After drive-ready state is switched off by
pressing the Start/Stop button, the locked ve‐
hicle is automatically unlocked.
Automatic locking
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/Access"
4. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Lock automatically"
The vehicle locks automatically after a
while if no door is opened after unlocking.
▷ "Lock after starting to drive"
The vehicle locks automatically after you
drive off.
Trunk lid
Trunk lid and doors
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try version, this setting may not be offered.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Key button settings"
4. Select the symbol.
5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Tailgate"
The trunk lid is opened.
▷ "Tailgate and door(s)"
The trunk lid is opened and the doors are
unlocked.
Comfort Access
Touchless locking/unlocking
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/Access"
4. "Comfort Access"
5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Unlock when approaching"
▷ "Lock when walking away"
Establishing idle state after
opening the front doors
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/Access"
4. "Turn off vehicle after opening door"
Opening the front doors establishes the idle
state, refer to page 41.
Alarm system
General information
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system reacts to the following changes:
▷ Opening a door, the hood or the trunk lid.
▷ Movements in the car's interior.
Seite 97
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance, dur‐
ing attempts at stealing a wheel or when tow‐
ing the vehicle.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
▷ Improper use of the socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis.
The alarm system signals these changes visually
and acoustically:
▷ Acoustic alarm:
Depending on local regulations, the acoustic
alarm may be suppressed.
▷ Visual alarm:
By flashing the exterior lighting.
Switching on/off
When you unlock and lock the vehicle, either
with the remote control or with Comfort Access,
the alarm system is switched off and on at the
same time.
Opening the doors with the alarm
system switched on
The alarm system is triggered when a door is
opened if the door was unlocked using the
integrated key in the door lock.
Switching off the alarm, refer to page 99.
Opening the trunk lid with the
alarm system switched on
The trunk lid can be opened even when the
alarm system is switched on.
After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and moni‐
tored again provided the doors are locked. The
hazard warning system flashes once.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
self in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press the button on the remote con‐
trol and hold for at least 3 seconds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote control
three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Indicator light on the interior
mirror
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every 2 sec‐
onds:
The alarm system is switched on.
▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 seconds,
then it flashes briefly every 2 seconds:
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or trunk lid are
not correctly closed. Correctly closed access
points are secured.
When the still open access points are closed,
the interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sen‐
sor will be switched on.
▷ The indicator light goes out after unlocking:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking un‐
til drive-ready state is switched on, but no
longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such as
attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is
towed.
Seite 98
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Interior motion sensor
The car's interior is monitored to the height of
the seats. The alarm system is switched on to‐
gether with the interior motion sensor even when
the convertible top is open. Falling objects such
as leaves can trigger the alarm unintentionally.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized
action occurred.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles, at
sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
▷ When the vehicle is locked after start of fuel‐
ing.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sen‐
sor can be switched off in such situations.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor
and interior motion sensor
Press the button on the remote control
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is
locked.
The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote control,
if needed, through emergency detection of
the remote control, refer to page 76.
▷ With Comfort Access: if you are carrying the
remote control on your person, grasp the
driver side or front passenger side door han‐
dle completely.
Power windows
Safety information
Warning
When operating the windows, body parts and
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury
or risk of damage to property. Make sure that
the area of movement of the windows is clear
during opening and closing.
Overview
Power windows for individual windows
Power windows for all windows
Functional requirements
The windows can be operated under the follow‐
ing conditions.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched on.
▷ The remote control is in the car's interior.
Open individually
▷ Press the switch to the resistance
point.
Seite 99
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
The window opens while the switch is being
held.
▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the motion.
Opening together
▷ Press the switch to the resistance
point.
All windows open while the switch is being
held.
▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
All windows open automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Close individually
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
The window closes while the switch is being
held.
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window closes automatically if the door
is closed. Pulling again stops the motion.
Closing together
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
All windows are closed while the switch is be‐
ing pulled.
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
All windows close automatically.
Pulling the switch again stops the motion.
Jam protection system
Concept
The jam protection prevents objects or body
parts becoming jammed between the door frame
and window while a window is being closed.
General information
If resistance or a blockage is detected while a
window is being closed, the closing action is in‐
terrupted and the window opens slightly.
Safety information
Warning
Accessories on the windows such as antennas
can impact jam protection. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Do not install accessories in the area of
movement of the windows.
Closing without the jam protection
system
In case of danger from the outside or if ice might
prevent normal closing, proceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance
point and hold it there.
The window closes with limited jam protec‐
tion. If the closing force exceeds a specific
threshold, closing is interrupted.
2.
Pull the switch past the resistance
point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold
it there.
The window closes without jam protection.
Convertible top
General information
The convertible top can be opened or closed at
speeds up to approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
Seite 100
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
If the vehicle is accelerated above a speed of ap‐
prox. 30 mph/50 km/h while the convertible top is
being moved, the convertible top movement
stops.
Follow the following information:
▷ Close the convertible top when the vehicle is
parked. A closed convertible top protects it
from weather-related damage and to some
extent from theft.
▷ Even when the convertible top is closed, only
store valuables in the locked cargo area.
▷ At higher speeds, negative pressure pro‐
duced in the car's interior causes the
convertible top to begin to flutter. Increase
the air flow via the ventilation to prevent neg‐
ative pressure in the vehicle.
▷ It is not possible to start the engine and oper‐
ate the convertible top simultaneously. When
the engine is started using the Start/Stop
button or using the Auto Start/Stop function,
the convertible top movement is briefly inter‐
rupted.
▷ Opening a door interrupts closure of the
convertible top.
▷ In order to protect the battery, move the
convertible top only when the engine is run‐
ning.
▷ Before closing the convertible top, remove
any foreign objects from the windshield
frame; otherwise, closing may be prevented.
Safety information
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when opening and
closing the convertible top. There is a risk of in‐
jury. When opening and closing the convertible
top, observe the movement and keep the area
of movement clear.
Warning
When operating the convertible top while driv‐
ing, the view to the rear may be limited. At
speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h the convertible
top stops in its current position. There is a dan‐
ger of accidents and property damage. When
operating the convertible top while driving, ob‐
serve traffic attentively and, if necessary, re‐
duce speed. Do not operate while backing up
or in windy weather.
Warning
The convertible top is not suitable for the
mounting of roof carrier systems. The roof car‐
rier could come loose. There is a risk of acci‐
dent. Do not attach any roof carrier systems to
the convertible top.
Warning
A convertible top that is not completely open or
closed is not locked and can open by itself
while driving due to the airstream. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the convertible top is always
completely open or closed.
Warning
If there is a longer interruption of the
convertible top movement with the drive-ready
state ignition switched on, convertible top and
convertible top well storage cover remain in the
current position for several minutes before they
slowly go down. Lowering may need to be car‐
ried out in several stages. The stages are not
maintained permanently. If the drive-ready state
is switched off, convertible top and convertible
top well storage cover lower already after a
short period of time.
Seite 101
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
property. Make sure that the convertible top is
completely open or closed. Keep the travel
path of the convertible top open.
NOTICE
Incorrect operation can damage the convertible
top and other parts of the vehicle.
There is a risk of damage to property. During
operation, heed the following points:
▷ Keep the area of movement of the
convertible top clear because the
convertible top swivels out and upward.
Maximum area of movement: 98.5 in‐
ches/2.5 meters.
▷ Keep the area of movement of the
convertible top well storage cover open
because the convertible top well storage
cover will pivot out to the rear. Maximum
area of movement: 19.7 inches/0.5 me‐
ters.
▷ Fully close the trunk lid.
▷ Do not leave the convertible top open for
more than a day while it is wet.
▷ Do not open the convertible top, if it is
wet, covered in snow, iced up, or dirty.
▷ Do not place objects on the convertible
top.
▷ The rollover protection system may not be
triggered.
▷ Do not operate the convertible top on un‐
even sections of road.
▷ Always open or close the convertible top
completely. The convertible top is only
locked in its end positions.
Overview
Convertible top switch
Functional requirements
The following requirements must be fulfilled in
order to be able to move the convertible top.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched on.
▷ Standby state is switched on and the brake
pedal is depressed.
▷ The external temperature is above
14 ℉/-10 ℃.
▷ The voltage of the vehicle electrical system is
sufficient.
▷ The convertible top drive is not overheating.
▷ The vehicle speed is not too high.
▷ The windows can be opened and closed au‐
tomatically.
▷ The trunk lid is closed.
▷ The cargo cover is folded down.
If one of these requirements is not met, a check
control message is displayed.
Operating from the inside
Opening
Push the switch and hold it.
The windows roll down and the convertible top
opens while the switch is being pushed.
Seite 102
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Closing
Pull the switch and hold it.
The windows are lowered, the convertible top is
closed, and the windows are raised again while
the switch is being pulled.
Preventing an interruption
Push or pull the switch until the convertible top is
completely open or closed and the end of the
procedure is indicated by a Check Control mes‐
sage. Always make sure that the convertible top
well storage cover is completely closed. Only if
the convertible top is completely open or closed
will the convertible top and convertible top well
storage cover be locked.
The convertible top movement is interrupted if
the switch is released. The sequence can be
continued in the desired direction using the
switch.
The convertible top and the convertible top well
storage cover are not locked in this case. Oper‐
ate switch again until the convertible operation is
terminated.
Operation from the outside
When equipped with Comfort Access the
convertible top can also be operated from out‐
side.
Convenient opening and convenient closing via
the remote control, refer to page 72.
Cargo area partition
Fold down cargo area partition in the back so
that the convertible top can be opened.
Fold down cargo area partition in the front in or‐
der to enlarge the cargo area capacity when the
convertible top is closed.
Manually closing the convertible
top
General information
If there is a malfunction, the convertible top can
be manually closed. Two persons are necessary
to do this.
If possible, have a convertible top manually
closed by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Safety information
Warning
In case of an electrical malfunction, the
convertible top cannot be locked in the fully
open position. The convertible top will rise up
while the vehicle is moving. There is a risk of
accident. Do not open the closed convertible
top manually.
Warning
While manually lowering the convertible top,
body parts can be jammed. With one-sided op‐
eration, the convertible top can be damaged.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
property. Make sure that the area of movement
of the convertible top and the convertible top
well storage cover is free. Only close the
convertible top manually with two people.
Before closing
1.
Lower the side windows completely.
2. Switching off, standby state, refer to
page 125.
Seite 103
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
3. Opening trunk lid.
4. Take convertible top tools out of the cargo
area.
5. Remove the screwdriver from the onboard
vehicle tool kit.
6. Unlock convertible top well storage cover.
This requires pulling both emergency unlock‐
ing Bowden cables consecutively.
7. When the convertible top well storage cover
is unlocked, the trunk lid can no longer be
opened. Remove urgently needed items from
the cargo area before closing the trunk lid.
8. Close the trunk lid. At the same time, press
the convertible top well storage cover at the
rear edges on the left and right down until
contact with the trunk lid can be avoided.
Lifting out convertible top
1. Grab both sides of the convertible top well
storage cover on the side in the rear and
swivel up and to the rear to the end position.
2. On both sides of the vehicle, grasp the front
edge of the convertible top frame with one
hand. With the other hand, grasp the end of
the convertible top on the bottom edge.
3. Lift out the convertible top and the
convertible top ends on both sides simultane‐
ously and swing it forward. When you do this,
make sure that the convertible top ends do
not push against other parts.
4. Place the convertible top onto the windshield
frame and close the convertible top well stor‐
Seite 104
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
age cover. The end of the convertible top
must be folded up for this purpose.
5. Fold the end of the convertible top down
onto the convertible top well storage cover.
Locking the convertible top in the
front
1.
Carefully remove the cover in the center of
the front convertible top frame.
2. Insert the convertible top tool into the
convertible top lock.
While a person presses the front convertible
top frame from the outside onto the middle of
the windshield frame: turn the convertible top
tool counter-clockwise until the front
convertible frame is locked with the front
windshield frame.
Have the convertible top checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
Wind deflector
Concept
The wind deflector reduces the air movement in
the car's interior when driving with the
convertible top down.
The wind deflector is most effective when the
side windows are closed.
General information
A protective jacket for the removed wind deflec‐
tor is located in the cargo area.
Make sure the wind deflector is dry before stow‐
ing it in the protective jacket.
Safety information
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
wind deflector. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement around the
wind deflector is clear when installing and re‐
moving it and folding it up.
Seite 105
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Warning
Objects placed on the installed wind deflector
can be thrown into the car's interior or endan‐
ger other traffic participants, for instance in
case of an accident, braking or evasive maneu‐
ver. The objects can damage the wind deflec‐
tor. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
property. Do not place any objects on the in‐
stalled wind deflector.
Warning
A wind deflector that has not been mounted
correctly may fly off and be thown into the vehi‐
cle or endanger other road users. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Before driving, make sure that the retaining
pins are engaged in the fixing points and the
wind deflector is mounted securely.
Warning
Operating the wind deflector while driving can
distract from the surrounding traffic. There is a
risk of accident. Operate the wind deflector
only when the vehicle is stationary.
NOTICE
When moving the front seats back, the wind
deflector can be damaged. There is a risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the area of
movement is clear prior to moving the front
seats back.
Installing
The wind deflector is located in a protective
jacket in the cargo area.
1. Take the wind deflector out of the protective
jacket.
2. Fully unfold the wind deflector so that the
handle, arrow 1, folds down and locks the
wind deflector.
3. Open the rear side window, if necessary.
4. Insert wind deflector from one side of the ve‐
hicle with the pins in the corresponding fixing
points on the opposite side of the vehicle.
5. To release the lock, fold the handle up and
hold it.
Seite 106
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
6. Press the wind deflector inwardly and up, ar‐
row 1, to the extent that the wind deflector
can be positioned in front of the fixing points
on the installation side.
7. Release the handle.
8. Press the wind deflector downward, while in‐
serting the pins in the corresponding fixing
points, arrows 2.
9. Press the wind deflector downward in the
middle, until the handle engages, arrows 1.
10.Grasp the inner framework of the wind de‐
flector and fold it up, arrow 2.
Removing
1.
Fold the handle up to unlock the wind deflec‐
tor.
2. Proceed in reverse order to remove the wind
deflector.
Seite 107
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Sitting safely
An ideal seating position that meets the needs of
the occupants can make a vital contribution to
relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
In the event of an accident, the correct seating
position plays an important role. Follow the infor‐
mation in the following chapters:
▷ Seats, refer to page 108.
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 111.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 112.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 166.
Seats
Safety information
Warning
Seat adjustments while driving can lead to un‐
expected movements of the seat. Vehicle con‐
trol could be lost. There is a risk of accident.
Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when
the vehicle is stationary.
Warning
With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the
efficacy of the safety belt can no longer be en‐
sured. There is a risk of sliding under the safety
belt in an accident. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Adjust the seat prior to starting
the trip. Adjust the backrest so that it is in the
most upright position as possible and do not
adjust again while driving.
Warning
There is a risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
ment.
Electrically adjustable seats
General information
The seat adjustment for the driver's seat is
stored for the driver profile, refer to page 91, cur‐
rently used. When a driver profile is selected, the
stored position is called up automatically.
The current seat position can be stored using
the memory function, refer to page 116.
Seite 108
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Overview
1 Backrest width
2 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
3 Backrest tilt, head restraint
4 Lumbar support
Forward/backward
Push switch forward or backward.
Height
Push switch up or down.
Seat tilt
Move switch up or down.
Backrest tilt
Move switch forward or backward.
Thigh support
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and push
the thigh support forward or back.
Lumbar support
Concept
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar region
Seite 109
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
of the spine. The lower back and the spine are
supported for upright posture.
Adjusting
▷ Press the front/rear section of
the button:
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower section
of the button:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Functional limitations
It may not be possible to adjust the lumbar sup‐
port at very high and very low temperatures.
Backrest width
Concept
Adjusting the backrest width may improve lateral
support when taking corners.
General information
You can change the backrest width by adjusting
the side wings of the backrest.
Adjusting
▷ Press the front section of the
button:
The backrest width de‐
creases.
▷ Press the rear section of the
button:
The backrest width increases.
Functional limitations
It may not be possible to adjust the backrest
width at very high and very low temperatures.
Entering the rear
Safety information
Warning
There is a risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
ment.
Warning
Unexpected movements of the rear seat back‐
rest while driving may occur if the rear seat
backrest is unlocked. Vehicle control could be
lost. There is a risk of injury. Fold back and lock
the rear seat backrests before driving.
Fold the rear seat backrest down
1.
Pull the strap.
2. Fold the rear seat backrest forward.
To make the entry to the rear easier, the seat will
automatically move to the most forward position.
The process will be terminated when the switch
for the forward/back adjustment is pressed or the
backrest is reclined.
Fold the rear seat backrest back
Fold the rear seat backrest back and lock.
The seat moves automatically to the last seat po‐
sition that was stored.
Seite 110
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Pulling the strap again stops the motion.
Safety belts
Number of safety belts and
safety belt buckles
The vehicle is fitted with four safety belts to en‐
sure occupant safety. However, they can only of‐
fer protection when adjusted correctly.
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by the occupants before driving off. The
airbags supplement the safety belts as an addi‐
tional safety device. The airbags are not a substi‐
tute for safety belts.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will
be correct for adult seat occupants of every build
if the seat is correctly adjusted.
Safety information
Warning
Use of a safety belt to buckle more than one
person will potentially defeat the ability of the
safety belt to serve its protective function.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do
not allow more than one person to wear a sin‐
gle safety belt. Infants and children are not al‐
lowed on an occupant's lap, but must be trans‐
ported and secured in designated child
restraint systems.
Warning
The efficacy of safety gear, including safety
belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts
are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened
safety belt can cause additional injuries, for in‐
stance in the event of an accident or during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that all
occupants are wearing safety belts correctly.
Warning
The efficacy of safety gear, including safety
belts, may not be fully functional or fail in the
following situations:
▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are
damaged, soiled, or changed in any other
way.
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were
modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts,
safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt retrac‐
tors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have
the safety belts checked after an accident at
the dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Correct use of safety belts
▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to
your body over your lap and shoulders.
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over
your lap. The safety belt may not press on
your stomach.
▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or
fragile objects.
▷ Avoid thick clothing.
▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently upward
around your upper body.
Buckling the safety belt
1.
Guide the safety belt slowly over shoulder
and hip to put it on.
Seite 111
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt
buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage
audibly.
Unbuckling the safety belt
1.
Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the safety belt buckle.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up
mechanism.
Safety belt reminder for driver's
seat and front passenger seat
Display in the instrument cluster
The indicator light lights up and a signal
sounds. Make sure that the safety belts
are positioned correctly. The safety belt
reminder can also be activated if objects are
placed on the front passenger seat.
Front head restraints
General information
The current head restraint position can be stored
using the memory function, refer to page 116.
Safety information
Warning
A missing protective effect due to removed or
not correctly adjusted head restraints can
cause injuries in the head and neck area. There
is a risk of injury.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head
restraints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
moving the head restraint.
Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐
tective effect in the head and neck area. There
is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.
Seite 112
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Adjusting the height
Push switch up or down.
To prevent a collision of the head restraint with
the convertible top, the head restraint cannot be
adjusted in height in certain seat positions. Move
the seat into a lower position for head restraint
adjustment.
Adjusting the distance
▷ Back: press the button and push the head re‐
straint toward the rear.
▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the
front.
After setting the distance, make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
Removing
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the front passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
The mirror setting is stored for the driver profile,
refer to page 91, currently in use. When a driver
profile is selected, the stored position is called up
automatically.
The current exterior mirror position can be stored
using the memory function, refer to page 116.
Safety information
Warning
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than
they appear. The distance to the traffic behind
could be incorrectly estimated, for instance
while changing lanes. There is a risk of acci‐
dent. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind
by looking over your shoulder.
Overview
1 Adjusting
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out
Adjusting electrically
Press the button.
The selected mirror moves along with the
button movement.
Seite 113
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch.
Malfunction
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror glass.
Folding in and out
NOTICE
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle
can be damaged in vehicle washes. There is a
risk of damage to property. Before washing,
fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.
Press the button.
Folding is only possible up to a speed of approx.
15 mph/20 km/h.
Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In vehicle washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated as
needed and when the drive-ready state is
switched on.
Automatic dimming feature
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐
matically dimmed. Photocells in the car's interior
mirror, refer to page 114, are used to control
this.
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior
mirror
Concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the front passenger side is tilted downward. This
improves your view of the curb and other format‐
ting issue - low-lying obstacles when parking,
for instance.
Activating
1.
slide the switch to the driver's side
mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger's side
mirror position.
Interior mirror
General information
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.
Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Overview
Seite 114
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Functional requirements
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the interior
mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Safety information
Warning
Steering wheel adjustments while driving can
lead to unexpected steering wheel movements.
Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of
accident. Adjustng the steering wheel while the
vehicle is stationary only.
Electric steering wheel
adjustment
General information
The steering wheel setting is stored for the driver
profile, refer to page 91, currently in use. When a
driver profile is selected, the position is accessed
automatically when the drive-ready state is
switched on.
The current steering wheel position can be
stored using the memory function, refer to
page 116.
Adjusting
Move the steering wheel to the preferred height
and angle to suit your seating position by press‐
ing the switch.
Assistance getting in and out
The steering wheel temporarily moves into the
highest position to make it easier to enter and
exit the vehicle.
Heated steering wheel
Overview
Button for heated steering wheel
Switching on/off
Press the button.
A Check Control message is displayed.
If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes
after an intermediate stop, the heated steering
wheel activates automatically if the function was
switched on at the end of the last trip.
Seite 115
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Memory function
Concept
The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐
essary, retrieved using the memory function:
▷ Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
▷ Steering wheel position.
▷ Height of the Head-up Display.
General information
Two memory locations with different settings
can be set for each driver profile, refer to
page 91.
The following settings are not stored:
▷ Backrest width.
▷ Lumbar support.
Safety information
Warning
Using the memory function while driving can
lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.
There is a risk of accident. Only retrieve the
memory function when the vehicle is stationary.
Warning
There is a risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
ment.
Overview
The memory buttons are located on the front
doors.
Storing
1.
Set the desired position.
2.
Press the button. The writing on the
button lights up.
3. Press desired button 1 or 2 while the LED is
lit. A signal sounds.
Calling up settings
Press the desired button 1 or 2.
The stored position is called up.
The procedure stops when a switch for setting
the seat is pressed or one of the memory but‐
tons is pressed again.
Once underway, adjustment of the seat position
on the driver's side is disabled after a short while.
Seat and armrest heating
Concept
The system heats seats and armrests as
needed.
General information
Seat heating can also be used without armrest
heating. Deactivate the armrest heating as
needed.
Seite 116
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Overview
Seat and armrest heating
Switching on
1. Press the button.
2. Select the temperature level:
▷ Press the button once for each level.
▷ Turn the Controller until the desired level
is reached. Press the Controller.
▷ Select the desired level on the touch‐
screen.
Highest level reached when three red LEDs
light up on the button or three red bars are
shown on the Control Display.
When ECO PRO is activated, refer to page 287,
the heating output is reduced.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes
after a stop, functions are activated automatically
with the temperature selected last.
Switching off
Press and hold the button until the
LEDs go out.
Seat heating distribution
The heating action in the seat cushion and the
seat backrest can be distributed in different
ways.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. Select a menu item:
▷ "Seat heating distribution"
▷ "Seat heating"
▷ "Seat and armrest heating"
▷ "Seat and surface heating"
▷ "Seat/steering wheel heating"
▷ "Seat climate control"
▷ "Seat and surfaces climate control"
▷ "Seat climate/steer. wheel heating"
5. Select desired seat.
6. Press the Controller and turn it to set the seat
heating distribution.
Switching armrest heating on/off
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Seat and armrest heating"
5. Select desired seat.
6. "Heat armrests together with seat"
Air collar
Concept
The air collar ensures just the right temperature
for the neck area via supply of warm air.
Seite 117
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Safety information
Warning
Very hot air can escape from the vents. Thus,
there is a risk of burns in the immediate area of
the vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that sufficient distance from the vents is main‐
tained. If necessary, adjust the air supply.
NOTICE
By covering the vent of the air collar, the heat
cannot escape as intended. The heat builds up.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
cover the vents, for instance with covers.
General information
When the roof is open, the air feed and the tem‐
perature are adjusted according to speed and ex‐
ternal temperature.
When the roof is closed, the three adjustable
settings are independent of speed and external
temperature.
Overview
Air collar
Switching on
Press button once for each level.
The maximum temperature and fan out‐
put is reached when three LEDs are lit.
Switching off
Press and hold the button, until the
LEDs are no longer illuminated.
Active seat ventilation
Concept
Integrated fans in the seat and armrest areas ex‐
tract air from the vehicle interior and thereby pro‐
vide a comfortable seat temperature.
General information
Depending on the setting of the automatic cli‐
mate control, the cooling output will be increased
or reduced.
The air conditioning can be adjusted individually
by manually setting the temperature of the venti‐
lation, refer to page 254, and the air distribution,
refer to page 257.
For maximum cooling output, set the manual air
distribution to the upper body area.
Overview
Active seat ventilation
Switching on
1. Press the button.
2. Select the ventilation level:
▷ Press the button once for each level.
Seite 118
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ Turn the Controller until the desired level
is reached. Press the Controller.
▷ Select the desired level on the touch‐
screen.
Highest level reached when three blue LEDs
light up on the button or three blue bars are
shown on the Control Display.
Switching off
Press and hold the button until the
LEDs go out.
Seat climate control
Concept
The seat climate control combines the functions
of the seat heating and active seat ventilation.
General information
The seat heating and active seat ventilation are
operated with a common button on the climate
control panel.
When both systems are active, a push of the but‐
ton reduces the intensity of both functions by
one level each.
The last active function or function that is config‐
ured with higher intensity will be activated di‐
rectly when the system is switched on again.
When both functions with the same intensity
configuration are deactivated, the system will au‐
tomatically activate the seat heating.
Overview
Seat climate control
Switching on
1. Press the button.
2. Select the desired setting via the touch‐
screen.
One red and one blue LED each will light up.
Switching off
Press and hold the button until the
LEDs go out.
Seite 119
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
The right place for children
Safety information
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Always transport children in the
rear seat
General information
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
Transport children younger than 13 years of age
or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear seat
in suitable child restraint systems designed for
the age, weight and size of the child. Children
13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt
as soon as a suitable child restraint system can
no longer be used due to their age, weight, or
size.
Safety information
Warning
The safety belt cannot be fastened correctly on
children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm without suita‐
ble additional child restraint systems. The effi‐
cacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can
be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety
belt can cause additional injuries, for instance in
the event of an accident or during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft,
150 cm using suitable child restraint systems.
Children on the front passenger
seat
General information
Before using a child restraint system on the front
passenger seat, ensure that the front, knee, and
side airbags on the front passenger side are de‐
activated. For automatic deactivation of front-
seat passenger airbags, refer to page 168.
Seite 120
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Safety information
Warning
Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a
child in a child restraint system when the air‐
bags are activated. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐
bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.
Installing child restraint
systems
General information
Pay attention to the specifications and the oper‐
ating and safety information of the child restraint
system manufacturer when selecting, installing,
and using child restraint systems.
Safety information
Warning
The protective effect of child restraint systems
and their fastening systems which have been
damaged or exposed to an accident can be lim‐
ited or lost. For instance, a child can may not be
sufficiently restrained in the event of an acci‐
dent or braking and evasive maneuvers. There
is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Do not use damaged child restraint systems or
child restraint systems that have been exposed
to an accident, and replace them instead.
Have damaged child restraint systems or child
restraint systems exposed to an accident and
their fastening systems checked and, where
applicable, replaced by the dealer's service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Warning
The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐
ited or compromised with incorrect seat adjust‐
ment or improper installation of the child seat.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make
sure that the child restraint system fits securely
against the backrest. If possible, adjust the
backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐
rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
Warning
Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a
child in a child restraint system when the air‐
bags are activated. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐
bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.
Before installing a child restraint system in the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags au‐
tomatically, refer to page 168.
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will go
and, if possible, bring it up to medium height.
This seat position and height ensure the best
possible position for the belt and offers optimal
protection in the event of an accident.
If the upper anchor of the safety belt is located in
front of the belt guide of the child seat, move the
Seite 121
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
front passenger seat carefully forward until the
best possible belt guide position is reached.
Backrest width
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
child restraint system in the front passenger seat,
open the backrest width completely. Do not
change the backrest width again and do not call
up a memory position.
Child seat security
The safety belts in the rear and the front passen‐
ger safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐
ten child restraint systems.
Locking the safety belt
1.
Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
safety belt.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull it
tight against the child restraint system. The
safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1.
Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.
Pay attention to the specifications and the oper‐
ating and safety information from the child re‐
straint system manufacturer when selecting, in‐
stalling, and using LATCH child restraint fixing
systems.
Mounts for the lower LATCH
anchors
General information
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child is
restrained by the internal harnesses.
Safety information
Warning
If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems are
not correctly engaged, the protective effect of
the LATCH child restraint fixing system can be
limited. There is a risk of injuries or danger to
life. Make sure that the lower anchors are se‐
curely engaged and that the LATCH child re‐
straint fixing system fits securely against the
backrest.
Seite 122
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Position
Symbol Meaning
The corresponding symbol
shows the mounts for the lower
LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower an‐
chors are marked with a pair, (2),
of LATCH symbols.
For vehicles equipped with a
middle seat:
It is not recommended to use
the inner lower anchors of
standard outer LATCH positions
to fasten a child restraint system
on the middle seat. Use the ve‐
hicle safety belt instead for the
middle seat.
Before installing LATCH child
restraint fixing systems
Pull the safety belt away from the area of the
child restraint system.
Assembly of LATCH child
restraint fixing systems
1.
Install child restraint system, see manufactur‐
er's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Child restraint systems
with tether strap
Safety information
Warning
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used
for the child restraint system, the protective ef‐
fect can be reduced. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the upper retaining strap does
not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as
it passes the upper anchor.
Warning
If the rear backrest is not locked, the protective
effect of the child restraint system is limited or
there is none. In certain situations, for instance
braking maneuvers or in case of an accident,
the rear backrest can fold forward. There is a
risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that
the rear backrests are locked.
NOTICE
The anchors for the upper retaining straps of
child restraint systems are only provided for
these retaining straps. When other objects are
mounted, the anchors can be damaged. There
is a risk of damage to property. Only mount
child restraint systems to the upper anchors.
Seite 123
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Anchors
Symbol Meaning
The respective symbol shows
the anchor for the upper retain‐
ing strap. Seats with an upper
top tether are marked with this
symbol. It can be found on the
rear seat backrest or the rear
window shelf.
Routing the retaining strap
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Anchor/eye
5 Seat backrest
6 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining
strap to the anchor
1.
Release the backrest, and tilt it forward.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap over the head
restraint to the anchor.
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
anchor.
4. Fold back the backrest of the rear seat.
Make sure that the retaining strap cannot be
jammed when folding back and locking the
rear seat backrest.
5. Tighten the retaining strap.
6. Fold the rear seat backrest back and lock.
Seite 124
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Driving
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Start/Stop button
Concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches drive-ready state on or
off, refer to page 41.
Drive-ready state is switched on
when you depress the brake
pedal while pressing the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches
drive-ready state back off and standby state, re‐
fer to page 41, is switched back on.
Driving away
1.
Switch on drive-ready state.
2. Apply drive mode.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Drive away.
Auto Start/Stop function
Concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, for instance in traffic congestion or at traffic
lights. Drive-ready state remains switched on.
The engine starts automatically for driving off.
General information
After each engine start using the Start/Stop but‐
ton, the Auto Start/Stop function is ready. The
function is activated from speeds of approx.
3 mph/5 km/h.
Depending on the selected driving mode, refer to
page 128, the system is automatically activated
or deactivated.
Engine stop
Functional requirements
Steptronic transmission
The engine is switched off automatically during a
stop under the following conditions:
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever position
D.
▷ The brake pedal remains pressed while the
vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held by
Automatic Hold.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driv‐
er's door is closed.
Manual engine stop
If the engine was not switched off automatically
when the vehicle stopped, the engine can be
switched off manually:
▷ Press the brake pedal forcefully again from
the current pedal position.
Seite 125
Driving
CONTROLS
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ Engage selector lever position P.
If all functional preconditions are fulfilled, the en‐
gine switches off.
Air conditioner when the engine is
switched off
The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced
when the engine is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
General information
The display in the tachometer in‐
dicates that the Auto Start/Stop
function is ready for an Automatic
engine start.
The display indicates that the
conditions for an automatic en‐
gine stop have not been met.
Total time with switched-off engine
ECO PRO, refer to page 287,
driving mode: depending on the
vehicle equipment, the total time
that the engine has been
switched off using the Auto Start/
Stop function is displayed on an automatic en‐
gine stop.
The total time is automatically reset every time
the vehicle is refueled.
Functional limitations
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
▷ In case of a steep downhill grade.
▷ Brake not engaged strongly enough.
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
matic climate control is running.
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated or
cooled to the required level.
▷ Where there is a risk of window condensation
when the automatic climate control is
switched on.
▷ Engine or other parts not at operating tem‐
perature.
▷ Engine cooling is required.
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steer‐
ing wheel is being turned.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ At higher elevations.
▷ The hood is unlocked.
▷ The parking assistant is activated.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Selector lever position in N or R.
▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
Starting the engine
Functional requirements
Steptronic transmission
The engine starts automatically under the follow‐
ing preconditions:
▷ By releasing the brake pedal.
▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: press the
accelerator pedal.
Driving off
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it will
not start again automatically if any one of the fol‐
lowing conditions are met:
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the
driver's door is open.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
Seite 126
CONTROLS
Driving
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Some indicator lights light up for a varied length
of time.
The engine can only be started via the Start/Stop
button.
System limits
Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior when
the air conditioning is switched on.
▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when
the heating is switched on.
▷ Where there is a risk of window condensation
when the automatic climate control is
switched on.
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ Change from selector lever position D to N or
R.
▷ Change from selector lever position P to N,
D, or R.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ Start of an oil level measurement.
Intelligent Auto Start/Stop
function
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try-specific version, the vehicle features a variety
of sensors for assessing the traffic situation. The
Intelligent Auto Start/Stop function uses this in‐
formation to adapt to various traffic situations in a
proactive manner.
For instance, this applies to the following situa‐
tions:
▷ If a situation is detected in which the stopping
time is expected to be very short, the engine
is not switched off automatically. A message
appears on the Control Display, depending
on the situation.
▷ If a situation is detected in which the vehicle
needs to drive off immediately, the engine is
started automatically.
The function may be restricted if the navigation
data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐
ample.
Activating/deactivating the
system manually
Concept
The engine is not automatically switched off.
The engine is started during an automatic engine
stop.
Using the button
Press the button.
Via selector lever position or Driving
Dynamics Control
The Auto Start/Stop function is also deactivated
in selector lever position M/S or in SPORT driv‐
ing mode of the Driving Dynamics Control.
Display
▷ LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
▷ LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is ac‐
tivated.
Seite 127
Driving
CONTROLS
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
General information
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can
be switched off permanently, for instance when
leaving it.
Steptronic transmission
1. Press the Start/Stop button.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐
matically.
2. Set the parking brake.
Automatic deactivation
General information
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated automatically for safety reasons,
for instance if no driver is detected.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches
off the engine automatically. A Check Control
message is displayed. It is possible to continue
driving. Have the system checked by a dealer's
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
Driving Dynamics Control
Concept
The Driving Dynamics Control influences the
driving dynamics properties of the vehicle.
The vehicle can be adjusted depending on the
situation using various driving modes.
General information
The following systems are affected, for instance:
▷ Engine characteristics.
▷ Steptronic transmission.
▷ Adaptive chassis.
▷ Adaptive M Chassis Professional.
▷ Active roll stabilization.
▷ Steering.
▷ Integral Active Steering.
▷ Display in the instrument cluster.
▷ Cruise control.
Overview
Displays in the instrument
cluster
The selected driving mode is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Driving modes
Buttons in the vehicle
Button Driving
mode
Configura‐
tion
SPORT SPORT INDIVIDUAL
SPORT SPORT
PLUS
COMFORT COMFORT
Seite 128
CONTROLS
Driving
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Button Driving
mode
Configura‐
tion
ECO PRO ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
ADAPTIVE ADAPTIVE
When drive-ready state is switched on, the
COMFORT driving mode is selected automati‐
cally.
Driving modes in detail
COMFORT
Concept
Balanced tuning between dynamic and efficient
driving.
Switching on
Press the button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
SPORT
Concept
Dynamic tuning for higher agility with an opti‐
mized chassis and suspension.
Switching on
Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
SPORT INDIVIDUAL
Concept
Individual settings can be adjusted in the SPORT
INDIVIDUAL driving mode.
Configuration
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driving mode"
4. "SPORT INDIVIDUAL"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Reset SPORT INDIVIDUAL to the standard set‐
tings:
"Reset to SPORT STANDARD".
SPORT PLUS
Concept
Dynamic tuning for maximum agility with an ad‐
justed drive.
Switching on
Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT PLUS is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
ECO PRO
Concept
Efficient driving setting.
Switching on
Press the button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter.
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
Concept
Individual settings can be adjusted in the ECO
PRO INDIVIDUAL driving mode.
Seite 129
Driving
CONTROLS
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Configuration
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driving mode"
4. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard
settings:
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD".
ADAPTIVE
Concept
Comfort-oriented driving mode, whose tuning is
automatically modified to the driving situation
and driving style.
If the navigation system is active, upcoming road
sections are considered.
Switching on
Press the button. ADAPTIVE is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
INDIVIDUAL configuration
General information
The individual configuration of the driving mode
is stored for the active driver profile. The last set
configuration is activated directly when the driv‐
ing mode is called up again.
Activating configuration of the
driving mode
Press the button for the desired driving mode
several times.
Parking brake
Concept
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle
from rolling when it is parked.
Safety information
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Seite 130
CONTROLS
Driving
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Overview
Parking brake
Setting
With a stationary vehicle
Pull the switch.
The LED lights up.
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
ter illuminates red. The parking brake is
set.
While driving
General information
To use as emergency brake while driving.
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes
hard while the switch is being pulled.
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
ter illuminates red, a signal sounds, and
the brake lights illuminate.
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking brake is engaged when the vehicle
is stationary.
With Emergency Stop Assistant
Pull the switch for the parking brake briefly to ac‐
tivate the emergency stop function, refer to
page 199.
Releasing
Releasing manually
1. Switch on drive-ready state.
2.
Press the switch while stepping on the
brake pedal or selector lever position P is set.
The LED and indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
Automatic release
The parking brake is released automatically
when you drive away.
The LED and indicator light go out.
Automatic Hold
Concept
This system assists the driver by automatically
setting and releasing the brake, such as when
moving in stop-and-go traffic.
The vehicle is automatically held in place when it
is stationary.
On uphill grades the system prevents the vehicle
from rolling backward when driving off.
General information
Under the following conditions, the parking brake
is automatically engaged:
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.
▷ The driver's door is opened while the vehicle
is stationary.
▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a standstill
using the parking brake.
Display
The indicator light changes from green
to red.
Seite 131
Driving
CONTROLS
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Safety information
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
NOTICE
If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic Hold en‐
gages the parking brake and prevents the vehi‐
cle from rolling in a vehicle wash. There is a risk
of damage to property. Deactivate Automatic
Hold prior to entering the vehicle wash.
Overview
Automatic Hold
Establishing function readiness of
Automatic Hold
1.
Switch on drive-ready state.
2.
Press the button.
The LED lights up.
The indicator light lights up green.
Automatic Hold is functional.
After every new vehicle start, the last se‐
lected setting is active.
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle
Function readiness is established and the driv‐
er's door is closed.
After stepping on the brake pedal, for instance
when stopping at a traffic light, the vehicle is au‐
tomatically secured against rolling.
The indicator light lights up green.
Driving off
Step on the accelerator pedal to drive off.
The brake is released automatically and the indi‐
cator light is no longer illuminated.
Seite 132
CONTROLS
Driving
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Activating the parking brake
automatically
The parking brake is automatically set if drive-
ready state is switched off while the vehicle is
being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle is
exited.
The indicator light changes from green
to red.
The parking brake is not set automatically, if the
drive-ready state is switched off, while the vehi‐
cle is coasting to a halt. Automatic Hold is deacti‐
vated.
Switching function readiness off
Press the button.
The LED goes out.
The indicator light goes out.
Automatic Hold is switched off.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
press additionally on the brake pedal, when
switching off.
Malfunction
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
parking brake:
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in‐
stance with a wheel chock, after existing the ve‐
hicle.
After a power failure
To reestablish parking brake functionality after a
power failure:
1.
Switch on standby state.
2.
Pull the switch while stepping on the
brake pedal or selector lever position P is set
and then push.
This process may take a few seconds. Some
mechanical sounds associated with this process
are normal.
The indicator light is no longer illumi‐
nated as soon as the parking brake is
ready for operation again.
Turn signal
Turn signal in exterior mirror
When driving and during operation of the turn
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold in
the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights on
the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Using turn signals
Press the lever past the resistance point.
Triple turn signal activation
Lightly tap the lever up or down.
The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. "One-touch turn signal"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Seite 133
Driving
CONTROLS
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it
there for as long as you want the turn signal to
flash.
High beams,
headlight flasher
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
The high beams light up when the low beams
are switched on.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Wiper system
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as
this may damage the wiper blades or cause them
to become worn more quickly.
Safety information
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐
ers are folded in when switching on.
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐
tor can overheat when switching on. There is a
risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐
shield prior to switching the wipers on.
Switching on
Press the lever up until the desired position is
reached.
▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
▷ Rain sensor, position 1.
▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.
▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3.
When travel is interrupted with the wiper system
switched on: when travel continues, the wipers
resume at their previous speed.
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the lever down.
Seite 134
CONTROLS
Driving
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it
reaches its standard position.
▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the
standard position.
The lever automatically returns to its initial
position when released.
Rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of the
rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, directly
in front of the interior mirror.
Safety information
NOTICE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can
accidentally start moving in vehicle washes.
There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti‐
vate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.
Activating
Press the lever up once from its standard posi‐
tion, arrow 1.
Wiping is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
In frosty conditions, wiper operation may not
start.
Deactivating
Press the lever back into the standard position.
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the sensitivity of
the rain sensor.
Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity.
Downward: low rain sensor sensitivity.
Windshield washer system
Safety information
Warning
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at
low temperatures and obstruct the view. There
is a risk of accident. Only use the washer sys‐
tems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use
washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed.
NOTICE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the
wash pump cannot work as intended. There is
a risk of damage to property. Do not use the
washer system when the washer fluid reservoir
is empty.
Seite 135
Driving
CONTROLS
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are automatically
heated while standby state is switched on.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept
The fold-away position enables the wipers to be
folded away from the windshield.
General information
Important, for instance when changing the wiper
blades or for folding away under frosty condi‐
tions.
Safety information
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐
ers are folded in when switching on.
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐
tor can overheat when switching on. There is a
risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐
shield prior to switching the wipers on.
Folding away the wipers
1. Switch on standby state.
2. Press and hold the wiper lever down, until the
wipers stop in a close to vertical position.
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the
windshield.
Folding down the wipers
After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper
system must be reactivated.
1.
Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐
shield.
2. Switch on standby state and press and hold
the wiper lever down again.
3. Wipers return to their resting position and are
ready again for operation.
Seite 136
CONTROLS
Driving
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Steptronic transmission
Concept
The Steptronic transmission combines the func‐
tions of an automatic transmission with the pos‐
sibility of manual shifting, if needed.
Safety information
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing, for instance with the parking brake.
Selector lever positions
Drive mode D
Selector lever position for normal vehicle opera‐
tion. All gears for forward travel are activated au‐
tomatically.
R is reverse
Engage selector lever position R only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Neutral N
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without power,
for instance in vehicle washes, refer to
page 138, in selector lever position N.
Parking position P
Selector lever position, for instance for parking
the vehicle. The transmission blocks the drive
wheels in selector lever position P.
Engage selector lever position P only when the
vehicle is stationary.
P is engaged automatically
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
cally in situations such as the following:
▷ After the drive-ready state is switched off and
selector lever position R, D or M/S is en‐
gaged.
▷ After the standby state has been switched off
when selector lever position N is engaged.
▷ If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, the
driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal
is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary
and selector lever position D, M/S or R is en‐
gaged.
Engaging selector lever
positions
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the
brake pedal until you are ready to start.
Functional requirements
Only when the drive-ready state is switched on
and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible to
change from selector lever position P to another
selector lever position.
The selection lever position P cannot be
changed until all technical requirements are met.
Engaging selector lever position D,
N, R
A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty
operation:
▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever posi‐
tion R.
▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever po‐
sition P into another selector lever position.
1. Fasten driver's safety belt.
Seite 137
Driving
CONTROLS
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
2. Press and hold the button to release the se‐
lector lever lock.
3. Push the selector lever in the desired direc‐
tion, past a resistance point, if needed. The
selector lever automatically returns to the
center position when released.
Engaging selector lever position P
Press button P.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
General information
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without
its own power for a short distance, for instance in
a vehicle wash, or be pushed.
Engaging selector lever position N
1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing on
the brake pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. If necessary, switch off Automatic Hold, refer
to page 131.
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Touch the selector lever lock and engage se‐
lector lever position N.
6. Switch off drive-ready state.
In this way, standby state remains switched
on, and a Check Control message is dis‐
played.
The vehicle can roll.
NOTICE
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐
gaged when standby state is switched off.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
switch standby state off in vehicle washes.
Irrespective of standby state, the selector lever
position P is automatically engaged after approx.
35 minutes.
If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to
change the selector lever position.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if
needed, refer to page 140.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance.
Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resist‐
ance point at the full throttle position.
Sport program M/S
Concept
The shifting points and shifting times in the
Sport program are designed for a sportier driving
Seite 138
CONTROLS
Driving
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
style. The transmission, for instance shifts up
later and the shifting times are shorter.
Activating the Sport program
Press the selector lever to the left from selector
lever position D.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster, for instance S1.
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐
vated.
Ending the Sport program
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Manual mode M/S
Concept
Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual mode.
Activating manual mode
1.
Press the selector lever to the left from selec‐
tor lever position D, arrow 1.
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it
backward, arrows 2.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster, for instance M1.
Shifting
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.
The transmission continues shifting automati‐
cally in certain situations, for instance when
speed limits are reached.
Steptronic Sport transmission:
prevent automatic upshifting in M/S
manual mode
If driving mode SPORT, refer to page 129, is se‐
lected, the Steptronic Sport transmission does
not automatically upshift in M/S manual mode
once the maximum speed is reached.
Depending on the BMW M drive configuration,
this function is active independently of the driv‐
ing mode.
In addition, there is no downshifting for kick‐
down.
Ending the manual mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles
Concept
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
Seite 139
Driving
CONTROLS
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
General information
Shifting
The vehicle only shifts at suitable engine and
road speeds.
Short-term manual mode
In selector lever position D, actuating a shift pad‐
dle switches into manual mode temporarily.
After conservative driving in manual mode with‐
out acceleration or shifting via the shift paddles
for a certain amount of time, the transmission
switches back to automatic mode.
It is possible to switch into automatic mode as
follows:
▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle.
▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift pad‐
dle, briefly pull the left shift paddle.
Continuous manual mode
In selector lever position S, actuating a shift pad‐
dle switches into manual mode permanently.
Steptronic Sport transmission
With the appropriate transmission version, the
lowest possible gear can be selected by simulta‐
neously activating kickdown and operating the
left shift paddles. This is not possible in short-
term manual mode.
Shifting
▷ To shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.
▷ To shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.
▷ The lowest possible gear can be selected by
pulling and holding the left shift paddle.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Displays in the instrument
cluster
The selector lever position is dis‐
played, for example P.
Electronic unlocking of the
transmission lock
General information
Electronically unlock the transmission lock to
maneuver vehicle from a danger area.
Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin the
engine.
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the
parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling
away.
Engaging selector lever position N
1.
Press and hold down brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter must
audibly start. Hold the Start/Stop button
pressed.
3. With your free hand, press the button on the
selector lever, arrow 1, and press the selector
lever into selector lever position N and hold,
arrow N, until selector lever position N is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Seite 140
CONTROLS
Driving
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
A Check Control message is displayed.
4. Release Start/Stop button and selector lever.
5. Release brake, as soon as the starter stops.
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area
and secure it against moving on its own.
For additional information, see the chapter on
tow-starting and towing, refer to page 342.
Launch Control
Concept
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on surfaces with good traction under dry sur‐
rounding conditions.
General information
The use of Launch Control causes premature
component wear since this function represents a
very heavy load for the vehicle.
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
refer to page 282, period.
Do not steer the steering wheel when driving off
with Launch Control.
Functional requirements
Launch Control is available when the engine is at
operating temperature. The engine is at operat‐
ing temperature after an uninterrupted trip of at
least 6 miles/10 km.
Start with launch control
1.
Switch on drive-ready state.
2.
Press the button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF
lights up.
3. Engage selector lever position S.
4. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
5. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full throttle
position, kickdown.
A flag symbol is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
6. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
3 seconds, release the brake.
Repeated use during a trip
After Launch Control has been used, the trans‐
mission must cool down for approx. 5 minutes
before Launch Control can be used again.
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding con‐
ditions, when used again.
After using Launch Control
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC Dy‐
namic Stability Control again as soon as possible.
System limits
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
Seite 141
Driving
CONTROLS
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Displays
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Instrument cluster
Concept
The instrument cluster is a variable display.
When you change to a different program via Driv‐
ing Dynamics Control, the displays in the instru‐
ment cluster adapt to the respective driving
mode.
General information
The display change in the instrument cluster can
be deactivated via iDrive.
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster
may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's
Manual.
Overview
1 Fuel gauge 147
Range 149
2 Speedometer
3 Central display area 142
Service requirements 149
Navigation display
4 Depending on the equipment: Driver Atten‐
tion Camera
5 Tachometer 148
Selection lists 152
Widgets in the instrument cluster 143
Trip odometer, see Trip data 153
ECO PRO displays 287
Status, Driving Dynamics Control 128
Transmission display 137
6 Engine temperature 148
7 External temperature 149
8 Check Control 144
9 Speed Limit Assist 219
Speed Limit Info 151
Time 60
Central display area
Depending on the equipment, the following is
displayed in the central display area of the instru‐
ment cluster:
Seite 142
CONTROLS
Displays
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ Navigation displays such as the map view or,
if destination guidance is active, a route pre‐
view with destination guidance information.
▷ Displays showing service requirements.
Some displays in the central display area can be
configured individually. Setting the displays in the
central display area, refer to page 143.
The displays may vary depending on the equip‐
ment version and country variant.
Driving mode view
Concept
When the driving mode view is deactivated, the
displays in the instrument cluster remain un‐
changed and do not adapt to the respective driv‐
ing mode when the program is changed via Driv‐
ing Dynamics Control.
Activating/deactivating
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Driving mode view"
Adjusting
Individual displays in the instrument cluster can
be configured individually.
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. Select the desired setting.
Widgets in the instrument
cluster
Concept
Displays for specific functions can be displayed
in the tachometer in the instrument cluster.
The following displays can be selected:
▷ Trip data, refer to page 153.
▷ Torque and power, refer to page 154.
▷ Acceleration power, refer to page 154.
▷ Current entertainment source, for instance,
radio, refer to Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication.
▷ Efficiency display, refer to page 144.
Selecting
Continue to press the button on the turn signal
lever until the desired widget is selected.
Display
Seite 143
Displays
CONTROLS
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Efficiency display
Concept
Information about driving style and consumption
can be displayed in the form of a consumption
display as a widget in the instrument cluster, for
example.
General information
Depending on the activated driving mode, differ‐
ent information will be displayed:
Driving
mode
Display
COMFORT
SPORT
Current consumption.
Average consumption.
Energy recovery.
ECO PRO ECO PRO bonus range.
Distance traveled in Coasting
mode.
Current consumption.
Average consumption
The average consumption indicates the fuel con‐
sumption when driving a specific route.
Current consumption
The current consumption displays the current
consumption of fuel. Check whether you are cur‐
rently driving in an efficient and environmentally-
friendly manner.
Energy recovery
During energy recovery, the kinetic energy of the
vehicle is converted into electric energy during
coasting. The vehicle battery is partially charged
and fuel consumption can be reduced.
ECO PRO bonus range
In the ECO PRO driving mode, the yielded exten‐
sion of the range as a result of fuel-efficient driv‐
ing is displayed as ECO PRO bonus range, refer
to page 287.
Check Control
Concept
The Check Control system monitors functions in
the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in
the monitored systems.
General information
A Check Control message is displayed as a com‐
bination of indicator or warning lights and text
messages in the instrument cluster and, if appli‐
cable, in the Head-up Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a
text message may appear on the Control Display.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
Continuous display
Some Check Control messages are displayed
continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐
function is eliminated. If several malfunctions oc‐
cur at once, the messages are displayed consec‐
utively.
The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 sec‐
onds. After this time, they are displayed again
automatically.
Seite 144
CONTROLS
Displays
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Temporary display
Some Check Control messages are hidden auto‐
matically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check
Control messages are stored and can be dis‐
played again later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the SMS text message.
Display
Check Control
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or stored.
SMS text messages
SMS text messages in combination with a sym‐
bol in the instrument cluster explain a Check
Control message and the meaning of the indica‐
tor/warning lights.
Supplementary SMS text messages
Additional information, such as the reason for an
error or malfunction or the required action, can
be called up via Check Control.
With urgent messages the added text will be au‐
tomatically displayed on the Control Display.
Depending on the Check Control message, fur‐
ther help can be selected.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the desired text message.
5. Select the desired setting.
Messages after trip completion
Certain messages displayed while driving are dis‐
played again after drive-ready state is switched
off.
Indicator/warning lights
Concept
Indicator/warning lights in the instrument cluster
display the status of some functions in the vehi‐
cle and indicate when a malfunction is present in
the monitored systems.
General information
The indicator/warning lights can light up in a vari‐
ety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper func‐
tioning and light up temporarily when drive-ready
state is switched on.
Red lights
Safety belt reminder
Indicator light flashes or is illuminated:
safety belt on the driver or passenger
side is not buckled. The safety belt re‐
minder can also be activated if objects are placed
on the front passenger seat.
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
correctly.
Airbag system
Airbag system and belt tensioner may
not be working.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Seite 145
Displays
CONTROLS
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Parking brake
The parking brake is set.
For releasing the parking brake, refer to
page 131.
Brake system
Braking system impaired. Continue to
drive moderately.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Yellow lights
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
The Brake Assistant function may not
activate. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the
longer braking distance into account.
Have the system immediately checked
by a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls
the drive and braking forces. The vehicle
is stabilized. Reduce speed and modify
your driving style to the driving circumstances.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐
tioned.
Have the system immediately checked by a deal‐
er's service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
DSC, refer to page 203.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
deactivated or DTC Dynamic
Traction Control is activated
DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated.
DSC, refer to page 203, and DTC, refer to
page 205.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
tire inflation pressure in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 316.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The indicator light lights up: the Tire
Pressure Monitor reports a low tire infla‐
tion pressure or a flat tire. Follow the in‐
formation in the Check Control message.
The indicator light flashes and then continuously
lights up: no flat tire or loss of tire inflation pres‐
sure can be detected.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leaving
the area of the interference, the system auto‐
matically becomes active again.
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center
or repair shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 309.
Steering system
Steering system may not be working.
Have the system checked by a dealer's
service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
Emissions
▷ The warning light lights up:
Seite 146
CONTROLS
Displays
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Emissions are deteriorating. Have the
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive misfiring
in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious
engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐
ously damage emission control components,
in particular the catalytic converter.
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to
page 334.
Green lights
Turn signal
Turn signal switched on.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
light indicates that a turn signal bulb has
failed.
Turn signal, refer to page 133.
Parking lights
Parking lights are switched on.
Parking lights/low beams, refer to
page 159.
Low beams
Low beams are switched on.
Parking lights/low beams, refer to
page 159.
Lane departure warning
The indicator light lights up: the system
is activated. A lane marking was detected
on at least one side of the vehicle and
warnings can be issued.
Lane departure warning, refer to page 189.
High-beam Assistant
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are switched on and off au‐
tomatically depending on the traffic sit‐
uation.
High-beam Assistant, refer to page 161.
Automatic Hold
Automatic Hold is activated. The vehicle
is automatically held in place when it is
stationary.
Automatic Hold, refer to page 131.
Blue lights
High beams
High beams are switched on.
High beams, refer to page 134.
Fuel gauge
Concept
The current fill level of the fuel tank is displayed.
General information
Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to
vary.
Information on refueling, refer to page 294.
Display
An arrow beside the fuel pump
symbol shows which side of the
vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.
The current range is displayed as
numerical value.
Seite 147
Displays
CONTROLS
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Indicator light in the instrument
cluster
The yellow indicator light illuminates,
once the fuel reserve is reached.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to
protect the engine.
Shift point indicator
Concept
The shift lights indicate the upshift point at which
the best possible acceleration can be achieved.
Functional requirement
Shift lights are shown when the SPORT or
SPORT PLUS driving program is activated.
Switching on/off
1.
Select SPORT or SPORT PLUS driving
mode.
Press Driving Dynamics Control.
2. Activate the M/S manual mode of the trans‐
mission.
Display
▷ Current engine speed is displayed in the
tachometer.
▷ Arrow 1: successive yellow illuminated fields
indicate an increase in the speed.
▷ Arrow 2: successive orange illuminated fields
indicate the upcoming shift moment.
▷ Arrow 3: the field lights up red. Do not wait
any further to shift.
When the maximum speed is reached, the entire
display flashes red and the supply of fuel is inter‐
rupted in order to protect the engine.
Standby state and drive-
ready state
The letters OFF in the tachome‐
ter indicate that drive-ready state
is switched off and standby state
is switched on.
The letters READY in the tach‐
ometer indicate that the Auto
Start/Stop function is ready to
start the engine automatically.
For further information, see Idle state, standby
state, and drive-ready state, refer to page 41.
Engine temperature
Display
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at
the low temperature end.
Drive at moderate engine and
vehicle speeds.
▷ Normal operating tempera‐
ture: the pointer is in the mid‐
dle or in the lower half of the
temperature display.
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of
the temperature range. In addition, a Check
Control message is displayed.
Seite 148
CONTROLS
Displays
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
To check the coolant level, refer to page 330.
Indicator light in the instrument
cluster
A red indicator light is displayed.
External temperature
General information
If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a
signal sounds.
A Check Control message is displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Safety information
Warning
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance on
bridges or shady sections of the road. There is
a risk of accident. Modify your driving style to
the weather conditions at low temperatures.
Range
Concept
The range indicates the distance that can still be
covered with the current fuel level.
General information
The estimated range available with the remaining
fuel is permanently displayed in the instrument
cluster.
With a low remaining range, a Check Control
message is briefly displayed. With a dynamic
driving style, for instance fast cornering, the en‐
gine function is not always ensured.
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Safety information
NOTICE
With a driving range of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to
property. Refuel promptly.
Display
The current range is displayed as
numerical value next to the fuel
gauge.
Service requirements
Concept
The function displays the service requirements
and the corresponding maintenance scopes.
General information
After switching on drive-ready state, the instru‐
ment cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐
tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐
nance.
A service advisor can read out the current serv‐
ice requirements from your remote control.
Some information on service requirements can
also be shown on the BMW display key.
Display
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the type of service required
may be displayed on the Control Display.
Seite 149
Displays
CONTROLS
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service schedule"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed information.
Symbols
Sym‐
bols
Description
No service is currently required.
The deadline for scheduled mainte‐
nance or a legally mandated inspec‐
tion is approaching.
The service deadline has already
passed.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐
spections.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service schedule"
4. "BMW Service"
5. "Date:"
6. Select the desired setting.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the service status or legally man‐
dated vehicle inspections is automatically trans‐
mitted to your dealer’s service center before your
vehicle is due for service.
You can check when your dealer’s service center
was notified.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Move the Controller to the left.
4. "TeleService Call"
Gear shift indicator
Concept
The system recommends the most efficient gear
for the current driving situation.
General information
Depending on the design and country version,
the gear shift indicator may be active in the
manual mode of the Steptronic transmission.
Steptronic transmission:
displaying
Suggestions to shift up or down are displayed in
the instrument cluster.
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the en‐
gaged gear is displayed.
Example Description
Efficient gear is set.
Shift into efficient gear.
Seite 150
CONTROLS
Displays
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Speed Limit Info
Speed Limit Info
Concept
Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid speed
limit in the instrument cluster and, if necessary,
the Head-up Display.
General information
The camera in the area of the interior mirror de‐
tects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well
as variable overhead sign posts.
Traffic signs with extra symbols are considered
and compared with the vehicle's onboard data.
The traffic sign will then be either displayed or ig‐
nored depending on the situation in the instru‐
ment cluster and the Head-up Display.
The system takes into account any information
that is stored in the navigation system and also
displays speed limits present on routes without
signs.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Overview
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
Displaying Speed Limit Info
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, Speed
Limit Info is displayed permanently in the instru‐
ment cluster or via iDrive.
Activating/deactivating
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Driving"
5. "Speed Limit Assistant"
6. "Info on speed limits"
7. "Show current limit"
Display
Speed Limit Info
Current speed limit.
Seite 151
Displays
CONTROLS
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Depending on the equipment,
Speed Limit Info not available.
If the detected speed limit has been exceeded,
the indicator light will flash.
Adjusting
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Driving"
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"
6. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Warn when speeding": activate/deacti‐
vate the flashing of the Speed Limit Info
display in the instrument cluster and,
where applicable, the Head-up Display
when the currently valid speed limit is ex‐
ceeded. The warning that is issued when
a speed limit is exceeded may depend on
the Speed Limit Assist settings.
▷ "Excess speed display": the speed limit
that is detected by the Speed Limit Info is
displayed with a marking in the speedom‐
eter in the instrument cluster.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and may
provide incorrect information in the following sit‐
uations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ When signs are fully or partially concealed by
objects, stickers or paint.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a
sticker, etc.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
porarily switched off due to excessively high
temperatures.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
▷ If the speed limits or road data stored in the
navigation system are incorrect.
▷ If the speed limits vary with the time of day
and the day of the week.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such
as due to changes in road routing.
▷ In case of electronic traffic signs.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with traffic
signs applied to them.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ When signs that are valid for a parallel road
are detected.
▷ In the presence of country-specific signs and
road configurations.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
Selection lists
Concept
Lists can be displayed and, if necessary, used for
certain functions in the instrument cluster or the
Head-up Display.
▷ Entertainment source.
▷ Current audio source.
▷ List of most recent telephone calls.
Seite 152
CONTROLS
Displays
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
If necessary, the corresponding menu will open
on the Control Display.
Display
Depending on the equipment version, the list in
the instrument cluster may differ from the illus‐
tration.
Displaying and using the list
Button Function
Change the entertainment
source.
Pressing the button again will
close the currently displayed
list.
Show list of most recent tele‐
phone calls.
Turn the thumbwheel to select
the desired setting.
Press the thumbwheel to con‐
firm the setting.
The currently selected list can
be displayed again in the instru‐
ment cluster by turning the
thumbwheel.
Trip data
Concept
Values for the trip, such as the average con‐
sumption or trip miles, are displayed.
General information
The trip data can be displayed on the Control
Display and in the instrument cluster.
The values can be displayed and reset depend‐
ing on various intervals, such as after refueling.
Display on the Control Display
Overview
The following information is displayed:
▷ Configured interval for resetting the trip data.
▷ Average consumption, fuel.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Total time for shut off engine through the
Auto Start/Stop function.
▷ Distance traveled in Coasting mode.
▷ Consumption history in form of a chart.
Displays
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip data"
Consumption history
The average consumption is shown in the con‐
sumption history in form of a chart based on the
distance travelled and the driving mode.
Display in the instrument cluster
Information about the route can be displayed as
widget in the tachometer. Selecting and setting
widgets in the instrument cluster, refer to
page 143.
Seite 153
Displays
CONTROLS
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
The following information is displayed:
▷ Total mileage.
▷ Configured interval for resetting the trip data.
▷ Distance travelled depending on the config‐
ured interval.
▷ Average speed.
Resetting trip data
The intervals in which the values must be reset
can be configured.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip data"
4. "Data since"
5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Start of trip ( )": the values are automati‐
cally reset approx. four hours after the ve‐
hicle has come to a standstill.
▷ "Refueling ( )": the values are automati‐
cally reset after refueling with a larger
quantity of fuel.
▷ "Factory ( )": the values since the time of
the factory delivery are displayed.
▷ "Individual ( )": the values since the last
manual reset are displayed. The values
can be reset at any time.
Resetting average values
manually
The following interval can be reset manually at
any time: "Individual ( )".
With the button on the turn signal lever:
1. Continue to press the button on the turn sig‐
nal lever until the widget for the trip data is
selected.
2. Press and hold the button on the turn signal
lever.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip data"
4. "Data since"
5. "Reset individual"
The average values and counters are reset.
Once the average values and counters have
been reset, the following interval is automatically
set: "Individual ( )".
Sport displays
Concept
The Sport displays especially support a sporty
driving style.
Display on the Control Display
Overview
The following information is displayed:
▷ Boost pressure.
▷ Engine oil temperature.
▷ Acceleration power.
Seite 154
CONTROLS
Displays
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ Torque.
▷ Power.
Displays
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Sport displays"
Display in the instrument cluster
The Sport displays can be displayed in form of
two widgets in the instrument cluster, refer to
page 143.
The following widgets can be selected:
▷ Widget for torque and power.
▷ Widget for acceleration power.
Vehicle status
General information
The status can be displayed and actions per‐
formed for several systems.
Opening the vehicle status
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
Information at a glance
Symbols Description
"Flat Tire Monitor": status of the
Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 316.
"Tire Pressure Monitor": status
of the Tire Pressure Monitor, re‐
fer to page 309.
Symbols Description
"Engine oil level": electronic oil
measurement, refer to
page 327.
"Check Control": displaying
stored Check Control mes‐
sages, refer to page 145.
"Service schedule": displaying
service requirements, refer to
page 149.
"TeleService Call": Service Re‐
quest.
Head-up Display
Concept
This system projects important information into
the driver's field of vision, for instance the speed.
The driver can get information without averting
his or her eyes from the road.
General information
Follow the information on cleaning the Head-up
Display, refer to page 349.
Overview
Seite 155
Displays
CONTROLS
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Switching on/off
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display"
5. "Head-up display"
Display
Overview
The following information is displayed on the
Head-up Display:
▷ Vehicle speed.
▷ Navigation instructions.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Selection list in the instrument cluster.
▷ Driver assistance systems.
▷ Sport displays.
Some of this information is only displayed briefly
as needed.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display"
5. "Brightness"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
7. Press the Controller.
When the low beams are switched on, the
brightness of the Head-up Display can be addi‐
tionally influenced using the instrument lighting.
Adjusting the height
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display"
5. "Height"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired height is
reached.
7. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the rotation
The Head-up Display view can be rotated.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display"
5. "Rotation"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
selected.
7. Press the Controller.
Seite 156
CONTROLS
Displays
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Additional settings
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display"
5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Speed Limit Assistant": access the set‐
tings for the speed assistant.
▷ "Display infotainment lists in": set up if the
selection lists are displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster or the Head-up Display.
▷ "Sport displays": display tachometer and
Shift Lights in the Head-up Display.
▷ "Off": the Sport displays are not dis‐
played in the Head-up Display.
▷ "In SPORT mode": the Sport displays
are only displayed in SPORT driving
mode.
▷ "Always": the Sport displays are con‐
tinuously displayed in the Head-up
Display.
▷ "Reduced height": if not all of the informa‐
tion is in the driver's field of vision, the in‐
formation can be displayed in the lower
section of the Head-up Display.
Visibility of the display
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐
play is influenced by the following factors:
▷ Seat position.
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Display.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet roads.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, have the basic settings
checked by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible to
display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double images
from being generated.
For this reason, it is strongly suggested to have
the special windshield replaced by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop, if necessary.
Seite 157
Displays
CONTROLS
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Lights
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Lights and lighting
Switches in the vehicle
The light switch element is located next to the
steering wheel.
Symbol Function
Night Vision, refer to page 185.
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
Parking lights.
Symbol Function
Automatic headlight control.
Adaptive light functions.
Low beams.
Instrument lighting.
Right roadside parking light.
Left roadside parking light.
Automatic headlight
control
Concept
The low beams are switched on and off automat‐
ically depending on the ambient brightness, for
example in tunnels, in twilight or if there is pre‐
cipitation.
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
If the low beams are switched on manually, the
automatic headlight control is deactivated.
Activating
Press the button on the light switch ele‐
ment.
The LED in the button lights up.
Seite 158
CONTROLS
Lights
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
ter is illuminated when the low beams are
switched on.
System limits
The automatic headlight control cannot serve as
a substitute for your personal judgment of light‐
ing conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. In these situations, switch
the lights on manually.
Parking lights, low beams
and roadside parking lights
General information
If the driver's door is opened when the drive-
ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting is
automatically switched off.
Parking lights
General information
The parking lights can only be switched on in the
low speed range.
Switching on
Press the button on the light switch ele‐
ment.
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
ter lights up.
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐
ods; otherwise, they might drain the battery and
it would then be impossible to switch on drive-
ready state.
Switching off
Press the button on the light switch ele‐
ment or switch on the drive-ready state.
After the drive-ready state is switched on, the
automatic headlight control will be activated.
Low beams
Switching on
Press the button on the light switch ele‐
ment.
The low beams illuminate when drive-ready state
is switched on.
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
ter lights up.
Press the button again to switch on the low
beams when the standby state is switched on.
Switching off
Depending on the country variant, the low beams
can be switched off in the low speed range.
Press the button on the light switch ele‐
ment.
Roadside parking lights
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided roadside
parking light can be switched on.
Button Function
Right roadside parking light on/off.
Left roadside parking light on/off.
Seite 159
Lights
CONTROLS
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Welcome lights
General information
Depending on the equipment, the exterior light‐
ing of the vehicle can be set individually.
Activating/deactivating
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. Select the desired setting:
▷ "MGU-416756"
When unlocking the vehicle, individual
light functions are switched on for a lim‐
ited time.
▷ "Door handle lights"
Door handles and the ground in front of
the doors are illuminated for a limited
time.
Headlight courtesy delay
feature
General information
The low beams stay lit for a certain time if the
high beams are switched on after standby state
is switched on.
Setting the duration
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. "Pathway lighting"
5. Select the desired setting.
Daytime running lights
General information
The daytime running lights light up when drive-
ready state is switched on.
Activating/deactivating
In some countries, daytime running lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐
vate the daytime running lights.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. "Daytime driving lights"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Adaptive light functions
Concept
Adaptive light functions enable dynamic illumina‐
tion of the roadway.
General information
The adaptive light functions may consist of one
system or multiple systems, depending on the
equipment version:
▷ Adaptive Light Control, refer to page 161.
▷ Cornering light, refer to page 161.
Activating
Press the button on the light switch ele‐
ment.
The LED in the button lights up.
The adaptive light functions are active when the
drive-ready state is switched on.
Seite 160
CONTROLS
Lights
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Adaptive Light Control
General information
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlight follows the
course of the road.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive
Light Control does not swivel to the opposite
lane when the vehicle is at a standstill.
Cornering light
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous
roads or when turning, an additional, cornering
light is switched on that lights up the inside of
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a
certain speed.
The cornering light is automatically switched on
depending on the steering angle or, where appli‐
cable, the use of turn signals.
When driving in reverse, the cornering lights may
be automatically switched on regardless of the
steering angle.
Adaptive headlight range
control
The adaptive headlight range control feature bal‐
ances out acceleration and braking processes as
well as the vehicle load conditions in order to
avoid dazzling oncoming traffic. Illumination of
the road is optimized.
High-beam Assistant
Concept
The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic
participants early on and automatically switches
the high beams on or off depending on the traffic
situation.
General information
The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high
beams are switched on, whenever the traffic sit‐
uation allows. In the low speed range, the high
beams are not switched on by the system.
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to am‐
bient lighting, for instance in towns and cities.
The high beams can be switched on and off
manually at any time.
Activating
1. Press the button on the light switch
element.
The LED in the button lights up.
2. Press the button on the turn signal lever.
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
ter is illuminated when the low beams are
switched on.
The headlights are automatically switched be‐
tween low beams and high beams.
The blue indicator light in the instrument
cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams.
Driving interruption with activated high-beam As‐
sistant: the High-Beam Assistant remains acti‐
vated when driving continues.
The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when
manually switching the high beams on and off,
refer to page 134.
Seite 161
Lights
CONTROLS
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press the
button on the turn signal lever.
Deactivating
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
Sensitivity of the high-beam
Assistant
General information
The sensitivity of the high-beam Assistant can
be adjusted.
Safety information
Warning
If adjustments have been made or the sensitiv‐
ity has been modified, oncoming traffic may be
momentarily blinded. There is a risk of accident.
If adjustments have been made and the sensi‐
tivity has been modified, make sure that on‐
coming traffic is not momentarily blinded.
Switch off the high beams manually if required.
Adjusting the sensitivity
Pull the turn signal lever for approxi‐
mately 10 seconds. The system responds more
sensitively.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Resetting the sensitivity
Pull the turn signal lever again for approx. 10 sec‐
onds. The sensitivity of the high-beam Assistant
is reset to the factory settings.
System limits
The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver's personal judgment of when
to use the high beams. In situation that require
this, therefore switch off manually.
The system is not fully functional in the following
situations, and driver intervention may be neces‐
sary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, such
as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; or at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncoming
traffic on highways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres‐
ence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
Laser high beams
Concept
The range of the high beams is increased and
ensures an even better illumination of the road.
General information
When the high beams are switched-on, starting
with a speed of approx. 37 mph/60 km/h, the la‐
ser high beams in the headlight are automatically
switched on in addition to the LED high beams.
Depending on the country variant, further infor‐
mation can be obtained from the laser label on
the headlight.
Seite 162
CONTROLS
Lights
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Safety information
The label is in the headlight and is visible from
the outside.
Instrument lighting
Functional requirement
The parking lights or low beams must be
switched on to adjust the brightness.
Adjusting
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel.
Interior lights
General information
Depending on the equipment version, interior
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient light‐
ing, and speaker lighting are automatically con‐
trolled.
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Interior lights
Reading lights
Switching the interior lights
on/off
Press the button.
To switch off permanently: press the button and
hold for approx. 3 seconds.
Switching the reading lights
on/off
Press the button.
Ambient light
General information
Depending on the equipment version, lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's inte‐
rior.
Switching on/off
The ambient light is switched on when the vehi‐
cle is unlocked, and switched off when the vehi‐
cle is locked.
Seite 163
Lights
CONTROLS
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive, it
will not be switched on when the vehicle is un‐
locked.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Ambient lighting"
The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐
file currently used.
Selecting the color scheme
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Color"
5. Select the desired setting.
Setting the brightness
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Brightness"
5. Select the desired setting.
Dynamic light
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Dynamic light"
5. Select the desired setting.
Individual actions, for example incoming calls or
opened doors, are indicated by light effects.
Dimmed while driving
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Dimmed for night driving"
Some lights of the interior lighting are dimmed
when the vehicle is driven in the dark.
The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐
file currently used.
Bowers & Wilkins Diamond
Surround Sound System
General information
Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated.
Brightness can be individually set.
If the speakers are muted, speaker lighting will be
switched off.
Switching on/off
The speaker lighting is switched on when the ve‐
hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the ve‐
hicle is locked.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Bowers & Wilkins"
The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐
file currently used.
Setting the brightness
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Interior lighting"
Seite 164
CONTROLS
Lights
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
4. "Bowers & Wilkins"
5. "Brightness"
6. Select the desired setting.
Seite 165
Lights
CONTROLS
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Safety
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Side airbag
4 Knee airbag
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and the
front passenger by responding to frontal impacts
in which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐
equate protection.
Side airbag
In the event of a side impact, the side airbag pro‐
tects the side of the body in the chest, lap, and
head area.
Seite 166
CONTROLS
Safety
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Knee airbag
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event of
a frontal impact.
Protective effect
General information
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents.
Information on optimum effect of the
airbags
Warning
If the seat position is incorrect or the deploy‐
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag
system cannot provide protection as intended
and may cause additional injuries due to trig‐
gering. There is a risk of injuries or danger to
life. Follow the information on achieving the op‐
timum protective effect of the airbag system.
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the
risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as
possible when the airbag is triggered.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in
the floor area and does not support them on
the dashboard.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag.
▷ There should be no additional persons, ani‐
mals or objects between an airbag and a per‐
son.
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front pas‐
senger side must stay clear - do not attach
adhesive labels or coverings and do not at‐
tach brackets or cables, for instance for GPS
devices or mobile phones.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the airbag
cover panels, do not cover them or modify
them in any way.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects to the front passenger seat that
are not specifically suited for seats with
integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐
ets, over the backrests.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This
also applies to steering wheel covers, the
dashboard, and the seats.
▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags can‐
not be fully ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐
ing impairment in sensitive occupants.
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐
ties may affect the air bag system; contact BMW
Customer Relations for further information.
Warnings and information on the airbags are also
found on the sun visors.
Functional readiness of the
airbag system
Safety information
Warning
Individual components can be hot after trigger‐
ing of the airbag system. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Do not touch individual components.
Seite 167
Safety
CONTROLS
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Warning
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,
malfunction or unintentional triggering of the
airbag system. In the case of a malfunction, the
airbag system might not trigger as intended de‐
spite the accident severity. There is a risk of in‐
juries or danger to life. Have the airbag system
checked, repaired, dismantled and scrapped by
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Display in the instrument cluster
When drive-ready state is switched on,
the warning light in the instrument clus‐
ter lights up briefly and thereby indicates
the function readiness of the entire airbag sys‐
tem and the belt tensioners.
Malfunction
▷ Warning light does not come on
when drive-ready state is switched
on.
▷ The warning light lights up continuously.
Have the system checked.
Strength of the driver's and
front-seat passenger airbag
The explosive power that activates driver's/front-
seat passenger airbags very much depends on
the positions of the driver's/front passenger seat.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon as
a respective message appears on the Control
Display.
Calibrating the front seats
Warning
There is a risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
ment.
A corresponding message appears on the Con‐
trol Display.
1. Press the switch and move the respective
seat all the way forward, until it stops.
2. Press the switch forward again. The seat still
moves forward slightly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when the
message on the Control Display disappears.
If the message continues to be displayed, repeat
the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a repeat
calibration, have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Automatic deactivation of
the front-seat passenger
airbags
Concept
The system reads if the front passenger seat is
occupied by measuring the human body's resist‐
ance.
Front, knee, and side airbag on the front pas‐
senger's side are activated or deactivated.
General information
Before transporting a child on the front passen‐
ger seat, refer to the safety information and in‐
structions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.
Seite 168
CONTROLS
Safety
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Safety information
Warning
To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag
function, the system must be able to detect
whether a person is sitting in the front passen‐
ger seat. The entire seat cushion area must be
used for this purpose. There is a risk of injuries
or danger to life. Make sure that the front pas‐
senger keeps his or her feet in the floor area.
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults, the
front-seat passenger airbags may be deactivated
in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indi‐
cator light for the front-seat passenger airbags
lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
and the indicator light goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To enable correct recognition of the occupied
seat cushion.
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat un‐
less they are specifically determined to be
safe for use on the front passenger seat.
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
front passenger seat if a child restraint sys‐
tem is to be installed on it.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
Indicator light for the front-seat
passenger airbags
The indicator light for the front-seat passenger
airbag in the roofliner indicates the operating
state of the front-seat passenger airbag.
The light indicates whether the airbags are either
activated or deactivated.
After drive-ready state is switched on, the light
briefly lights up and then indicates whether the
airbags are either activated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator light lights up
when a child is properly
seated in a child restraint sys‐
tem or when the seat is
empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are not
activated.
▷ The indicator light does not light up when, for
instance a correctly seated person of suffi‐
cient size is detected on the seat. The air‐
bags on the front passenger side are acti‐
vated.
Detected child restraint systems
The system generally detects children seated in
a child restraint system, particularly in child re‐
straint systems required by NHTSA at the point
in time when the vehicle was manufactured. Af‐
ter installing a child restraint system, make sure
that the indicator light for the front-seat passen‐
ger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child
restraint system has been detected and the
front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.
Rollover protection system
Concept
The rollover protection system is automatically
activated in the event of a sufficiently serious ac‐
cident or if the longitudinal axis is tilted exces‐
sively. The safety frames located behind the rear
head restraints extend within fractions of a sec‐
ond.
Supplementing the reinforced windshield frame,
the rollover protection system further increases
passenger safety.
Seite 169
Safety
CONTROLS
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
General information
Do not place any objects on the covers of the
rollover protection system.
Safety information
Warning
There can be damage or injuries when the roll‐
over protection system is triggered. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
rollover protection system is clear.
Warning
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,
malfunction or unintentional triggering of the
system. In the case of a malfunction, the sys‐
tem might not trigger as intended even if there
is an accident severe enough to warrant it.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Have
the system checked, repaired, dismantled and
scrapped by a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Warning
After triggering or damage, system functionality
is limited or not available anymore. There is a
risk of injuries or danger to life.
Have the system checked and replaced by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop in the event of
triggering of or damage to the system.
Warning
With an extended rollover protection system,
the area of movement of the convertible top is
limited. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
age to property. When the rollover protection
system is extended, do not move the
convertible top.
Overview
Covers of the rollover protection system.
Intelligent Safety
Concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the
driver assistance systems.
General information
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, Intel‐
ligent Safety consists of one or more systems
that can help prevent an imminent collision.
▷ Front collision mitigation, refer to page 172.
▷ Evasion assistance, refer to page 176.
▷ Intersection collision warning, refer to
page 178.
▷ Person warning with City braking function, re‐
fer to page 182.
▷ Night Vision with pedestrian and animal de‐
tection, refer to page 185.
▷ Lane departure warning, refer to page 189.
▷ Blind spot collision warning, refer to
page 192.
▷ Side collision mitigation, refer to page 196.
Seite 170
CONTROLS
Safety
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Warning
Due to system limits, individual functions can
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Switching on/off
Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems activate according to the
last setting.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched off
or currently unavailable.
Button does not light up: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched off.
Press the button:
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tem is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,
all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
ual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu
are activated.
Press the button repeatedly. The follow‐
ing settings are switched between:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
sub-functions, for instance setting for warning
time.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on according to the individual settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐
vidually switched off.
Seite 171
Safety
CONTROLS
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Press and hold this button:
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Front collision mitigation
Concept
The system may prevent some accidents. In the
event of an accident, the system may reduce im‐
pact speed.
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and activates brakes independ‐
ently, if needed.
General information
Depending on the equipment version, the sys‐
tem is controlled by the following sensors:
▷ Camera in the area of the interior mirror.
▷ Radar sensor in the front bumper.
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
possible risk of collision with vehicles at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warn‐
ings may vary with the current driving situation.
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle in‐
tentionally, the approach control warning and
braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐
tem reactions.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the Driver
Attention Camera in the instrument cluster cap‐
tures the driver’s field of vision. Additionally, the
system checks for visual impairments. Field of vi‐
sion and visibility also affect the timing of the
warnings.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Warning
Due to system limits, individual functions can
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Seite 172
CONTROLS
Safety
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
With radar sensor
The radar sensor is located in the lower area of
the front bumper.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
structed.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tem is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,
all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
ual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu
are activated.
Press the button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched be‐
tween:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on according to the individual settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐
vidually switched off.
Press and hold this button.
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched off
or currently unavailable.
Button does not light up: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched off.
Setting the warning time
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Safety and warnings"
5. "Front collision mitigation"
6. Select the desired setting:
Seite 173
Safety
CONTROLS
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ "Early"
▷ "Medium"
▷ "Late": only acute warnings are displayed.
The selected time is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Warning with braking function
Display
A warning symbol appears in the instrument
cluster and in the Head-up Display, where availa‐
ble, if a collision with a detected vehicle is immi‐
nent.
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning.
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
Prewarning
This warning is provided, for instance when there
is impending danger of a collision or the distance
to the vehicle ahead is too small.
If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking
as warranted.
Acute warning with braking function
An acute warning is displayed in case of the im‐
minent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another object at a high differential
speed.
Intervene in the case of an acute warning. De‐
pending on the driving situation, the acute warn‐
ing may be accompanied by a brief activation of
the braking system.
With the warning time setting "Late" the brief ac‐
tivation of the braking system is omitted.
If an acute warning is provided, the system may
also provide assistance, such as through braking,
when there is risk of collision.
Acute warnings may be provided even when
there has been no prior warning.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver to intervene. If a
warning is active, the maximum braking force is
used when the brake is applied. The brake pedal
must be applied sufficiently quickly and force‐
fully.
The system may also assist in braking if there is
a risk of collision.
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the
vehicle may come to a complete stop.
City brake function: the braking intervention oc‐
curs to up to approx. 50 mph/80 km/h.
With radar sensor: the braking intervention oc‐
curs to up to approx. 155 mph/250 km/h.
At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h, the
braking intervention occurs as a brief braking
pressure. No automatic delay occurs.
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle
stability has not been restricted, for instance by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
The driver may interrupt the braking intervention
function by stepping on the accelerator pedal or
by actively moving the steering wheel.
The system’s ability to detect objects may be
limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the
limitations of the system and actively intervene
as warranted.
Seite 174
CONTROLS
Safety
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
System limits
Safety information
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Only objects that are detected by the system are
taken into account.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
The following situations may not be detected, for
instance:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you,
or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Upper speed limit
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
temporarily. When the vehicle slows down to be‐
low this speed, the system is reactivated.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐
ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
terior mirror.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
porarily switched off due to excessively high
temperatures.
▷ Depending on the equipment: if the radar
sensors are dirty or covered.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in
the beam area of the radar sensors will also im‐
pact the function of the radar sensors and may
even cause them to fail.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are, for
example the warning time, the more warnings are
displayed. Therefore, there may also be an ex‐
cess of premature or unjustified warnings and re‐
actions.
Seite 175
Safety
CONTROLS
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Evasion assistance
Concept
The system supports the driver in making eva‐
sive maneuvers in certain situations, such as
when obstacles or persons suddenly appear.
General information
The system issues a warning and intervenes to
support the driver if a lateral evasive maneuver is
possible. Sensors monitor and detect the clear‐
ance around the vehicle. If the system identifies
space alongside the vehicle, it supports an eva‐
sive maneuver begun by the driver by safely pro‐
viding targeted steering support.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Overview
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the bumpers.
Front center bumper.
Front side bumper.
Rear bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar
sensors clean and unobstructed.
Seite 176
CONTROLS
Safety
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
Functional requirements
▷ Pedestrian warning with braking function, re‐
fer to page 182, is switched on.
▷ Front collision mitigation, refer to page 172, is
switched on.
▷ Sensors detect sufficient clearance around
the vehicle.
Switching on/off
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Warning with evasion support
Display in the instrument cluster
A warning symbol appears in the instrument
cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision
with a detected vehicle is imminent.
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning for ob‐
stacles.
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning for pe‐
destrians.
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
Acute warning with evasion support
An acute warning is displayed when there is an
imminent danger of collision due to the vehicle
approaching another object at a high speed.
Intervene in the case of an acute warning. The
system is designed to provide assistance by tak‐
ing evasive action when there is a risk of collision.
Acute warnings may be provided even when
there has been no prior warning.
System limits
Safety information
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
Seite 177
Safety
CONTROLS
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Only objects that are detected by the system are
taken into account.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
The following situations may not be detected, for
example:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you,
or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐
ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
terior mirror.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
porarily switched off due to excessively high
temperatures.
▷ Depending on the equipment: if the radar
sensors are dirty or covered.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
Intersection collision
warning
Concept
The system may prevent some accidents with
cross traffic at intersections and junctions. In the
event of an accident, the system may reduce im‐
pact speed.
The system sounds a warning in the city speed
range before an imminent collision and activates
brakes independently, if needed.
General information
The system is controlled by the following sen‐
sors:
▷ Camera in the area of the interior mirror.
▷ Radar sensors on the side in the front
bumper.
▷ Radar sensor in the center in the front
bumper
At intersections and junctions, a warning is is‐
sued when a danger of collision with crossing
traffic is detected.
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
possible risk of collision with vehicles at speeds
above approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. The timing of
warnings may vary with the current driving situa‐
tion.
The Driver Attention Camera in the instrument
cluster captures the driver’s field of vision. Addi‐
tionally, the system checks for visual impair‐
ments. Field of vision and visibility also affect the
timing of the warnings.
Seite 178
CONTROLS
Safety
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Detection range
Vehicles that cross your direction of travel can be
detected by the system as soon as these vehi‐
cles enter into the detection range of the system.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Warning
Due to system limits, individual functions can
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the front
bumper.
Front side bumper.
Seite 179
Safety
CONTROLS
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Front center bumper.
Keep the radar sensors clean and unobstructed.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tem is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,
all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
ual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu
are activated.
Press the button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched be‐
tween:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on according to the individual settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐
vidually switched off.
Press and hold this button.
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched off
or currently unavailable.
Button does not light up: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched off.
Setting the warning time
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Safety and warnings"
5. "Front collision mitigation"
6. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Early"
▷ "Medium"
▷ "Late": only acute warnings are displayed.
The selected time is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Warning with braking function
Display
A warning symbol appears in the instrument
cluster and in the Head-up Display, where availa‐
ble, if a collision with a detected vehicle is immi‐
nent.
Seite 180
CONTROLS
Safety
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Sym‐
bol
Measure
Danger of collision with vehicle
crossing from the right.
Danger of collision with vehicle
crossing from the left.
Danger of collision with vehicle for
which the direction of travel cannot
be determined.
Prewarning:
Symbol lights up red: prewarning for
vehicles that cross your direction of
travel.
Intervene yourself, for instance by
braking.
Acute warning:
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning when
vehicles cross your direction of
travel.
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
Prewarning
For example, a prewarning is displayed when a
danger of collision with a crossing vehicle is de‐
tected.
If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking
as warranted.
Acute warning with braking function
An acute warning is displayed in the event of an
immediate danger of collision with a crossing ve‐
hicle.
Intervene in the case of an acute warning. If an
acute warning is provided, the system may pro‐
vide assistance, such as through braking, when
there is risk of collision.
Acute warnings may be provided even when
there has been no prior warning.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
The system may also assist in braking if there is
a risk of collision.
The vehicle can be decelerated to a standstill.
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle
stability has not been restricted, for instance by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
The driver may interrupt the braking intervention
function by stepping on the accelerator pedal or
by actively moving the steering wheel.
The system’s ability to detect objects may be
limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the
limitations of the system and actively intervene
as warranted.
System limits
Safety information
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
Upper speed limit
The system responds to crossing vehicles when
your own speed is below approx.
50 mph/80 km/h.
Seite 181
Safety
CONTROLS
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
The following situations may not be detected, for
instance:
▷ Crossing vehicles when they are hidden by
buildings, for instance.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you,
or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Crossing bicycles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual side appearance.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐
ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
terior mirror.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
porarily switched off due to excessively high
temperatures.
▷ If the radar sensors are dirty or covered.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in
the beam area of the radar sensors will also im‐
pact the function of the radar sensors and may
even cause them to fail.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are, for
example the warning time, the more warnings are
displayed. Therefore, there may also be an ex‐
cess of premature or unjustified warnings and re‐
actions.
Person warning with City
braking function
Concept
The system may prevent some accidents involv‐
ing pedestrians and cyclists. In the event of an
accident, the system may reduce impact speed.
The system sounds a warning in the city speed
range before an imminent collision and activates
brakes independently, if needed.
General information
The system issues a warning of a possible risk of
collision with pedestrians and cyclists at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.
The system reacts to pedestrians and cyclists
who are within the detection range of the sys‐
tem.
Depending on the equipment version, the sys‐
tem is controlled by the following sensors:
▷ Camera in the area of the interior mirror.
▷ Radar sensor in the front bumper.
Seite 182
CONTROLS
Safety
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Detection range
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
ided into two areas:
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left
of the central area.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are located
within the central area. A warning is issued about
pedestrians who are located within the extended
area only if they are moving in the direction of the
central area.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Warning
Due to system limits, individual functions can
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
Seite 183
Safety
CONTROLS
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
With radar sensor
The radar sensor is located in the lower area of
the front bumper.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
structed.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tem is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,
all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
ual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu
are activated.
Press the button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched be‐
tween:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on according to the individual settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐
vidually switched off.
Press and hold this button.
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched off
or currently unavailable.
Button does not light up: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched off.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a pedestrian or a cyclist is immi‐
nent, a warning symbol appears on the instru‐
ment cluster and in the Head-up Display.
The red symbol is displayed and a signal
sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an
evasive maneuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver to intervene. If a
warning is active, the maximum braking force is
used when the brake is applied. This requires the
brake pedal to be depressed sufficiently quickly
and forcefully.
If there is a risk of collision, the system may also
assist with braking.
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the
vehicle may come to a complete stop.
Seite 184
CONTROLS
Safety
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle
stability has not been restricted, for instance by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
The driver may interrupt the braking intervention
function by stepping on the accelerator pedal or
by actively moving the steering wheel.
The system’s ability to detect objects may be
limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the
limitations of the system and actively intervene
as warranted.
System limits
Safety information
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
Upper speed limit
The system responds to pedestrians and cyclists
when the speed of the vehicle is below approx.
50 mph/80 km/h.
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.
The following situations may not be detected, for
instance:
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such be‐
cause of the viewing angle or contour.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are de‐
activated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
terior mirror.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
porarily switched off due to excessively high
temperatures.
▷ Depending on the equipment: if the radar
sensors are dirty or covered.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.
Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in
the beam area of the radar sensors will also im‐
pact the function of the radar sensors and may
even cause them to fail.
Night Vision with
pedestrian and animal
detection
Concept
Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐
tion is a night vision system.
An infrared camera scans the area in front of the
vehicle and issues a warning if it detects pedes‐
Seite 185
Safety
CONTROLS
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
trians and animals on the street. The system de‐
tects warm objects that are similar in shape to
human beings or animals. If necessary, the ther‐
mal image can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
General information
Thermal image
The image shows the heat radiated by objects in
the field of view of the camera.
Warm objects have a light appearance and cold
objects a dark appearance.
The ability to detect an object depends on the
temperature difference between the object and
the background and on the level of heat radiation
emitted by the object. Objects that are similar in
temperature to the environment or that radiate
very little heat are difficult to detect.
For safety reasons, when driving at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambient
light, the image is only displayed when the low
beams are switched on.
A still image is displayed at regular intervals for a
fraction of a second.
Pedestrian and animal detection
Object detection and warning only functions in
darkness.
Objects whose form is similar to people with suf‐
ficient heat radiation are detected.
In addition, the system also detects animals
above a certain minimum size, for instance deer.
Display on the Control Display with thermal im‐
age activated:
▷ People detected by the system: in light yel‐
low.
▷ Animals detected by the system: in dark yel‐
low.
Range of object detection, with good ambient
conditions:
▷ Pedestrian detection: up to approx.
330 ft/100 m.
▷ Detection of large animals: up to approx.
490 ft/150 m.
▷ Detection of medium animals: up to approx.
230 ft/70 m.
Environmental influences can limit the availability
of object detection.
If the vehicle systems detect that the vehicle is
located in a residential area, the animal detection
is temporarily switched off.
Seite 186
CONTROLS
Safety
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Thermal image
Camera
The camera is automatically heated when the ex‐
ternal temperatures are low.
When the vehicle lighting is switched on, the
camera objective is cleaned at regular intervals
when the windshield washer system, refer to
page 135, is activated.
Switching on
Switching on automatically
When it is dark outside, the system is automati‐
cally active after every driving off.
Switching on the thermal image
The thermal image from the Night Vision camera
can be displayed on the Control Display in addi‐
tion to the warning function. This function has no
effect on object detection.
Press the button.
Seite 187
Safety
CONTROLS
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
The image from the camera is displayed on the
Control Display.
Adjusting the thermal image
Brightness and contrast can be adjusted, when
the thermal image is switched on.
Via iDrive:
1. Select brightness or contrast:
▷ "Brightness".
▷ "Contrast".
2. Set the desired value.
Warning function
Display
Symbol Meaning
Person warning.
Animal warning.
Symbol lights up red. Prewarning.
Symbol flashes red and a sig‐
nal sounds.
Acute warning.
The displayed symbol may vary and shows the
side of the road on which the person or animal
was detected.
Warning of people or animals in
danger
If a collision with a person or an animal detected
in this way is imminent, a warning symbol ap‐
pears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-
up Display.
Although both the shape and the heat radiation
are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled out.
Warning area in front of the vehicle
The warning area for the person warning con‐
sists of two parts:
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrows 2, to the right and left
of the central area.
With animal warnings, no distinction is made be‐
tween the central or expanded area.
The entire area moves along with the vehicle in
the direction of the steering angle and changes
with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed in‐
creases, the area becomes, for instance longer
and wider.
Prewarning
Prewarning for persons is displayed when a per‐
son is detected in the central area immediately in
front of the vehicle as well as on the left or right
side in the extended area.
Prewarning for animals is displayed when an ani‐
mal is detected in the front of the vehicle.
If a prewarning is issued, intervene by braking or
making an evasive maneuver.
Acute warning
Acute warning is displayed if a person or an ani‐
mal is detected in direct proximity in front of the
vehicle.
If an acute warning is issued, brake or make an
evasive maneuver immediately.
Seite 188
CONTROLS
Safety
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Display in the Head-up Display
The warning is displayed simultaneously in the
Head-up Display and on the instrument cluster.
System limits
Basic limits
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in tight
curves.
▷ If the camera is soiled or damaged.
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ At very high external temperatures.
Limits of pedestrian and animal
detection
In some situations, it may occur that pedestrians
are detected as animals or animals as pedes‐
trians.
Small animals are not detected by the object de‐
tection function, even if they are clearly visible in
the image.
Limited detection, for instance in the following
circumstances:
▷ People or animals who are fully or partially
covered, especially when their heads are cov‐
ered.
▷ People who are not in an upright position, for
instance lying down.
▷ Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g., re‐
cumbent bicycles).
▷ After physical damage to the system, for in‐
stance after an accident.
Lane departure warning
Concept
The lane departure warning alerts when the vehi‐
cle is about to run off the road or exit the lane.
General information
This camera-based system warns starting at a
minimum speed.
The minimum speed is country-specific and is
displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety
systems.
Warnings are issued by means of a steering
wheel vibration. The severity of the steering
wheel vibration can be adjusted.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
If in the speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a
lane marking is crossed, the system intervenes
with a brief active steering intervention in addi‐
tion to vibrating. The system thus helps keep the
vehicle in the lane.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing road
and traffic safety. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate. Do not jerk the steering wheel in re‐
sponse to a warning.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Functional requirements
The camera must detect the lane markings for
the lane departure warning to be active.
Seite 189
Safety
CONTROLS
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The lane departure warning activates automati‐
cally after departure if the function was switched
on at the end of the last trip.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tem is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,
all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
ual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu
are activated.
Press the button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched be‐
tween:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on according to the individual settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐
vidually switched off.
Press and hold this button.
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched off
or currently unavailable.
Button does not light up: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched off.
Setting the warning time
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Safety and warnings"
5. "Lane Departure Warning"
6. Select the desired setting:
Seite 190
CONTROLS
Safety
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ "Early"
▷ "Medium"
▷ "Reduced": some warnings are sup‐
pressed depending on the situation,
for instance during passing without a turn
signal or when purposely driving over lane
markings in curves.
▷ "Off": no warnings are issued.
The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐
file currently used.
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Feedback on the steering wheel"
5. "Vibration intensity"
6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems and stored for the driver profile currently
used.
Switching steering intervention
on/off
The steering intervention can be switched on
and off separately for blind spot collision warning
and lane departure warning.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Safety and warnings"
5. "Lane Departure Warning"
6. "Steering intervention"
The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐
file currently used.
Display in the instrument cluster
The symbol illuminates green: at lane
marking was detected on at least one
side of the vehicle and warnings can be
issued.
Warning function
If you leave the lane
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel vibrates in ac‐
cordance with the steering wheel vibration set‐
ting.
If the turn signal is switched on before a lane
change, a warning is not issued.
Steering intervention
If in the speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a
lane marking is crossed, the system intervenes
with a brief active steering intervention in addi‐
tion to vibrating. The steering intervention helps
keep the vehicle in the lane. The steering inter‐
vention can be noticed on the steering wheel
and can be manually overridden at any time. Dur‐
ing an active steering intervention, the display in
the instrument cluster will blink.
Warning signal
In the event of multiple active steering interven‐
tions by the system within 3 minutes without the
driver's intervention at the steering wheel, an
acoustic warning will sound. A short warning sig‐
nal will sound at the second steering interven‐
tion. Beginning with the third steering interven‐
tion, an continuous warning will sound.
In addition, a Check Control message is dis‐
played.
The warning signal and Check-Control message
are an encouragement to pay closer attention to
the lane.
Seite 191
Safety
CONTROLS
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
End of warning
The warning is canceled in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
▷ When braking hard.
▷ When using the turn signal.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
System limits
Safety information
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings
such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice,
dirt or water.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ When lane markings are covered by objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
of you.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
terior mirror.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
porarily switched off due to excessively high
temperatures.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
A Check Control message may be displayed
when the system is not fully functional.
Blind spot collision warning
Concept
Blind spot collision warning detects vehicles in
the blind spot or vehicles approaching from be‐
hind in the adjacent lane. A warning is issued in
various gradations in these situations.
General information
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind and next to the vehicle when
traveling faster than a minimum speed.
The minimum speed is shown in the menu for
the intelligent Safety systems.
The system indicates whether there are vehicles
in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from
behind in the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
The light in the exterior mirror lights up dimmed.
Seite 192
CONTROLS
Safety
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Before you change lanes after setting the turn
signal, the system issues a warning in the situa‐
tions described above.
The light in the exterior mirror flashes and the
steering wheel vibrates.
Vehicles with side collision mitigation: at speeds
of up to 130 mph/210 km/h, the system can in‐
tervene with a brief active steering intervention
and help guide the vehicle back into the lane.
The steering intervention occurs when a mini‐
mum speed is reached. This minimum speed is
displayed on the Control Display in the menu for
the steering intervention, refer to page 194.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the rear
bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar
sensors clean and unobstructed.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
Blind spot collision warning is automatically acti‐
vated after departure if the function was
switched on at the end of the last trip.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tem is displayed.
Seite 193
Safety
CONTROLS
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,
all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
ual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu
are activated.
Press the button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched be‐
tween:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on according to the individual settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐
vidually switched off.
Press and hold this button.
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched off
or currently unavailable.
Button does not light up: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched off.
Setting the warning time
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Safety and warnings"
5. "Blind spot collision warning"
6. Select the desired setting.
▷ "Early"
▷ "Medium"
▷ "Late"
▷ "Off": with this setting, no warning is out‐
put.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Feedback on the steering wheel"
5. "Vibration intensity"
6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems and stored for the driver profile currently
used.
Vehicles with side collision
mitigation: switching steering
intervention on/off
The steering intervention can be switched on
and off separately for blind spot collision warning
and lane departure warning.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Safety and warnings"
5. "Blind spot collision warning"
6. "Steering intervention"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Seite 194
CONTROLS
Safety
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Warning function
Light in the exterior mirror
Prewarning
The dimmed light in the exterior mirror indicates
when there are vehicles in the blind spot or ap‐
proaching from behind.
Acute warning
If the turn signal is switched on while a vehicle is
in the critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates
briefly and the light in the exterior mirror flashes
brightly.
The warning stops when the other vehicle has
left the critical area or after deactivation of the
turn signal.
Vehicles with side collision
mitigation
If there is no response to the vibration of the
steering wheel at speeds of up to
130 mph/210 km/h and the lane marking is
crossed, the system intervenes with a brief active
steering intervention. The steering intervention
helps return the vehicle into the lane. The steer‐
ing intervention can be noticed on the steering
wheel and can be manually overridden at any
time.
Flashing of the light
A flashing of the light during vehicle unlocking
serves as system self-test.
System limits
Safety information
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
Upper speed limit
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
temporarily.
If the vehicle speed falls below approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system once again re‐
sponds according to the setting.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered,
for instance by stickers.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in
the beam area of the radar sensors will also im‐
pact the function of the radar sensors and may
even cause them to fail.
For vehicles with side collision mitigation, the
steering intervention can be limited, for instance
in the following situation:
Seite 195
Safety
CONTROLS
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings
such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice,
dirt or water.
▷ When lane markings are not white.
▷ When lane markings are covered by objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
of you.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
terior mirror.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
porarily switched off due to excessively high
temperatures.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
A Check Control message is displayed when the
system is not fully functional.
Displaying warnings
Depending on the selected warning settings, for
instance warning time, more warnings can be
displayed. However, there may also be an excess
of premature warnings of critical situations.
Side collision mitigation
Concept
The system helps to avoid imminent side colli‐
sions.
General information
Four radar sensors in the bumpers monitor the
space next to the vehicle from a minimum speed
of up to approx. 130 mph/210 km/h.
The minimum speed is country-specific and is
displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety
systems.
The front camera determines the lane marking
positions.
If, for instance another vehicle is detected next to
the vehicle and if there is a risk of collision with
this vehicle, the system helps avoid the collision.
For this purpose, the system issues a warning
with a flashing LED in the exterior mirror and a vi‐
brating steering wheel. If necessary, the system
will carry out an active steering intervention.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
Seite 196
CONTROLS
Safety
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Functional requirements
The camera must detect the lane markings for
the side collision mitigation with steering inter‐
vention to be active.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the bumpers.
Front bumper.
Rear bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar
sensors clean and unobstructed.
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The side collision mitigation activates automati‐
cally after departure if the function was switched
on at the end of the last trip.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tem is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,
all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
Seite 197
Safety
CONTROLS
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
ual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu
are activated.
Press the button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched be‐
tween:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on according to the individual settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐
vidually switched off.
Press and hold this button.
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched off
or currently unavailable.
Button does not light up: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched off.
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Feedback on the steering wheel"
5. "Vibration intensity"
6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems and stored for the driver profile currently
used.
Warning function
Light in the exterior mirror
Acute warning
If there is a risk of collision, the light in the exte‐
rior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vi‐
brates. A Check Control message is displayed at
the same time.
If necessary, an active steering intervention then
takes place to prevent collisions and maintain the
vehicle within its own lane.
The steering intervention can be noticed on the
steering wheel and can be manually overridden
at any time.
System limits
Safety information
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
Seite 198
CONTROLS
Safety
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered,
for instance by stickers.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings
such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice,
dirt or water.
▷ When lane markings are covered by objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
of you.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
terior mirror.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
porarily switched off due to excessively high
temperatures.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in
the beam area of the radar sensors will also im‐
pact the function of the radar sensors and may
even cause them to fail.
A Check Control message is displayed when the
system is not fully functional.
Emergency Stop Assistant
Concept
If the driver is no longer fit to drive, the system
helps to safely bring the vehicle to a standstill.
General information
The emergency stop function is not triggered
automatically. The emergency stop function can
only be triggered manually by the occupants.
When the system is activated, the vehicle is
brought to a standstill in its own lane by use of
lane guidance.
Depending on the equipment version and na‐
tional market version, the system includes a lane
change function.
With lane change function: On motorways or mo‐
torway-like roads, the system steers the vehicle
to the side of the road or shoulder where possi‐
ble. On other roads or under high traffic condi‐
tions, the vehicle is brought to a standstill on the
actual road.
Overview
Parking brake
Functional requirements
▷ The function can be activated at speeds of
approx. 6 mph/10 km/h up to approx.
155 mph/250 km/h.
Seite 199
Safety
CONTROLS
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ Lane changes are executed at speeds of ap‐
prox. 43 mph/70 km/h up to approx.
62 mph/100 km/h.
Activating the emergency stop
function
Pull the switch for the parking brake briefly
to activate the emergency stop function.
▷ With lane change function: Releasing the
switch may trigger an automatic lane change.
▷ The system will take control of the vehicle for
a maximum of 2 minutes.
▷ The hazard warning system is switched on.
▷ An Emergency Request is triggered.
Canceling the emergency stop
function
The driver can cancel the emergency stop func‐
tion by actively taking control of the vehicle
throughout the entire process.
For instance, the emergency stop function will
be canceled in the following situations:
▷ When steering.
▷ When using the turn signal.
▷ During acceleration.
▷ When switching off the hazard warning sys‐
tem.
▷ When canceling the Emergency Request.
▷ When switching the selector lever position at
standstill.
▷ When the driver's foot remains on the accel‐
erator pedal after the function has been trig‐
gered.
▷ When the switch of the parking brake is
pressed.
At standstill
As soon as the vehicle is stationary, the system
will carry out the following settings:
▷ Selector lever position P is engaged.
▷ Parking brake is set.
▷ Interior lights are switched on.
▷ Central locking system is unlocked.
Displays in the instrument
cluster
Symbol Status
Emergency Stop function active.
System limits
Use the system only in the event of a driver fail‐
ure.
The system cannot replace the driving perform‐
ance of a driver who is fit to drive.
PostCrash – iBrake
Concept
In the event of an accident, the system can bring
the vehicle to a halt automatically without inter‐
vention by the driver in certain situations. This
can reduce the risk of a further collision and the
consequences thereof.
At standstill
After coming to a halt, the brake is released auto‐
matically.
Harder vehicle braking
In certain situations, it can be necessary to bring
the vehicle to a halt more quickly than the Brake
Assistant allows.
To do this, quickly apply extra force to the brake.
For a brief period, the braking pressure will be
higher than the braking pressure that is achieved
by the automatic braking function. Automatic
braking is interrupted.
Seite 200
CONTROLS
Safety
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Interrupting automatic braking
It can be necessary to interrupt automatic brak‐
ing in certain situations, for instance for an eva‐
sive maneuver.
Interrupt automatic braking:
▷ By pressing the brake pedal.
▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal.
Fatigue alert
General information
The system can detect decreasing alertness or
fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous
trips, for instance on highways. In this situation, it
is recommended that the driver takes a break.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing one's
physical state. An increasing lack of alertness or
fatigue may not be detected or not be detected
in time. There is a risk of accident. Make sure
that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions.
Function
The system is switched on each time drive-ready
state is switched on.
After travel has begun, the system monitors cer‐
tain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that de‐
creasing alertness or fatigue can be detected.
This procedure takes the following criteria into
account:
▷ Personal driving style, for instance steering
behavior.
▷ Driving conditions, for instance time, length of
trip.
▷ Depending on the equipment: attention of
the driver through the Driver Attention Cam‐
era.
Starting at approx. 43 mph/70 km/h, the system
is active and can also display a recommendation
to take a break.
Break recommendation
Adjusting
The fatigue alert is active automatically with each
switching on of drive-ready state and can thus
display a break recommendation.
The break recommendation can also be
switched on or off and adjusted via iDrive.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Fatigue and Focus Alert"
5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Standard": the break recommendation is
made with a defined value.
▷ "Sensitive": the break recommendation is
issued earlier.
▷ "Off": no break recommendation is made.
Display
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a
message is displayed in the Control Display with
the recommendation to take a break.
During the display, various settings can be se‐
lected.
After a break, another recommendation to take a
break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
mately 45 minutes.
System limits
The function may be limited in the following sit‐
uations and may issue an incorrect warning or no
warning at all:
Seite 201
Safety
CONTROLS
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
▷ In active driving situations, such as when
changing lanes frequently.
▷ When the road surface is poor.
▷ In the event of strong side winds.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of a
break during longer trips on highways.
Seite 202
CONTROLS
Safety
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Anti-lock Braking System
ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak‐
ing.
The vehicle maintains its steering power even
during full brake applications, thus increasing ac‐
tive safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically boosts the vehicle braking capabil‐
ity to the furthest possible extent. It reduces the
braking distance to a minimum during an emer‐
gency stop. This system utilizes all of the capa‐
bilities provided by the Antilock Brake System
ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the emergency stop.
Adaptive brake assistant
In combination with Active Cruise Control, this
system ensures that the brakes respond even
more rapidly when braking in critical situations.
Drive-off assistant
Concept
This system supports driving off on uphill grades.
Driving off
1.
Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off without
delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle loading, the vehicle
may roll back slightly.
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
Concept
Within the physical limits, the system helps to
keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing
engine speed and by braking the individual
wheels.
General information
DSC detects the following unstable driving con‐
ditions, for instance:
▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which
can lead to understeering.
Seite 203
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
Warning
When driving with a roof load, for instance with
roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's cen‐
ter of gravity is higher, which increases the risk
of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situa‐
tions. There may be a risk of accident or risk of
damage to property. Do not deactivate DSC
Dynamic Stability Control when driving with
roof load.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
DSC OFF
Deactivating/activating DSC
General information
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐
duced during acceleration and when driving in
curves.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Hold the button down until DSC OFF is
displayed in the instrument cluster and
the DSC OFF indicator light is illuminated.
Activating DSC
Press the button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
light go out.
Display
In the instrument cluster
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator light lights up: DSC is de‐
activated.
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls
the drive and braking forces.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has
malfunctioned.
Seite 204
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control
Concept
DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stability
Control where forward momentum is optimized.
The system ensures maximum headway on spe‐
cial road conditions or loose road surfaces, for in‐
stance unplowed snowy roads, but with some‐
what limited driving stability.
General information
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐
mum traction. Driving stability is limited during
acceleration and when driving in curves.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC in
the following situations:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow-
covered roads.
▷ When driving off from deep snow or loose
ground.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
DSC OFF
Activating/deactivating DTC
Activating DTC
Press the button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF
lights up.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator
light go out.
Display
Display in the instrument cluster
If DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator light lights up: DTC is acti‐
vated.
Automatic program change
In certain situations, the DSC is activated auto‐
matically:
▷ If Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go func‐
tion ACC is activated.
▷ On a braking intervention by the Intelligent
Safety systems.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
xDrive
Concept
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of the vehi‐
cle. The interaction of xDrive and other suspen‐
sion control systems, such as DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control, further optimizes traction and
Seite 205
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
driving dynamics. xDrive variably distributes the
driving forces to the front and rear axles as de‐
manded by the driving situation and road surface.
The Driving Dynamics Control is used to change
the all-wheel distribution from traction oriented
to sport oriented.
Because of the needs-based use of the all-
wheel-drive system, Efficient4x4 yields a reduc‐
tion in consumption.
M sport differential
The active M differential provides for continu‐
ously variable locking of the rear axle differential
depending on the driving situation. This prevents
spinning of a single rear wheel and thereby pro‐
vides optimal traction in any driving situation.
The driver is responsible adapting his or her driv‐
ing style to the situation.
Integral Active Steering
Concept
The Integral Active Steering increases the ma‐
neuverability and makes a more direct steering
response possible.
General information
Integral Active Steering is a combination of varia‐
ble steering ratio and rear axle steering.
The variable steering ratio amplifies the steering
angle when maneuvering, thus making the steer‐
ing more direct. The rear axle steering acts to in‐
crease maneuverability at low speeds by turning
the rear wheels slightly in the opposite direction
to the front wheels.
At higher speeds, the rear wheels are turned in
the same direction as the front wheels. This re‐
sults in, for instance better directional stability
and a more harmonious change of direction.
In critical driving situations, the Integral Active
Steering can stabilize the vehicle through pur‐
poseful steering of the rear wheels before the
driver intervenes, for instance in case of over‐
steering.
Tuning
The system offers several different tunings.
Driving mode Integral Active Steering
COMFORT
ECO PRO
comfortable, for optimal
travel comfort
SPORT dynamic, for greater agility
The different tunings are assigned to the differ‐
ent driving modes of the Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol, refer to page 128.
Using snow chains
In order to guarantee free running of the wheels
when operating with snow chains, rear axle
steering of the integral active steering must be
switched off when snow chains are mounted.
Set operation with snow chains, refer to
page 308.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, the steering wheel
must be turned further, while the vehicle re‐
sponds more sensitively to steering wheel move‐
ments in the higher speed range.
The stability-enhancing intervention may be de‐
activated.
Proceed cautiously and drive defensively.
Have the system checked by a dealer's service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Seite 206
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Driver assistance systems
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Manual Speed Limiter
Concept
The system can be used to set a speed limit, for
instance to prevent the vehicle from exceeding
speed limits.
General information
The system can limit the speed, starting at a
value of 20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle can be
driven at any speed below the set speed limit.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
System on/off, refer to page 207.
Store current speed.
Speed Limit Assist, refer to
page 219: take over suggested
speed manually.
Rocker switch:
Changing the speed limit, refer to
page 208.
Operation
Switching on
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The current speed is accepted as the speed
limit.
If the system is switched on while the vehicle is
stationary or driving at low speeds,
20 mph/30 km/h is set as the speed limit.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the re‐
spective speed.
When the speed limit is switched on, DSC Dy‐
namic Stability Control and COMFORT driving
mode may be switched on as well.
Switching off
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The system switches off automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations, for example:
▷ When the engine is switched off.
Seite 207
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ When cruise control is switched on.
▷ When certain programs are activated via the
Driving Dynamics Control.
The displays go out.
Interrupting
If the reverse gear is engaged or idle, the system
is interrupted.
Changing the speed limit
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed limit is set.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
resistance point, the speed limit increases or
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
If the set speed limit is reached or unintentionally
exceeded, such as when driving downhill, the ve‐
hicle is not actively braked.
If the speed limit is set during a trip to a value be‐
low the current speed, the vehicle coasts until it
drops to the set speed limit.
The current speed can also be stored by press‐
ing a button:
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Exceeding the speed limit
If the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed limit,
a warning is issued.
The speed limit can be exceeded intentionally.
There is no warning in this case.
Press the accelerator pedal all the way down to
intentionally exceed the set speed limit.
When the vehicle speed drops below the set
speed limit, the limit is automatically reactivated.
Warning when the speed limit is
exceeded
Visual warning
If the speed limit is exceeded: the indica‐
tor light in the instrument cluster flashes
while the vehicle speed is greater than
the set speed limit.
Acoustic warning
▷ If the speed limit is exceeded unintentionally,
a signal sounds.
▷ If the speed limit is reduced to below the ve‐
hicle speed while driving, the signal sounds
after some time.
▷ If the speed limit is intentionally exceeded by
stepping on the accelerator pedal all the way
down, there is no signal.
Displays in the instrument
cluster
Display in the speedometer
▷ Green marking: system is ac‐
tive.
▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐
rupted.
▷ No marking: system is
switched off.
Indicator light
▷ The indicator light lights up: the sys‐
tem is switched on.
Seite 208
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ The indicator light flashes: the set speed limit
has been exceeded.
▷ Gray indicator light: the system has been in‐
terrupted.
Cruise control
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed. The
system accelerates and brakes automatically as
needed.
General information
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise
control settings may change under certain condi‐
tions. For instance, acceleration can change de‐
pending on the driving mode.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
Warning
The use of the system can lead to an increased
risk of accidents in the following situations,
for instance:
▷ On winding roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet
conditions, or on a loose road surface.
There may be a risk of accident or risk of dam‐
age to property. Only use the system if driving
at constant speed is possible.
Warning
The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci‐
dent. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Cruise control on/off, refer to
page 209.
Continue cruise control with the last
setting, refer to page 211.
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 210.
Store current speed.
Speed Limit Assist, refer to
page 219: take over suggested
speed manually.
Rocker switch:
Set speed, refer to page 210.
Switching cruise control on/off
Switching on
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light
up and the mark in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
Cruise control is active. The current speed is
maintained and stored as desired speed.
Seite 209
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
Switching off
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is
deleted.
Pausing cruise control
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations, for example:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ When selector lever position D is disengaged.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
▷ When SPORT PLUS is activated with Driving
Dynamics Control.
Setting the speed
Maintaining and storing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down once while
the system is interrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
The stored speed is displayed, refer to
page 211, on the speedometer.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐
ton.
Press the button.
Changing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road
is clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
resistance point, the desired speed increases
or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set de‐
pends on the vehicle.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance
point and holding it accelerates or deceler‐
ates the vehicle without requiring pressure on
the accelerator pedal.
After the rocker switch is released, the vehi‐
cle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Seite 210
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Continuing cruise control
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐
tional braking or accelerating may occur.
Press the button with the system inter‐
rupted.
Cruise control is continued with the stored val‐
ues.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is
deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
Displays in the instrument
cluster
Display in the speedometer
▷ Green marking: system is ac‐
tive, the marking indicates the
desired speed.
▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐
rupted, the marking indicates
the stored speed.
▷ No marking: system is switched off.
Indicator light
▷ Indicator light green: system is active.
▷ Gray indicator light: the system has
been interrupted.
▷ No indicator light: system is switched off.
Displays in the Head-up Display
Some system information can also be displayed
in the Head-up Display.
The symbol is displayed when the set
desired speed is reached.
System limits
The desired speed is also maintained downhill.
The speed may not be maintained on uphill
grades if the engine power is insufficient.
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may ex‐
ceed or drop below the set desired speed in
some situations, for instance on downhill or uphill
grades.
Active Cruise Control with
Stop & Go function ACC
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed and a dis‐
tance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using
the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed on
clear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle acceler‐
ates or brakes automatically.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system
adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the set
distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained. The
speed is adjusted as far as the given situation al‐
lows.
General information
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper and
a camera on the interior mirror to detect vehicles
driving ahead of you.
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise
control settings may change under certain condi‐
tions. For instance, acceleration can change de‐
pending on the driving mode.
The distance can be adjusted in several steps.
For safety reasons, it depends on the respective
speed.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and
then proceeds to drive again within a brief period,
the system is able to detect this within the given
system limits.
Seite 211
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
Warning
The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci‐
dent. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.
Warning
Risk of accident due to too high speed differen‐
ces to other vehicles, for instance in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving
vehicle.
▷ Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane.
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
With steering and traffic jam assistant:
Cruise control on/off, refer to
page 213.
With steering and traffic jam assistant:
Select function.
or
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐
tant:
Cruise control on/off, refer to
page 213.
Store current speed.
Speed Limit Assist, refer to
page 219: take over suggested
speed manually.
With steering and traffic jam assistant:
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 214.
Continue cruise control with the last
setting, refer to page 215.
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐
tant:
Continue cruise control with the last
setting, refer to page 215.
Seite 212
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Button Function
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐
tant:
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 214.
Increase the distance, refer to
page 215.
Switch distance control on/off.
Reduce distance, refer to page 215.
Switch distance control on/off.
Rocker switch:
Set speed, refer to page 215.
Radar sensor
The radar sensor is located in the front bumper.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
structed.
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
Area of application
The system is best used on well-constructed
roads.
The minimum speed that can be set is
20 mph/30 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set is
115 mph/180 km/h.
The system can also be activated when station‐
ary.
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
With steering and traffic jam
assistant: Assisted Driving
General information
This button is used to switch the config‐
ured function on and off.
The button can be used to set the pri‐
marily used function.
Set function
1. When the system is active, press the
button repeatedly until the desired function is
selected in the function bar. The function bar
for Assisted Driving is displayed at the bot‐
tom of the instrument cluster.
▷ Cruise control with distance con‐
trol.
▷ Cruise control with distance con‐
trol and steering and traffic jam assistant.
The selected function is shown in green.
Seite 213
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Switching on
With steering and traffic jam assistant:
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2.
If necessary, set the cruise control.
Without steering and traffic jam assistant:
Depending on the equipment, press the
relevant button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light
up and the mark in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
Cruise control is active. The current speed is
maintained and stored as desired speed.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
Switching off
To switch off the system while standing, step on
brake pedal at the same time.
Press the following button on the steering wheel
again:
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐
tant. Depending on the equipment,
press the relevant button.
With steering and traffic jam assistant.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is
deleted.
Interrupting manually
When active, press the following button on the
steering wheel:
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐
tant.
With steering and traffic jam assistant.
If interrupting the system while stationary, press
on the brake pedal at the same time.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ When selector lever position D is disengaged.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled and the driver's
door is opened while the vehicle is standing
still.
▷ If the system has not detected objects for an
extended period, for instance on a road with
very little traffic without curb or shoulder
markings.
▷ If the detection range of the radar is impaired,
for instance by dirt or heavy fog.
▷ After a longer stationary period when the ve‐
hicle has been braked to a stop by the sys‐
tem.
Seite 214
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Setting the speed
Maintaining and storing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down once while
the system is interrupted. The system will be ac‐
tivated.
The current speed is maintained and stored as
desired speed.
The stored speed is displayed on the speedom‐
eter.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐
ton.
Press the button.
Changing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road
is clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
resistance point, the desired speed increases
or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
action.
Adjusting the distance
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system
limits, braking can be late. There may be a risk
of accident or risk of damage to property. Be
aware to the traffic situation at all times. Adjust
the distance to the traffic and weather condi‐
tions and maintain the prescribed safety dis‐
tance, possibly by braking.
Reduce distance
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected distance,
refer to page 216.
Increase the distance
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected distance,
refer to page 216.
Continuing cruise control
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
Seite 215
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐
tional braking or accelerating may occur.
Press the following button on the steering wheel
with the system interrupted:
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐
tant.
With steering and traffic jam assistant.
Cruise control is continued with the stored val‐
ues.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is
deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
Changing between cruise control
with/without distance control
Safety information
Warning
The system does not react to traffic driving
ahead of you, but instead maintains the stored
speed. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Adjust the desired
speed to the traffic conditions and brake as
needed.
Switch mode of the cruise control
Switching cruise control without distance control
off and on:
▷
Press and hold this button.
▷
Press and hold this button.
Without steering and traffic jam assistant: switch
on distance control:
▷
Press the button.
▷
Press the button.
With steering and traffic jam assistant: switch on
distance control:
Press the button.
After switching, a Check Control message is dis‐
played.
Displays in the instrument
cluster
Display in the speedometer
▷ Green marking: system is ac‐
tive, the marking indicates the
desired speed.
▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐
rupted, the marking indicates
the stored speed.
▷ No marking: system is switched off.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
Selected distance to the vehicle ahead of you is
shown.
Symbol Description
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
Seite 216
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Symbol Description
Distance 4
This value is set automatically
after the system is switched on.
System interrupted.
No distance control display, as
the accelerator pedal is being
pressed.
Detected vehicle
Symbol Description
Green symbol:
A vehicle has been detected
ahead of you.
The system maintains the set distance to the ve‐
hicle in front.
As soon as the detected vehicle drives off, the
vehicle symbol in the distance indicator will move
away.
To accelerate, activate ACC, for instance by
briefly stepping on the accelerator pedal or
pressing the rocker switch.
Indicator/warning lights
Symbol Description
Indicator light green: system is
active.
No indicator light: system is
switched off.
Vehicle symbol flashes:
The conditions are not adequate
for the system to work.
The system was deactivated but
applies the brakes until you ac‐
tively resume control by press‐
ing on the brake pedal or accel‐
erator pedal.
The vehicle symbol and dis‐
tance bars flash red and an
acoustic signal sounds:
Brake and make an evasive ma‐
neuver, if necessary.
Displays in the Head-up Display
Desired speed
Some system information can also be displayed
in the Head-up Display.
The symbol is displayed when the set
desired speed is reached.
Distance information
The symbol is displayed when the dis‐
tance from the vehicle traveling ahead is
too short.
The distance information is active in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ Active Cruise Control switched off.
▷ Display in the Head-up Display selected, refer
to page 155.
▷ Distance too short.
Seite 217
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ Speed greater than approx. 40 mph/70 km/h.
System limits
Detection range
The detection capacity of the system and the
automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be
detected.
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate in the following
situations:
▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving road
users.
▷ For red traffic lights.
▷ For cross traffic.
▷ For oncoming traffic.
Swerving vehicles
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected
until it is completely within the same lane as your
vehicle.
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
tance. It may not be possible to restore the se‐
lected distance in certain situations, including if
you are driving significantly faster than vehicles
driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly
approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving
ahead of you is reliably detected, the system re‐
quests that the driver intervene by braking and
carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.
Cornering
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐
not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive
into a curve at an appropriate speed.
The system has a limited detection range. Situa‐
tions can arise in tight curves where a vehicle
driving ahead will not be detected or will be de‐
tected very late.
When you approach a curve the system may
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the
bend of the curve. If the system decelerates you
may compensate it by briefly accelerating. After
Seite 218
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
releasing the accelerator pedal the system is re‐
activated and controls speed independently.
Driving off
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
automatically; for example:
▷ On steep uphill grades.
▷ In front of bumps in the road.
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under unfav‐
orable weather or light conditions:
▷ Poorer vehicle recognition.
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are
already recognized.
Examples of unfavorable weather or light condi‐
tions:
▷ Wet conditions.
▷ Snowfall.
▷ Slush.
▷ Fog.
▷ Glare.
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐
stance by braking, steering or evading.
Engine power
The desired speed is also maintained downhill.
The speed may not be maintained on uphill
grades if the engine power is insufficient.
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may ex‐
ceed or drop below the set desired speed in
some situations, for instance on downhill or uphill
grades.
Malfunction
Radar sensor
The system cannot be activated if the radar sen‐
sor is not aligned correctly. This may be caused
by damage incurred, for instance during parking.
A Check Control message is displayed if the sys‐
tem fails.
Have the system checked by a dealer's service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
The system may be impaired when the detection
range of the radar sensor is partially covered
such as by the license plate holder.
Camera
The function for detecting and responding when
approaching stationary vehicles may be limited in
the following situations:
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
▷ If the camera is malfunctioning or dirty. A
Check Control message is displayed.
Speed Limit Assist
Concept
When the systems in the vehicle, e.g., Speed
Limit Info, detect a change of the speed limit
along the route, this new speed value can be ap‐
plied for the following systems:
▷ Manual Speed Limiter.
▷ Cruise control.
▷ Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function.
The speed value is suggested as the new de‐
sired speed to be applied. To apply the speed
value, the corresponding system must be acti‐
vated.
Seite 219
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
Warning
The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci‐
dent. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Apply suggested speed manually.
Rocker switch:
Set speed, refer to Cruise Control.
Switching on/off and adjusting
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Driving"
5. "Speed Limit Assistant"
6. "Info on speed limits"
Select the desired setting:
▷ "Adjust manually": detected speed limit
can be applied manually.
▷ "Show anticipation": detected speed lim‐
its are displayed in the instrument cluster
without being applied.
▷ "Off": Speed Limit Assist will be switched
off.
Displays in the instrument
cluster
A message is indicated in the instrument cluster
when the system and cruise control are acti‐
vated.
Symbol Function
Indicator light illuminates green, to‐
gether with the symbol for a cruise
control system:
Speed Limit Assist is active and
detected speed limits can be ap‐
plied manually for the displayed
system.
Detected change of a speed limit
with immediate effect.
Indicator light illuminates green:
the detected speed limit can be
applied with the SET button.
As soon as the speed limit has
been applied, a green checkmark
is displayed.
Apply detected speed limit
manually
A detected speed limit can be applied to cruise
control manually.
As soon as the SET icon lights up,
press the button.
System limits
Speed Limit Assist is based on the Speed Limit
Info system.
Seite 220
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Consider the system limits of Speed Limit Info,
refer to page 152.
Upcoming speed limits can only be applied for
the Active Cruise Control.
The system may not respond to top speed limi‐
tations when the navigation system is unable to
clearly identify the position of the vehicle.
Steering and traffic jam
assistant
Concept
The system assists the driver in keeping the ve‐
hicle within the lane. For this purpose, the sys‐
tem executes supporting steering movements,
for instance when driving in a curve.
General information
The system determines the position of the lane
markings and the vehicle driving ahead using five
radar sensors and a camera.
Depending on the speed, the system orients it‐
self according to the lane markings or vehicles in
front.
Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether
the steering wheel is being touched.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Steering and traffic jam assistant on/
off, refer to page 222.
Switch function on, refer to
page 222.
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the bumpers.
Front center bumper.
Front side bumper.
Seite 221
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Rear bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar
sensors clean and unobstructed.
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
Functional requirements
▷ Speed below 130 mph/210 km/h.
▷ Sufficient lane width.
▷ Above approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane mark‐
ing is detected.
▷ Below approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane marking
or a vehicle driving ahead is detected.
▷ Hands on the steering wheel rim.
▷ Wide curves.
▷ Drive in the center of the lane.
▷ Turn signal switched off.
▷ The sensor system calibration process is
complete.
▷ Cruise control with distance control is active.
▷ Safety belt on the driver's side fastened.
Additionally, the following systems must be ac‐
tive:
▷ Approach control warning.
▷ Person warning.
▷ Side collision mitigation.
Switching on/off
Assisted Driving
General information
This button is used to switch the config‐
ured function on and off.
The button can be used to set the pri‐
marily used function.
Set function
1. When the system is active, press the
button repeatedly until the desired function is
selected in the function bar. The function bar
for Assisted Driving is displayed at the bot‐
tom of the instrument cluster.
▷ Cruise control with distance con‐
trol.
▷ Cruise control with distance con‐
trol and steering and traffic jam assistant.
The selected function is shown in green.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Switching on
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2.
Adjust the steering and traffic jam
assistant if necessary.
Seite 222
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Steering wheel symbol lights up gray.
The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering.
System activates automatically as soon as all
function conditions are fulfilled, refer to
page 222.
Steering wheel symbol lights up green.
The system is active.
With the system switched on, the person warn‐
ing with City braking function and the side colli‐
sion mitigation are active.
Switching off
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The indicator goes out.
The system does not perform supportive steer‐
ing wheel movements.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations, for example:
▷ At a speed above 130 mph/210 km/h.
▷ When the steering wheel is released.
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ When you manipulate steering.
▷ When you leave your own lane.
▷ When the turn signal is switched on.
▷ When the lane is too narrow.
▷ If for a particular time no lane marking is de‐
tected and there is no vehicle driving in front.
▷ If Active Cruise Control is interrupted.
▷ If the safety belt on the driver's side is unfas‐
tened.
Steering wheel symbol lights up gray.
The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering.
System activates automatically as soon as all
function conditions are fulfilled, refer to
page 222.
Displays in the instrument
cluster
Symbol Description
Gray steering wheel symbol:
The system is on standby.
Green steering wheel symbol:
The system is activated.
Yellow flashing steering wheel
symbol:
Lane marking driven over.
The steering wheel vibrates
where applicable.
Yellow steering wheel symbol
and a signal sounds, if applica‐
ble:
System interruption is imminent.
Steering wheel symbol flashes
red, signal sounds:
System is switching off.
Green steering wheel symbol
and lane marking symbol:
The system supports the driver
in keeping the vehicle within the
lane.
Seite 223
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Symbol Description
Yellow steering wheel symbol:
The hands are not grasping the
steering wheel. The system is
still active.
Red steering wheel symbol and
a signal sounds:
The hands are not grasping the
steering wheel. System interrup‐
tion is imminent.
The system reduces the speed
to a standstill if applicable.
It is possible that the system will
not execute any supporting
steering movements.
Indicator
light
Description
Cruise control with distance
control and steering and traffic
jam assistant:
Indicator light green: system is
active.
No indicator light: system is
switched off.
Displays on the steering wheel
The two LED lights above the buttons illuminate
analogously to the displays in the instrument
cluster:
▷ Yellow: system interruption is imminent.
▷ Red: system will be deactivated.
The steering wheel displays can be switched
on/off if required.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Feedback on the steering wheel"
5. "Light elements"
6. Make the desired setting.
Displays in the Head-up Display
All system information can also be displayed in
the Head-up Display.
Lane change assistant
Concept
The system additionally supports the driver when
changing lanes on multilane roads.
Functional requirements
▷ The functional requirements of the steering
and traffic jam assistant are fulfilled, refer to
page 222.
▷ Depending on country specifications: driving
on a road without pedestrians or cyclists and
with physical barriers to oncoming traffic,
such as crash barriers.
▷ Lane markings have been detected.
▷ Maximum speed approx. 110 mph, 180 km/h.
▷ The minimum speed is country-specific.
Switching the function on/off
The lane change assistant can be switched on/
off.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
Seite 224
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Driving"
5. "Steering Assistant"
6. "Automatic Lane Change"
Changing lanes
1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits
changing lanes.
2. Press the turn indicator lever, refer to
page 133, in the required direction to the
pressure point for signaling briefly and hold it
there.
Steering support in the required direction can
be detected a short time later.
After the lane change, the system helps keep the
vehicle in the new lane.
Canceling a lane change
If the turn signal lever is released too soon, the
system helps the driver keep to the original lane.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Symbol Description
Green steering wheel symbol.
Gray line for lane marking on the
appropriate side.
Green arrow symbol for lane-
changing.
The system carries out a lane
change.
Green steering wheel symbol.
Gray line for lane marking on the
appropriate side.
No arrow symbol for lane-
changing on the display.
The system detected the lane
change request. Lane change
not currently possible.
Depending on country specifica‐
tions:
Green steering wheel symbol.
Gray line for lane marking on the
appropriate side.
Gray arrow symbol for lane-
changing.
Lane change not possible; func‐
tional requirements not met.
Assisted Driving Plus
Concept
Assisted Driving Plus supports the driver with ve‐
hicle control in traffic jam situations.
Steering support takes place without the driver
actively steering.
Seite 225
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
traffic situation closely, be ready to take over
steering and braking at any time, and actively
intervene where appropriate.
State laws differ and the use of this function may
violate the law. Before use, check your state and
local laws.
Functional requirements
▷ The functional requirements of the steering
and traffic jam assistant are fulfilled, refer to
page 222.
▷ The steering and traffic jam assistant is ac‐
tive.
▷ The function is only available on certain street
types, e.g. freeways.
▷ Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy‐
clists.
▷ Sufficient lane width.
▷ Lane markings and a vehicle driving ahead
are detected.
▷ Speed less than approx. 40 mph/60 km/h.
▷ The Driver Attention Camera in the instru‐
ment cluster detects that the driver is paying
attention to the traffic.
Switching on
As soon as all functional requirements
are met, Assisted Driving Plus will be dis‐
played as an additional symbol in the
function bar. The toolbar is displayed at the bot‐
tom of the instrument cluster.
Select Assistant Driving Plus with the
button on the steering wheel.
The symbol for Assisted Driving Plus is shown in
green.
Two green LED lights, refer to page 226, are il‐
luminated on the steering wheel.
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is
shown in green.
The system begins to assist the driver with vehi‐
cle control.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Indicator
light
Description
Indicator light green: system is
active.
Displays on the steering wheel
The two LED lights above the buttons illuminate
analogously to the displays in the instrument
cluster:
▷ Green: the system is active.
▷ Red: system will be deactivated.
System limits
General information
The system cannot be activated or meaningfully
used in certain situations.
Seite 226
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Safety information
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
Hands on the steering wheel
The sensors cannot detect hand-steering wheel
contact in the following situations:
▷ Driving with gloves.
▷ Protective covers on the steering wheel.
Narrow lanes
When driving within narrow lanes, the system
cannot be activated or effectively used, for in‐
stance in the following situations:
▷ In construction areas.
▷ In rescue lanes.
▷ Within city limits.
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under unfav‐
orable weather or light conditions:
▷ Poorer recognition of vehicles and lane mark‐
ings.
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are
already recognized.
Examples of unfavorable weather or light condi‐
tions:
▷ Wet conditions.
▷ Snowfall.
▷ Slush.
▷ Fog.
▷ Glare.
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐
stance by braking, steering or evading.
Driver Attention Camera
Always monitor the traffic conditions.
The Driver Attention Camera detects whether or
not the driver is paying attention to the traffic
conditions.
The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully
functional in the following situations:
▷ When the Driver Attention Camera is covered
by the steering wheel rim.
▷ When the driver is wearing infrared imperme‐
able sunglasses.
PDC Park Distance Control
Concept
PDC is a support when parking. Objects that you
are approaching slowly in front of or behind the
vehicle are indicated by signal tones and a dis‐
play on the Control Display.
Depending on the equipment version: obstacles
at the side of the vehicle that are detected by the
side ultrasonic sensors may also be reported by
the side protection, refer to page 230, function.
General information
The ultrasound sensors for distance measure‐
ments are located in the bumpers and possibly
on the sides of the vehicle.
The range, depending on obstacles and environ‐
mental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im‐
pending collision at a distance to the object of
approx. 27 in/70 cm.
For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic
warning is already issued at a distance to the ob‐
ject of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
Seite 227
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
Warning
Due to high speeds when PDC Park Distance
Control is activated, the warning can be de‐
layed due to physical circumstances. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid
driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control
is not yet active.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Ultrasound sensors
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC,
for instance in the bumpers.
Functional requirements
Ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐
ers, bicycle racks.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system switches on automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged when
the engine is running.
▷ Depending on the equipment version: while
approaching detected obstacles if the speed
is slower than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h. The
activation distance depends on the situation
in question.
You may switch automatic activation when ob‐
stacles are detected on and off.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"
5. Where applicable: "Automatic PDC
activation"
6. "Automatic PDC activation"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Depending on equipment, an additional camera
view is also switched on.
Seite 228
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Automatic deactivation during
forward travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Switching on/off manually
Press the park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the re‐
verse gear is engaged when pressing the park
assistance button.
Warning
Signal tones
General information
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle
is approaching an object. For instance, if an ob‐
ject is detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a
signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
If there are objects in front of and behind the ve‐
hicle at the same time, with a distance smaller
than approx. 10 in/25 cm, an alternating constant
tone will sound.
The intermittent tone and constant tone are
switched off if the selector lever position P is en‐
gaged.
The intermittent tone is switched off after a short
time when the vehicle is stationary.
Volume
The PDC signal tone volume can be adjusted.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"
5. "Volume PDC signal"
6. Set the desired value.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object is
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are already displayed on the Control
Display before a signal sounds.
The display appears as soon as PDC is activated.
The range of the sensors is represented in the
colors green, yellow and red when obstacles are
detected.
Pathway lines are faded in for better estimation
of the required space.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, the switch can be made to PDC or to a
different view with obstacle markings as needed:
1.
Press the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. For instance "Park. sensors only"
Cross traffic warning, refer to page 248: de‐
pending on the equipment, it is warned in the
PDC display against vehicles approaching in the
front or rear from the side.
Seite 229
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Depending on the equipment
version: emergency brake
function, Active PDC
Concept
The emergency braking function of PDC initiates
an emergency braking in case of acute risk of
collision.
General information
This function may not be available. Contact your
authorized dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center as to whether this addi‐
tional function is currently in your vehicle or when
it can be installed in your vehicle in the future.
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre‐
vented under all circumstances.
The function is available below walking speed
when driving in reverse or rolling backward.
A press of the accelerator pedal interrupts the
braking intervention.
After emergency braking to a stop, further creep‐
ing toward an obstacle is possible. To creep to‐
ward the obstacle, lightly press the accelerator
pedal and release it again.
If the accelerator pedal is heavily depressed, the
vehicle drives off as usual. Manual braking is pos‐
sible at any time.
The system uses the ultrasound sensors of PDC
and parking assistant.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.
Activating/deactivating the system
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"
5. If necessary, "Active PDC with braking
interv."
6. "Active PDC with braking interv."
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Depending on the equipment
version: side protection
Concept
The system warns of obstacles on the side of
the vehicle.
General information
This function may not be available. Contact your
authorized dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center as to whether this addi‐
tional function is currently in your vehicle or when
it can be installed in your vehicle in the future.
The system uses the ultrasound sensors of PDC
and parking assistant.
Display
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
markings are displayed on the sides of the vehi‐
cle.
Seite 230
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ Color markings: warning against detected ob‐
stacles.
▷ Gray markings, hatched area: no obstacles
were detected.
▷ No markings, black area: the area next to the
vehicle was not yet captured.
Limits of side protection
The system only displays stationary obstacles
that were previously detected by sensors while
passing them.
The system does not detect whether an obstacle
moves later on. If the vehicle is stationary, the
markings are shown in black after a certain time.
The area next to the vehicle must be newly cap‐
tured.
System limits
Safety information
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
the following situations:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance
coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultrasound,
for instance from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged
or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high
relative humidity, wet conditions, snowfall,
cold, extreme heat, or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges.
▷ With objects with corners, edges, and
smooth surfaces.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ With small and low objects, for instance
boxes.
▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of
the lane.
▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in
foam material.
▷ With plants and bushes.
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds.
▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of
the vehicle is not taken into account by the
system.
False warnings
The system may issue a warning under the fol‐
lowing conditions even though there is no obsta‐
cle within the detection range:
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered with
ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.
Seite 231
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, for instance in underground ga‐
rages.
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for instance
sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cleaners or neon lights.
To prevent false alarms, switch off automatic
PDC activation on obstacle detection, refer to
page 228, for instance in automatic vehicle
washes.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
White symbol is displayed, and the range
of the sensors is dimmed on the Control
Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a
dealer's service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
Without Surround View:
rearview camera
Concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Dis‐
play.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.
Overview
Depending on the vehicle
equipment: button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Camera
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
trunk lid.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If
necessary, clean the camera lens.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is switched on automatically if selec‐
tor lever position R is engaged when the engine
is running.
Automatic deactivation during
forward travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Seite 232
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Depending on the vehicle
equipment: switching on/off
manually
Press the park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The parking assistance functions are shown on
the Control Display.
Switching the view via iDrive
If the rearview camera view is not displayed,
change the view via iDrive:
1.
If necessary, tilt the controller to the side.
2. "Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Functional requirements
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The trunk lid is fully closed.
▷ Keep the recording range of the camera
clear. Protruding cargo or carrier systems that
are not connected to a trailer power socket
can restrict the visibility range of the camera.
Assistance functions
General information
More than one assistance function can be active
at the same time.
The assistance functions can be manually acti‐
vated.
1.
Move the Controller to the right, if needed.
2. With corresponding equipment:
"Camera image"
3.
▷ "Parking aid lines".
Pathway lines and turning radius lines are
displayed, refer to page 233.
▷ "Obstacle mark.".
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
obstacles detected by PDC Park Distance
Control are displayed, refer to page 234,
by markings.
Parking aid lines
Pathway lines
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space re‐
quired when parking and maneuvering on level
roads.
Pathway lines depend on the steering angle and
are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel
movements.
Turning radius lines
Turning radius lines can only be superimposed
on the camera image together with pathway
lines.
Turning radius lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after the
steering wheel is turned past a certain angle.
Seite 233
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Parking using pathway and turning radius
lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning ra‐
dius line leads to within the limits of the park‐
ing space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the green pathway line covers the corre‐
sponding turning radius line.
Obstacle marking
Depending on the vehicle equipment, obstacles
behind the vehicle are detected by the PDC Park
Distance Control sensors.
Obstacle markings can be faded into the image
of the rearview camera.
The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings
match the markings of the PDC Park Distance
Control.
Setting brightness and contrast
via iDrive
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Move the Controller to the right, if needed.
2. "Camera image"
3.
▷ "Brightness"
▷ "Contrast"
4. Set the desired value.
System limits
Deactivated camera
If the camera is deactivated, for instance if the
trunk lid is open, the camera image is displayed
hatched in gray.
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, some as‐
sistance functions also consider data from the
PDC Park Distance Control.
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate
the distance from the objects on the display.
Surround View with
Parking Assistant Plus
Concept
The system provides assistance in parking and
maneuvering. The area around the vehicle is
shown on the Control Display.
General information
Several cameras capture the area from different
selectable perspectives. In addition, assistance
functions, for instance guidelines, can be faded
into the display.
The following camera perspectives can be dis‐
played:
▷ Automatic camera perspective, refer to
page 236: the system shows the camera
perspective suitable for the respective driving
situation.
▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 236: for rep‐
resenting the areas behind the vehicle.
Seite 234
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ Right-hand and left-hand side view, refer to
page 238: for representing the areas on the
sides of the vehicle.
▷ Camera perspective movable via iDrive. avail‐
able camera, refer to page 236.
▷ Panorama View, refer to page 239: to
present cross traffic, for instance at junctions
and driveways, depending on the currently
engaged gear.
Depending on the view, the environment around
the vehicle or a part of it is depicted.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Panorama View
Cameras
Front camera
Rearview camera
One camera is located at the bottom of each ex‐
terior mirror housing.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt on the
camera lenses. If required, clean the camera
lenses.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is switched on automatically, refer to
page 228, if selector lever position R is engaged
when the engine is running.
Seite 235
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
The camera perspective suitable for the respec‐
tive driving situation is displayed.
Switching on/off manually
Press the park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The rearview camera cannot be switched off if
the reverse gear is engaged.
Automatic deactivation during
forward travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Camera perspective
Overview
1 Function bar, left
2 Camera image
3 Side view
4 Automatic camera perspective
5 Movable unobstructed camera perspective
6 Function bar, right
7 Rearview camera
8 Selection window
Selection window
The individual camera perspectives can be se‐
lected in the selection window via iDrive.
Side view
The side view can be selected for the right or left
vehicle side.
This view helps when positioning the vehicle at
the curb or with other obstacles on the side by
displaying the side surroundings.
The side view looks from rear to front and in case
of danger, focuses automatically on possible ob‐
stacles.
Automatic camera perspective
The automatic camera perspective shows a
steering-dependent view in the respective driv‐
ing direction.
This perspective adapts to the respective driving
situation.
As soon as obstacles are detected, the view
changes to a fixed display of the area in front or
at the rear behind the bumper or, if necessary,
changes to a side view.
When reverse gear is engaged, the automatic
camera perspective is closed and the system
uses a fixed perspective of the rearview camera.
If necessary, manually select the automatic cam‐
era perspective when reverse gear is engaged.
The automatic camera perspective will be re‐
tained for the current parking maneuver.
Movable unobstructed camera
perspective
With selection of the movable camera perspec‐
tive, a circle appears on the Control Display.
By turning the Controller or via touch function,
specified perspectives on the circle can be se‐
lected.
The current perspective is marked with a camera
symbol.
To leave the function, move the Controller side‐
ways and select another camera function.
Rearview camera
This view shows the picture of the rearview cam‐
era.
Seite 236
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Function bars
Function bar on the right
Assistance functions, refer to page 237, can be
activated via the right function bar and settings
can be entered. Move the Controller to the right,
if needed.
▷ "Autom. Parking", refer to page 241.
▷ "Back-up Assistant", refer to page 246.
▷ "Camera image"
▷ "Brightness", refer to page 240.
▷ "Contrast", refer to page 240.
▷ "Parking aid lines", refer to page 237.
▷ "Obstacle mark.", refer to page 238.
▷ "Settings": apply settings, for instance to
use the activation points for Panorama View.
Function bar on the left
The left function bar can be used for the direct
selection of various views. Move the Controller to
the left, if needed.
▷ "Car wash", refer to page 238.
▷ "Parking": around the vehicle.
▷ "3D view": available camera, refer to
page 236.
Assistance functions
General information
More than one assistance function can be active
at the same time.
The following assistance functions can be man‐
ually activated:
▷ "Parking aid lines".
▷ "Obstacle mark.".
▷ "Car wash".
The following assistance functions are automati‐
cally displayed:
▷ Side protection, refer to page 238.
▷ Door opening angle, refer to page 238.
Parking aid lines
Pathway lines
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space re‐
quired when parking and maneuvering on level
roads.
Pathway lines depend on the steering angle and
are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel
movements.
Turning radius lines
Turning radius lines can only be superimposed
on the camera image together with pathway
lines.
Turning radius lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after the
steering wheel is turned past a certain angle.
Parking using pathway and turning radius
lines
1.
Position the vehicle so that the red turning ra‐
dius line leads to within the limits of the park‐
ing space.
Seite 237
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the green pathway line covers the corre‐
sponding turning radius line.
Obstacle marking
Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by the
PDC Park Distance Control sensors.
Obstacle markings can be shown in the camera
image.
The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings
match the markings of the PDC Park Distance
Control.
Vehicle wash view
The vehicle wash view assists when entering a
vehicle wash by displaying the floor and the vehi‐
cle's own track.
Side protection
Concept
The system warns of obstacles on the side of
the vehicle.
Display
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
markings are displayed on the sides of the vehi‐
cle.
▷ No markings: no obstacles were detected.
▷ Color markings: warning against detected ob‐
stacles.
Limits of side protection
The system only displays stationary obstacles
that were previously detected by sensors while
passing them.
The system does not detect whether an obstacle
moves later on. For this reason, at standstill, the
markings are not shown anymore in the display
after a certain time. The area next to the vehicle
must be newly captured.
Door opening angle
Concept
If obstacle marking is activated, the system indi‐
cates fixed obstacles that obstruct the opening
angles of the doors.
The system does not provide a warning of ap‐
proaching traffic.
Seite 238
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
The maximum opening angle of the doors is dis‐
played in selector lever position P.
As soon as the vehicle begins moving, the open‐
ing angles are replaced by parking aid lines.
Limits of the display
The vehicle surroundings are displayed with dis‐
torted image for technical reasons.
Even if the symbols for the door opening angles
do not cross other objects on the Control Dis‐
play, the following needs to be noted when park‐
ing next to other objects:
Because of the perspective, higher, protruding
objects may be closer than they appear on the
Control Display.
Panorama View
Concept
The system provides an early look at cross traffic
at blind driveways and intersections.
General information
Road users concealed by obstacles to the left
and right of the vehicle can only be detected rel‐
atively late from the driver's seat. The cameras in
the front and rear capture the sideways traffic
area to improve the view.
Yellow lines in the screen display mark the front
and rear end of the vehicle.
The camera image shows different levels of dis‐
tortion in some areas and is thus not suitable for
distance estimations.
Display on the Control Display
Press the button when the engine is run‐
ning.
Depending on the driving direction, the image of
the respective camera is displayed:
▷ "front": front camera image.
▷ "rear": rear camera image.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, cross traf‐
fic warning, refer to page 248, can additionally
warn against oncoming vehicles using radar sen‐
sors.
With navigation system: activation
points
Concept
Positions where Panorama View should switch
on automatically can be stored as activation
points provided that a GPS signal is received.
General information
Up to ten activation points can be stored.
Activation points can be used when driving for‐
ward for the front camera.
Storing activation points
1.
Drive to the position at which the system is to
be switched on, and stop.
2.
Press the button.
3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. "Add activation point"
Seite 239
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
239
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
The current position is displayed.
5. "Activation point"
Activation points are, if possible, stored with
town/city and street address, or else with the
GPS coordinates.
Using activation points
The use of activation points can be switched on
and off.
1.
Press the button.
2. Move the Controller to the right.
3. "Settings"
4. "Panorama View, GPS-based"
5. "Panorama View is displayed automatically
when set activation points are reached."
Displaying activation points
1. Press the button.
2. Move the Controller to the right.
3. "Manage points"
A list of all activation points is displayed.
Renaming or deleting activation points
1. Press the button.
2. Move the Controller to the right.
3. "Manage points"
A list of all activation points is displayed.
4. Select an activation point as needed.
5.
▷ "Rename"
▷ "Delete activation point"
▷ "Delete all activation points"
Setting brightness and contrast
Brightness and contrast can be adjusted with
Surround View or Panorama View switched on.
Via iDrive:
1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.
2. "Camera image"
3.
▷ "Brightness"
▷ "Contrast"
4. Set the desired value.
Functional limitations
The system can be used only to a limited extent
in the following situations:
▷ In poor light.
▷ In case of soiled cameras.
▷ With a door open.
▷ With the trunk lid open.
▷ With exterior mirrors folded in.
Gray hatched areas with symbol, for instance
open door, in the camera image mark areas that
are currently not displayed.
System limits
Non-visible areas
Because of the camera angle, the areas under
the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras.
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
Some assistance functions also consider data
from the PDC Park Distance Control.
Follow, refer to page 227, the notes in the PDC
Park Distance Control chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate
the distance from the objects on the display.
Malfunction
A camera malfunction is displayed on the Control
Display.
Seite 240
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
A yellow symbol is displayed and the re‐
cording range of the malfunctioning cam‐
era is displayed in black on the Control
Display.
Remote 3D View
Concept
With the proper equipment, the BMW Con‐
nected App and the camera images from Sur‐
round View can be used to display the vehicle
surroundings on a mobile device such as a
smartphone.
The function displays a momentary view of the
situation.
Functional requirements
▷ Data transmission must be activated, refer to
page 63.
▷ BMW Connected App must be installed on
the mobile device.
Switching the function on/off
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. "Configure services"
6. "BMW ConnectedDrive"
7. "Remote 3D View"
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
▷ In poor light.
▷ In case of soiled cameras.
▷ With a door or the trunk lid open. Dark fields
in the display indicate areas that are not re‐
corded by the system.
▷ With exterior mirrors folded in.
▷ When other camera functions are being per‐
formed in the vehicle.
▷ When the vehicle moves faster than walking
speed.
▷ It may not be possible to use the function in
every country.
▷ For reasons of data protection, the function
can only be used three times within two
hours.
Parking Assistant
Concept
The system supports the driver in the following
situations:
▷ When parking parallel to the road, parallel
parking.
▷ Depending on the equipment version: when
reverse parking diagonally to the road, diago‐
nal parking. The system orients itself with the
middle of the parking space during diagonal
parking.
▷ Depending on the equipment version: when
driving out of parallel parking spaces, refer to
page 245.
▷ Depending on the equipment version: when
exiting tight parking or street situations in re‐
verse, see Back-up assistant, refer to
page 246.
Seite 241
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
241
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
General information
The functions for parking diagonally to the road,
driving out of parallel parking spaces, and driving
out in reverse may not be available. Contact your
authorized dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center as to whether this addi‐
tional function is currently in your vehicle or when
it can be installed in your vehicle in the future.
Handling
Parking assistant handling is divided into three
steps:
▷ Switching on and activating.
▷ Parking space search.
▷ Parking.
System status and instructions on required ac‐
tions are displayed on the Control Display.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on
both sides of the vehicle.
Steptronic transmission
The parking assistant calculates the best possi‐
ble parking line and takes control of the following
functions during the parking procedure:
▷ Steering.
▷ Accelerating and braking.
▷ Changing the gears.
Parking is automatic.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
NOTICE
The parking assistant can steer the vehicle over
or onto curbs. There is a risk of damage to
property. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.
The safety information of the PDC Park Distance
Control, refer to page 227, applies in addition.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Ultrasound sensors
With the four side ultrasound sensors, arrows,
and the ultrasound sensors in the bumpers, the
parking spaces are measured and the distances
to obstacles determined.
Seite 242
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Functional requirements
Ultrasound sensors
Ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐
ers.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
For measuring parking spaces
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward approx.
22 mph/35 km/h.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehicles:
5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space
General information:
▷ Gap behind an object that has a min. length
of 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
Parallel parking to the road:
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects: your
vehicle's length plus approx. 2.6 ft/0.8 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Depending on the equipment version: diagonal
parking:
▷ Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle's
width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.
▷ Minimum depth: your vehicle's length.
The depth of diagonal parking spaces must
be estimated by the driver. Due to technical
limitations, the system is only able to approxi‐
mate the depth of diagonal parking spaces.
For parking
▷ Doors and trunk lid are closed.
▷ Driver's safety belt is fastened.
Switching on and activating
Switching on with the button
Press the park assistance button.
The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space search is
indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.
Switching on with reverse gear
Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space search is
indicated on the Control Display.
To activate: "Autom. Parking"
Switching on via iDrive
Display of the rearview camera or PDC view
must be active.
1.
Move the Controller to the right.
2. Activate the parking assistant on the Control
Display: "Autom. Parking"
Display on the Control Display
System activated/deactivated
Sym‐
bol
Meaning
Gray: the system is not available.
White: the system is available but not
activated.
The system is activated.
Parking space search is active.
The parking procedure is active.
Steering control has been taken over
by system.
Seite 243
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Parking space search and system
status
▷ Parking assistant is activated and parking
space search is active.
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking
spaces at the edge of the road next to the ve‐
hicle symbol. When Park Assistant is active,
suitable parking spaces are highlighted and
an acoustic signal sounds. Switch signal tone
on/off, refer to page 245.
▷ If a diagonal or parallel parking space is clearly
detected, the system automatically adjusts
the suitable parking method. In the case of
parking spaces suitable for parallel and diago‐
nal parking, a selection menu is displayed. In
this case, the desired parking method must
be selected manually.
▷ The parking procedure is active. Steering
control has been taken over by system.
▷ Parking space search is always active when‐
ever the vehicle is moving forward slow and
straight, even if the system is deactivated.
When the system is deactivated, the displays
on the Control Display are shown in gray.
Parking using the parking
assistant
Parking
1.
Switching on and activating the parking assis‐
tant.
Engage the reverse gear and activate the
system or press the parking assistance but‐
ton, refer to page 243, on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated.
2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed of
up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and at a dis‐
tance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.
The status of the parking space search and
possible parking spaces are displayed on the
Control Display, refer to page 244.
3. Confirm the suggested parking space for the
parking process: select the parking space on
the Control Display.
The system takes over the steering.
4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
At the end of the parking procedure, the P
selector lever position is set.
The end of the parking procedure is indicated
on the Control Display.
5. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
needed.
Interrupting manually
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
time:
▷ Press the park assistance button.
▷ "Autom. Parking" Select the symbol on
the Control Display.
Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the
following situations:
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or
takes over steering.
▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road
surfaces.
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to
overcome, such as curbs.
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly ap‐
pear.
▷ If the PDC Park Distance Control displays
clearances that are too small.
Seite 244
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts or
the time taken for parking is exceeded.
▷ When switching to another function on the
Control Display.
▷ If the trunk lid is open.
▷ If doors are open.
▷ When setting the parking brake.
▷ During acceleration.
▷ When the brake pedal remains pressed for an
extended period while the vehicle is station‐
ary.
▷ When unfastening the driver's safety belt.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Resuming
An interrupted parking procedure can be contin‐
ued, if needed.
Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to
page 243, and follow the instructions on the
Control Display.
Switching off
The system can be switched off manually:
Press the park assistance button.
Switching signal tone for
suitable parking spaces on/off
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"
5. "Automatic Parking"
6. "Alert if parking space detected"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Depending on the equipment
version: driving out of a parking
space using the parking
assistant
Concept
The system makes driving out of parallel parking
spaces easier.
General information
This function may not be available. Contact your
authorized dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center as to whether this addi‐
tional function is currently in your vehicle or when
it can be installed in your vehicle in the future.
Steptronic transmission
The parking assistant calculates an optimal line
for pulling out of a parking space and takes con‐
trol of the following functions during the maneu‐
ver:
▷ Steering.
▷ Accelerating and braking.
▷ Changing the gears.
The vehicle maneuvers automatically until the
vehicle reaches a position in which the driver can
drive out of the parking space without further
steering movements.
Functional requirement
▷ The vehicle has been parked using the park‐
ing assistant.
▷ An obstacle has been detected in front of the
vehicle.
▷ The parking space is at least 2.6 ft/0.8 m lon‐
ger than your vehicle.
Driving out of parking spaces
1.
Switch on drive-ready state.
2. Steptronic transmission:
Seite 245
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
245
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Press the park assistance button or shift into
reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary to
switch on the parking assistant.
3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. Activate the parking assistant on the Control
Display: "Autom. Parking"
5. On the Control Display, confirm the required
direction for driving out of the parking space if
necessary.
6. Steptronic transmission:
The system takes control of the maneuver. A
message will be displayed at the end of the
maneuver.
7. Make sure that the traffic situation permits
driving out of the parking space and drive off
as usual.
The parking assistant is switched off auto‐
matically.
Depending on the equipment
version: back-up assistant
Concept
The system supports the driver when driving in
reverse, for instance when driving out of tight
parking or street situations.
The vehicle stores the driving movements of the
last route before the vehicle is switched off. This
stored route can be driven back with automated
steering.
General information
This function may not be available. Contact your
authorized dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center as to whether this addi‐
tional function is currently in your vehicle or when
it can be installed in your vehicle in the future.
The system takes control of the steering when
driving in reverse along the stored route.
The driver controls driving the vehicle via accel‐
erator pedal and brake.
Functional requirement
▷ Drive forward without interruption to store the
route.
▷ A maximum of 165 ft/50 m will be stored.
▷ To store the route, do not exceed a driving
speed of 22 mph/36 km/h.
▷ The return route must be at least
12 in./30 cm wider than your vehicle.
Driving back with automated
steering
1. Press the park assistance button or shift into
reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary
and the drive-ready state is switched on.
2. Move the Controller to the right.
3. "Back-up Assistant"
The system takes over the steering.
The possible route is shown on the Control
Display.
4. Take your hands off the steering wheel and
carefully drive off with the accelerator pedal
and the brake.
When driving in reverse, pay attention to the
vehicle's surroundings, and if you suddenly
encounter an obstacle, stop immediately and
take over control of the vehicle. Pay attention
to the information from the PDC.
5. Follow the instructions on the Control Display
where required.
6. Stop no later than when normal traffic is
reached and take control of the vehicle, such
as by shifting to a forward gear.
At the end of the stored route, a signal will
sound and a request will be displayed, also
with the instruction to take control of the ve‐
hicle.
Terminating the system
The system automatically cancels in situations
such as the following:
Seite 246
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
246
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or
takes over steering.
▷ When engaging a forward gear.
▷ After a few minutes when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.
▷ If the vehicle leaves the stored lane during re‐
versing; for example, at the maximum steer‐
ing angle.
Limits of the back-up assistant
▷ When you reach normal road traffic or if you
suddenly encounter an obstacle, stop imme‐
diately and take over control of the vehicle.
▷ The maximum speed for driving in reverse is
limited to approximately 6 mph/9 km/h.
If the maximum speed is exceeded, a warning
is issued and the function may be canceled.
System limits
Safety information
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
No parking assistance
The parking assistant does not offer assistance
in the following situations:
▷ In tight curves.
▷ For diagonal parking spaces.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
▷ On slippery ground.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.
▷ In case of changes to an already-measured
parking space.
▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge
of a port.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
the following situations:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance
coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultrasound,
for instance from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged
or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high
relative humidity, wet conditions, snowfall,
cold, extreme heat, or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges.
▷ With objects with corners, edges, and
smooth surfaces.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ With small and low objects, for instance
boxes.
▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of
the lane.
Seite 247
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
247
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in
foam material.
▷ With plants and bushes.
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds.
▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of
the vehicle is not taken into account by the
system.
Parking spaces that are not suitable may be de‐
tected or suitable parking spaces may not be de‐
tected at all.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked by a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Cross traffic warning
Concept
At blind driveways or when driving out of diago‐
nal parking spaces, approaching cross traffic is
detected sooner by the system than is possible
from the driver's seat.
General information
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind the vehicle.
The system indicates approaching traffic.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the traffic
area in front of the vehicle is monitored as well.
Two additional radar sensors are located in the
front bumpers.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the rear
bumper.
Seite 248
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
248
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Depending on the vehicle equipment, two addi‐
tional radar sensors are located in the front
bumpers.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar
sensors clean and unobstructed.
Switching on/off
Activating/deactivating the system
1. Press the park assistance button.
2. Move the Controller to the right.
3. "Settings"
4. "Cross traffic warning"
5. "Cross traffic warning"
Or via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"
5. "Cross traffic warning"
6. "Cross traffic warning"
Switching on automatically
If the system was activated on the Control Dis‐
play, it is automatically switched on as soon as
PDC Park Distance Control or Panorama View is
active and a gear is engaged.
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is
switched on.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the front
system is switched on when a forward gear is
engaged.
Switching off automatically
The system is automatically switched off in the
following situations:
▷ When the speed exceeds walking speed.
▷ When a certain driving distance is exceeded.
▷ With an active parking operation of the park‐
ing assistant.
Warning
General information
The respective display is called up on the Con‐
trol Display. A signal tone may sound and the
light in the exterior mirror may flash.
Light in the exterior mirror
The light in the exterior mirror flashes if vehicles
are detected by the rear sensors and your own
vehicle is moving backwards.
Seite 249
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
249
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Display in the PDC Park Distance
Control view
In the PDC Park Distance Control view, the re‐
spective boundary area flashes red, if vehicles
are detected by the sensors.
Display in the camera view
The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the
camera view flashes red, if vehicles are detected
by the sensors.
Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your
own vehicle.
Acoustic warning
In addition to the optical indicator, a warning sig‐
nal sounds if your own vehicle moves into the re‐
spective direction.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ If the speed of the approaching vehicle is very
high.
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered,
for instance by stickers.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ If crossing objects move at a very slow speed.
▷ If other objects are in the capture range of the
sensors, that hide cross traffic.
Seite 250
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
250
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Adaptive chassis
Concept
This system reduces undesirable vehicle motion
when using a dynamic driving style or traveling
on uneven road surfaces.
General information
This enhances the driving dynamics and driving
comfort depending on the road surface condition
and driving style.
Tuning
The system offers several different damping set‐
tings.
The damping settings are assigned to the differ‐
ent driving modes of the Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol, refer to page 128.
Driving mode Damper tuning
COMFORT
ECO PRO
Balanced out
SPORT
SPORT PLUS
Firm
Active roll stabilization
Concept
The system reduces the lateral tilt of the vehicle
that occurs during rapid driving in curves or dur‐
ing quick evasive maneuvers.
General information
The lateral tilt of the vehicle is balanced out by
permanent adjustment on the front and rear
axles. The vehicle is thus always stabilized.
Agility and driving comfort are increased under all
driving conditions.
Tuning
The system offers several different tunings.
The tunings are assigned to the different driving
modes of the Driving Dynamics Control, refer to
page 128.
Driving mode Tuning
COMFORT
ECO PRO
Comfortable
SPORT
SPORT PLUS
Firm
Adaptive M Chassis
Professional
Concept
The Adaptive M Suspension Professional is an
actively controlled sport chassis/suspension. The
system increases driving comfort and minimizes
the lateral tilt when driving around curves.
The Adaptive M Suspension Professional en‐
compasses the following systems:
Seite 251
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
251
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ Low-lying sport chassis.
▷ Adaptive chassis.
▷ Active roll stabilization.
▷ Integral Active Steering.
General information
For active control, this system uses the available
information, for instance from the navigation sys‐
tem or the Driving style analysis.
This information influences the control of the fol‐
lowing systems, especially in ADAPTIVE driving
mode:
▷ Adaptive chassis.
▷ Active roll stabilization.
▷ Integral Active Steering.
This further increases the agility and comfort of
the vehicle.
The function may be restricted if the navigation
data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐
ample.
Performance Control
Performance Control enhances the agility of the
vehicle.
To increase maneuverability, wheels are braked
individually when a sporty driving style is used.
The resulting braking power is simultaneously
largely compensated by an engine intervention.
Seite 252
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Climate control
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Interior air quality
The air quality in the vehicle is improved by the
following components:
▷ Emission tested passenger compartment.
▷ Microfilter.
▷ Air conditioning system to control the tem‐
perature, air flow and recirculated-air mode.
Depending on the equipment specification:
▷ Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.
▷ Automatic recirculated-air control AUC.
▷ Parked-car ventilation.
Automatic climate control
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Climate control functions
Button Function
Temperature, refer to page 254.
Climate control operation, refer
to page 255.
Maximum cooling, refer to
page 255.
AUTO program, refer to
page 255.
Recirculated-air mode, refer to
page 257.
Air flow, manual, refer to
page 257.
Air distribution, manual, refer to
page 257.
Defrost and defog the wind‐
shield, refer to page 258.
Rear window defroster, refer to
page 258.
Seite 253
Climate control
CONTROLS
253
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Button Function
Active seat ventilation, refer to
page 118.
Seat and armrest heating, refer
to page 116.
Opening the Climate menu, re‐
fer to page 254.
For the following settings, for in‐
stance: upper body temperature
adjustment, parked-car ventila‐
tion.
Opening the Climate menu
Press the button on the upper side.
The Climate menu is displayed.
For example, the following climate control func‐
tions can be accessed via the Climate menu:
▷ Heating/ventilation.
▷ Air quality.
▷ Seats/surfaces.
▷ Parked-car ventilation/heating
Individual settings can be entered for some of
the climate functions, e.g., switching on/off, in‐
tensity.
Switching on/off
Switching on
Press any button except for the following:
▷ Menu.
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Lower air flow button side.
▷ Seat heating.
▷ Seat ventilation.
Switching off
▷ Complete system:
Press and hold the button on the
driver's side until the control panel
switches off.
▷ On the front passenger side:
Press and hold the lower button on
the front passenger side.
Temperature
Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the set
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed, by
using the maximum cooling or heating capacity,
and then keeps it constant.
Adjusting
Press the upper or lower button side to
set the desired temperature.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Heating/ventilation"
5. "Driver" or "Front passenger"
6. "Temperature:"
7. Set the desired temperature.
8. "OK"
Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐
ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate
control will not have sufficient time to adjust the
set temperature.
Temperature of the ventilation
General information
The temperature of the ventilation in the upper
body region can be adjusted.
The temperature is individually adjusted, e.g.
colder toward blue, warmer toward red.
Seite 254
CONTROLS
Climate control
254
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
The air flow of the ventilation in the upper body
region heats or cools noticeably, depending on
the adjusted temperature.
This does not change the set interior tempera‐
ture for the driver and front passenger.
Adjusting
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Heating/ventilation"
5. "Driver" or "Front passenger"
6. "Temp. adjustment upper body"
7. Set the desired temperature:
▷ Toward blue: colder.
▷ Toward red: warmer.
Air conditioning
Concept
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and de‐
humidified and, depending on the temperature
setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the
drive-ready state switched on.
Switching on/off
Press the button on the lower side.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Heating/ventilation"
5. "A/C"
Air conditioning is switched on with the engine
running.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
side windows may fog up briefly when drive-
ready state is switched on.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water develops and collects under‐
neath the vehicle.
Maximum cooling
Concept
The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐
timum air flow and recirculated-air mode with the
drive-ready state switched on.
General information
The function is available with external tempera‐
tures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
drive-ready state switched on.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with the system
switched on.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
The air flow can be adjusted with the program
active.
AUTO program
Concept
The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats
the car's interior automatically.
The air flow, air distribution, and temperature are
controlled automatically depending on the vehi‐
cle's internal and external temperature, the de‐
sired temperature setting, and the selected in‐
tensity.
Seite 255
Climate control
CONTROLS
255
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO
program switched on.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Heating/ventilation"
5. "Driver" or "Front passenger"
6. "Automatic"
Depending on the selected temperature, the in‐
tensity of the AUTO program, and outside influ‐
ences, the air is directed to the windshield, side
windows, upper body, and into the floor area.
The air conditioning, refer to page 255, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
Point the side vents toward the side windows.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window con‐
densation as much as possible.
The AUTO program is switched off automati‐
cally, when manual air distribution is set.
Intensity
With the AUTO program switched on, the inten‐
sity can be adjusted. This changes the automatic
control for the air flow and air distribution.
Press the lower or upper side of the
button: decrease or increase intensity.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Heating/ventilation"
5. "Driver" or "Front passenger"
6. "Level"
7. Set the desired intensity.
The air flow and air distribution are controlled au‐
tomatically depending on the selected intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the climate
control display.
Convertible program
When the convertible top is open, the convertible
program is activated as well. In the convertible
program, the automatic climate control is opti‐
mized for driving with the convertible top open. In
addition, the air flow is increased as the vehicle
speed increases.
The efficiency of the convertible program can be
greatly enhanced by installing the wind deflector.
Automatic recirculated-air
control AUC
Concept
The automatic recirculated-air control AUC rec‐
ognizes odors or pollutants in the outside air.
The outside air supply is shut off and the interior
air is recirculated.
General information
If the system is activated, a sensor detects pollu‐
tants in the outside air and controls the shut-off
automatically.
If the system is deactivated, outside air continu‐
ously flows into the car's interior.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air qual‐
ity in the car's interior deteriorates and window
fogging increases.
Switching on/off
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
Seite 256
CONTROLS
Climate control
256
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
4. "Air quality"
5. "Automatic"
If there is window condensation, switch off recir‐
culated-air mode or defog the windows, refer to
page 258.
Recirculated-air mode
Concept
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants
in the immediate environment by temporarily
suspending the supply of outside air. The system
then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle.
Operation
Press the button:
The LED is illuminated when recircu‐
lated-air mode is switched on. The supply of out‐
side air is shut off.
When recirculated-air mode is switched off, fresh
air is directed into the vehicle's interior.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Air quality"
5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Fresh air"
▷ "Air recirculation"
▷ "Auto-recirculate"
To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air
mode switches off automatically after a certain
amount of time, depending on the environmental
conditions.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air qual‐
ity in the car's interior deteriorates and window
fogging increases.
If there is window condensation, switch off recir‐
culated-air mode or defog the windows, refer to
page 258.
Adjusting the air flow manually
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
General information
To adjust the air flow manually switch off AUTO
program first.
Operation
Press the lower or upper side of the
button: decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the climate
control display.
The air flow may be reduced automatically to
save battery power.
Adjusting the air distribution
manually
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐
justed manually.
Operation
Press the button repeatedly to select a
program:
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor area.
▷ Upper body region and floor area.
▷ Floor area.
▷ Windows and floor area.
▷ Windows.
▷ Windows and upper body.
▷ Upper body region.
The selected air distribution is shown on the cli‐
mate control display.
If there is window condensation, defog the win‐
dows, refer to page 258.
Seite 257
Climate control
CONTROLS
257
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
SYNC program
Concept
The following settings of the driver's side can be
transferred to the front-passenger side:
▷ Temperature.
▷ Air flow.
▷ Air distribution.
▷ AUTO program.
Switching on/off
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Synchronize"
The program is switched off automatically if the
settings on the front passenger side are
changed.
Defrosting windshield and
remove condensation
Concept
Ice and condensation are quickly removed from
the windshield and the front side windows.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with the system
switched on.
The air flow can be adjusted manually with the
system switched on.
If there is window condensation, press
the button on the driver's side or switch
on air conditioning to utilize the condensation
sensor. Make sure that air can flow to the wind‐
shield.
Rear window defroster
Press the button. The LED lights up.
The function is available with the engine
running.
The rear window defroster switches off automat‐
ically after a certain period of time.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal
filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the
incoming air.
The activated-charcoal filter also removes gas‐
eous pollutants from the outside air that enters
the vehicle.
Have this combined filter changed during vehicle
maintenance, refer to page 333.
Ventilation
Concept
The air flow directions can be individually ad‐
justed.
Adjusting the ventilation
General information
The air flow directions can be adjusted for direct
or indirect ventilation.
Open the vents and position them in a way that
ensures effective climate control.
Direct ventilation
The air flow is directed towards the passengers.
The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depending
on the adjusted temperature.
Indirect ventilation
The air flow is not directed towards the passen‐
gers. The car's interior is warmed or cooled indi‐
rectly, depending on the set temperature.
Seite 258
CONTROLS
Climate control
258
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Front ventilation
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
row 1.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing
of the vents, arrow 2.
Parked-car ventilation
Concept
The car's interior can be cooled or heated before
driving off with the parked-car ventilation. De‐
pending on set temperature and ambient tem‐
perature, the car's interior is ventilated or possi‐
bly heated using the residual engine heat.
General information
The system can be switched on and off directly
or via a preset departure time.
The activation time is determined based on the
external temperature. The system promptly
switches on before the selected departure time.
Functional requirements
▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state
and not in drive-ready state.
▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.
If parked-car ventilation is switched on, the
vehicle battery will be discharged. Thus, limit
the maximum activation time to save the ve‐
hicle battery. The system will be available
again after the engine is started or after a
short trip.
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
▷ Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Opening the Climate menu
Press the button on the upper side.
The Climate comfort menu is displayed.
Individual settings can be entered for some of
the climate control functions.
Switching on/off directly
General information
There are different ways to switch the system on
or off.
The system switches off automatically after a
certain period of time. The system continues to
run for some time after being switched off.
Using the button
When the vehicle is in standby state, the parked-
car ventilation can be switched on or off via the
automatic climate control buttons.
Press any button except:
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Lower air flow button side.
▷ Seat heating.
▷ Seat ventilation.
▷ Menu.
The system switches off after leaving and lock‐
ing the vehicle.
Via iDrive
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Pre-ventilation" or "Pre-heating/ventilation"
5. "Start now"
Seite 259
Climate control
CONTROLS
259
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Via BMW display key
Switching on
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
2. "Precondit. setting"
3. Tap the symbol or the symbol.
4. "Activate now"
5. "Start"
Switching off
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
2. "Precondit. setting"
3. Tap the symbol or the symbol.
4. "Stop"
Display
Symbol Description
Symbol on the climate con‐
trol display.
Flashing: the parked-car
ventilation is switched on.
Departure time
Concept
Different departure times can be set to ensure a
comfortable interior temperature in the vehicle at
the time of departure.
▷ One-time departure time: the time can be
set.
The system is switched on once.
▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day
of the week can be set.
On the desired weekdays, the system will be
switched on promptly before the set depar‐
ture time.
The departure time is preselected in two steps:
▷ Set departure times.
▷ Activate departure times.
Setting the departure time
Via iDrive
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Pre-ventilation" or "Pre-heating/ventilation"
5. "Departure schedule"
6. Select the desired departure time.
7. Set the departure time.
8. Select day of the week, if needed.
Via BMW display key
1.
Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
2. "Precondit. setting"
3. Tap the symbol or the symbol.
4. Select the desired departure time.
5. Set the departure time.
6. Select day of the week, if needed.
7. "OK"
Activating the departure time
Functional requirement
If a departure time is to influence the switching
on of parked-car ventilation, the respective de‐
parture time must be activated first.
Via iDrive
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Pre-ventilation" or "Pre-heating/ventilation"
5. "Preconditioning for departure"
6. "Departure schedule"
7. Activate the desired departure time.
Seite 260
CONTROLS
Climate control
260
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Via BMW display key
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
2. "Precondit. setting"
3. Tap the symbol or the symbol.
4. Tap on the symbol.
5. Activate the desired departure time.
Display
, Symbol on the climate control display
signals an activated departure time.
Stationary climate control
through Remote Engine
Start
Concept
Stationary climate control cools or heats the car's
interior prior to departure to a comfortable tem‐
perature. The system automatically cools, vents,
and heats depending on the interior, external,
and set temperature. Snow and ice may be re‐
moved more easily.
The system starts the engine automatically and
allows it to run for a limited period of time.
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐
sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pollute
the area in and around the vehicle or enter into
the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐
tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐
closed areas or areas with insufficient ventila‐
tion, exhaust gases can also accumulate
outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life.
Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suffi‐
cient ventilation. Do not switch on stationary cli‐
mate control in enclosed areas or areas with in‐
sufficient ventilation, e.g. in enclosed garages.
Warning
When stationary climate control is in operation,
high temperatures can occur underneath the
body, for instance caused by the exhaust gas
system. If combustible materials, such as
leaves or grass, come in contact with hot parts
of the exhaust gas system, these materials can
ignite. There is a risk of fire. Make sure that no
combustible materials can come in contact with
hot vehicle parts during stationary climate con‐
trol operation, e.g. leaves, grass, gas, gasoline,
oil or other combustible objects.
Functional requirements
▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state
and not in drive-ready state.
▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.
▷ For reasons of safety, the system can only be
switched on twice consecutively. The system
will be available again as soon as the drive-
ready state is activated and deactivated
again.
▷ The fuel tank capacity is sufficient.
▷ Hood is closed.
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
▷ Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Enabling the automatic engine
start function
The automatic engine start must be enabled be‐
fore using the system.
Otherwise, the engine cannot switch on auto‐
matically to climatize the car's interior.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
Seite 261
Climate control
CONTROLS
261
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
3. "Climate control"
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"
5. If necessary, "Remote Engine Start"
6. "Starting engine for clim. control"
7. Confirm the disclaimer.
Confirmation signals from the
vehicle
The activation of the system is confirmed by
flashing twice.
The parking lights are switched on as long as the
system is switched on.
Opening the Climate menu
Press the button on the upper side.
The Climate comfort menu is displayed.
Individual settings can be entered for some of
the climate control functions.
Switching on/off directly
General information
There are different ways to switch the system on
or off:
▷ Via iDrive.
▷ Via remote control.
▷ Via BMW display key.
The system switches off automatically after ap‐
prox. 15 minutes.
For reasons of safety, the system can only be
switched on twice consecutively. The system will
be available again as soon as the drive-ready
state is activated and deactivated again.
Via iDrive
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"
5. "Start now"
Via remote control
The system can be switched on and off using
the remote control.
Press the button on the remote control
three times within 1 second.
After operating the remote control, it will take ap‐
proximately 3 seconds until the engine is
switched on.
To switch off the system, press the button again
three times.
Via BMW display key
Switching on:
1.
Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
2. "Precondit. setting"
3. Tap on the symbol.
4. "Activate now"
5. "Start"
Switching off:
1.
Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
2. "Precondit. setting"
3. Tap on the symbol.
4. "Stop"
Display
Symbol Description
Symbol on the BMW display
key for automatic climate
control.
The symbol flashes while
Remote Engine Start is run‐
ning.
Seite 262
CONTROLS
Climate control
262
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Climatization for the requested
departure time
General information
Scheduled departure times can be set up in the
system to ensure a comfortable interior tempera‐
ture in the vehicle at the time of departure.
▷ One-time departure time: the time of the
scheduled departure can be set.
The system is switched on once.
▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day
of the week of the scheduled departure can
be set.
On the desired weekdays, the system will be
switched on 10 minutes before the set de‐
parture time.
The departure time is preselected in two steps:
▷ Set departure times.
▷ Activate departure times.
The climate control function will start approxi‐
mately 10 minutes before the set departure time
and continue for 5 more minutes after the depar‐
ture time.
For reasons of safety, the system can only be
switched on twice consecutively. The system will
be available again as soon as the drive-ready
state is activated and deactivated again.
Observe the information about the intended use
of the vehicle, refer to page 10.
Setting the departure time
Via iDrive
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"
5. Select the desired departure time.
6. Set the departure time.
7. Select day of the week, if needed.
Via BMW display key
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
2. "Precondit. setting"
3. Tap on the symbol.
4. Select the desired departure time.
5. Set the departure time.
6. Select day of the week, if needed.
7. "OK"
Activating the departure time
Functional requirement
If a requested departure time is to influence the
switching on of the system, the respective de‐
parture time must be activated first.
Via iDrive
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"
5. Activate the desired departure time.
, The symbol on the automatic climate
control signals an activated departure time
Via BMW display key
1.
Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
2. "Precondit. setting"
3. Tap on the symbol.
4. Activating the desired departure time:
Tap on the symbol.
The symbol on the automatic climate
control signals an activated departure time.
Seite 263
Climate control
CONTROLS
263
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Display in the instrument cluster
Symbol Description
The engine runs for the purpose
of operating the stationary cli‐
mate control. The vehicle is not
ready to drive.
Using climate control
functions via voice
General information
▷ Instructions for the voice activation system,
refer to page 52.
▷ With voice operation, you can change be‐
tween voice operation, iDrive and buttons.
▷ To have the available voice commands read
out loud: ›Voice commands‹ or ›Help‹.
Using the voice activation
system
Most climate control functions can be used via
voice in the car's interior, e.g.:
▷ Activation of the air conditioner: ›Activate
climate control‹.
▷ Deactivation of the automatic recirculated-air
function: ›Deactivate ... air recirculation‹.
▷ Configuration of a specific tempera‐
ture: ›Temperature [...] at ...‹.
Seite 264
CONTROLS
Climate control
264
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Integrated Universal
Remote Control
Concept
The integrated Universal Remote Control in the
interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions of
remote-controlled systems such as garage door
drives, barriers, or lighting systems.
General information
The Integrated Universal Remote Control repla‐
ces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To
operate the remote control, the buttons on the
interior mirror must be programmed with the de‐
sired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the
particular system is required in order to program
the remote control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored func‐
tions for the sake of security.
If possible, do not install the antenna of the re‐
mote-controlled system, e.g. the garage door
drive, near metal objects to ensure the best pos‐
sible operation.
Safety information
Warning
The operation of remote-controlled systems
with the integrated universal remote control,
such as the garage door, may result in injury,
for example, body parts becoming jammed in a
garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety information of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packaging
or in the owner's manual of the system to
be controlled, the system is generally
compatible with the integrated Universal Remote
Control.
Additional questions are answered by:
▷ A dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
Seite 265
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
265
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Control elements on the interior
mirror
▷ Buttons, arrow 1.
▷ LED, arrow 2.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming.
Programming
General information
The battery of the hand-held transmitter must be
fully charged at the time of programming to en‐
sure an optimal range of the integrated universal
remote control.
1.
Switch on standby state.
2. Initial setup:
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi‐
mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes
green rapidly. This erases all programming of
the buttons on the interior mirror.
3. Press the interior mirror button to be pro‐
grammed. The LED on the interior mirror will
slowly begin flashing orange.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system
to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm
away from the buttons on the interior mirror.
The required distance depends on the hand-
held transmitter.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired
function on the hand-held transmitter.
Canada: if programming with the hand-held
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and
release the hand-held transmitter button for
2 seconds.
6.
▷ The LED lights up green: programming
completed.
Release the button.
▷ The LED flashes fast: programming is not
complete.
Press the button on the interior mirror for
2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐
cedure three times to complete the pro‐
gramming procedure.
If the integrated universal remote control
remains nonoperational, continue with the
special features for change code wireless
systems.
▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐
onds: programming not completed.
Repeat steps 3 to 6.
To program other functions on other buttons, re‐
peat steps 3 to 5.
Special feature of the rolling code
wireless system
If you are unable to operate the remote-control‐
led system after repeated programming, please
check if the system to be controlled features a
rolling code radio system.
Refer to the owner's manual for the system.
For systems with a rolling code radio system, the
integrated Universal Remote Control and the
system also have to be synchronized.
Please read the owner's manual to find out how
to synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second
person.
Seite 266
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
266
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Synchronizing the universal remote control with
the system:
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-
controlled system.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior
mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the system being programmed, e.g. at the
garage gate. You have approx. 30 seconds
for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the in‐
terior mirror for approximately 3 seconds and
then release it. If necessary, repeat this step
up to three times in order to finish synchroni‐
zation. Once synchronization is complete, the
programmed function will be carried out.
Reprogramming individual
buttons
1.
Switch on standby state.
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to be
programmed.
3. As soon as the LED on the interior mirror
flashes orange after approx. 20 seconds, re‐
lease the button.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system
to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm
away from the buttons on the interior mirror.
The required distance depends on the hand-
held transmitter.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired
function on the hand-held transmitter.
Canada: if programming with the hand-held
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and
release the hand-held transmitter button for
2 seconds.
6. The LED can light up in different ways.
▷ The LED lights up green: the program‐
ming procedure is completed.
Release the button.
▷ The LED flashes fast: the hand-held
transmitter was detected but program‐
ming is not complete.
Press the button on the interior mirror for
2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐
cedure three times to complete the pro‐
gramming procedure.
If the integrated universal remote control
remains nonoperational, continue with the
special features for change code wireless
systems.
▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐
onds: programming not completed.
Repeat steps 3 to 6.
If the programming procedure is not completed,
the previous programming will remain un‐
changed.
Operation
Warning
The operation of remote-controlled systems
with the integrated universal remote control,
such as the garage door, may result in injury,
for example, body parts becoming jammed in a
garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety information of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
The system, such as the garage door, can be op‐
erated using the button on the interior mirror
while the drive-ready or standby state is
switched on. To do this, hold down the button
within receiving range of the system until the
function is activated. The interior mirror LED
stays lit while the wireless signal is being trans‐
mitted.
Deleting stored functions
All stored functions will be deleted. The func‐
tions cannot be deleted individually.
Seite 267
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
267
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the in‐
terior mirror simultaneously for approximately
10 seconds until the LED on the interior mirror
flashes green rapidly.
Sun visor
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Glare shield from the side
Folding out
1.
Fold the sun visor down.
2. Unhook it from the holder and swing it to the
side.
Folding up
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun vi‐
sor.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind
a cover. When the cover is opened, the mirror
lighting switches on.
Ashtray
Front center console
Opening
1. Press onto the cover.
2. The ashtray is located in a cup holder. Fold
the ashtray cover upward.
Emptying
1.
Pull the ashtray with the closed cover out of
the cup holder.
Seite 268
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
268
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise to open it.
3. Empty the container.
Always empty the ashtray with the container
open to prevent contamination of the lid.
Cigarette lighter
Safety information
Warning
Contact with the hot heating element or the hot
socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns.
Flammable materials can ignite if the cigarette
lighter falls down or is held against the respec‐
tive objects. There is a risk of fire and injuries.
Take hold of the cigarette lighter by its handle.
Make sure that children do not use the ciga‐
rette lighter and burn themselves.
NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage
to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.
Front center console
Press onto the cover.
The cigarette lighter is located between the cup
holders.
Operation
Push in the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter can be re‐
moved as soon as it pops back
out.
Sockets
Concept
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment when standby and drive-
ready state are switched on.
General information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Seite 269
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
269
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
Safety information
Warning
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the
airbags, such as portable navigation devices,
can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be
thrown around in the car's interior during un‐
folding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
devices and cables are not in the airbag's area
of unfolding.
NOTICE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can
work with high voltages and currents, which
means that the 12 volt on-board network can
be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of
damage to property. Only connect battery
chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting
aid terminals in the engine compartment.
NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage
to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.
Front center armrest
The center armrest contains a socket.
Front center console
Press onto the cover.
A socket is located between the cup holders.
Pull off the cover.
USB interface
General information
Follow the information regarding the connection
of mobile devices to the USB interface in the
section on USB connections, refer to page 67.
In the center armrest
A USB interface is located in the center armrest.
Seite 270
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
270
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Properties:
▷ USB port Type C.
▷ For charging mobile devices and for data
transfer.
▷ Charge current: max. 3 A.
In the center console
NOTICE
Objects in the storage compartment, e.g., large
USB connectors, may block or damage the
cover when it is being opened or closed. There
is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that
the area of movement of the cover is clear
while opening and closing it.
Press onto the cover.
A USB interface is located in the center console.
Properties:
▷ USB port Type A.
▷ For charging mobile devices and for data
transfer.
▷ Charge current: max. 1.5 A.
Seite 271
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
271
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Storage compartments
General information
The vehicle interior contains multiple storage
compartments for stowing objects.
Safety information
Warning
Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐
tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,
can be thrown into the car's interior while driv‐
ing, for instance in the event of an accident or
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is
a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
car's interior.
NOTICE
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can dam‐
age the dashboard. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not use anti-slip pads.
Front passenger side glove
compartment
Safety information
Warning
Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes
in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐
partment can be thrown into the car's interior
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the
glove compartment immediately after using it.
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment switches on.
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Locking
The glove compartment can be locked with an
integrated key. This prevents access to the glove
compartment.
After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed over without the
Seite 272
CONTROLS
Storage compartments
272
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
integrated key, for instance when the vehicle is
parked by valet parking.
Compartments in the doors
General information
There are storage compartments in the doors.
Safety information
Warning
Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or
glasses, can break in the event of an accident
or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken glass
can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not use any breakable objects while driving.
Only stow breakable objects in closed storage
compartments.
Storage compartment in
the center console
Opening
Press onto the cover.
Closing
Pull the cover on the handle bar back.
Center armrest, front
General information
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
Opening
Press the button.
Closing
Press cover down until it engages.
Front cup holder
Safety information
Warning
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may
damage the cup holders or be thrown about
the car’s interior in the event of an accident, an
evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled
liquids can distract from the traffic conditions
and lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage
the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not force objects into the cup holder. Use light‐
weight, shatterproof, and sealable containers.
Do not transport hot beverages.
Seite 273
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
273
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Opening
Press onto the cover.
Two cup holders are located in the center con‐
sole.
Closing
Pull the cover on the handle bar back.
Seite 274
CONTROLS
Storage compartments
274
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Cargo area
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Loading
Safety information
Warning
High gross weight can overheat the tires, dam‐
age them internally and cause a sudden drop in
tire inflation pressure. Driving characteristics
may be negatively impacted, reducing lane sta‐
bility, lengthening the braking distances and
changing the steering response. There is a risk
of accident. Pay attention to the permitted load
capacity of the tires and never exceed the per‐
mitted gross weight.
Warning
Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐
tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,
can be thrown into the car's interior while driv‐
ing, for instance in the event of an accident or
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is
a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
car's interior.
Warning
Improperly stowed objects can shift and be
thrown into the car's interior, for instance in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.
NOTICE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.
There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
1.
Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your ve‐
hicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs pas‐
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa‐
ble cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your ve‐
Seite 275
Cargo area
CONTROLS
275
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
hicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possible,
directly behind and at the bottom of the rear
passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: stow as far forward as pos‐
sible, directly behind and at the bottom of the
rear passenger seat backrests. When the rear
seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer
safety belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to
stow large cargo.
▷ Smaller and lighter cargo: secure with ratchet
straps or with a cargo net or draw straps.
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
straps.
Lashing eyes in the cargo
area
General information
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing straps,
tensioning straps, draw straps or cargo nets, to
the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Lashing eyes
There are four lashing eyes in the cargo area for
securing cargo.
Net
Small objects can be stowed in the net on the
right side. To transport larger objects, slide the
net down.
Storage compartment on
the left side
General information
A storage compartment is located on the left
side in the cargo area.
Seite 276
CONTROLS
Cargo area
276
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Opening
Pull the handle.
Enlarging the cargo area
Concept
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down
the rear seat backrest.
General information
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of 50
to 50.
Safety information
Warning
Danger of jamming with folding down the back‐
rests. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the rear backrest and the of the head
restraint is clear prior to folding down.
Warning
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unsecured
cargo can be thrown about the car’s interior;
for instance, in the event of an accident, braking
or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked
after folding it back.
Warning
The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐
ited or compromised with incorrect seat adjust‐
ment or improper installation of the child seat.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make
sure that the child restraint system fits securely
against the backrest. If possible, adjust the
backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐
rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.
NOTICE
Vehicle parts can be damaged when folding
down the rear backrest. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the rear backrest including head
restraint is clear when folding down.
Reclining the backrest
From the cargo area
Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo area to
release the rear seat backrest.
▷ Left lever: fold down the left rear seat back‐
rest.
▷ Right lever: fold down the right rear seat
backrest.
Seite 277
Cargo area
CONTROLS
277
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Folding back the backrest
Return the rear seat backrest to the upright seat‐
ing position and engage it.
Seite 278
CONTROLS
Cargo area
278
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Seite 279
Cargo area
CONTROLS
279
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
280
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving ........................................................ 282
Saving fuel ................................................................................................ 286
281
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need to begin working together
smoothly.
The following instructions will help you to ach‐
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
During break-in, do not use the Launch Control,
refer to page 141.
Safety information
Warning
Due to new parts and components, safety and
driver assistance systems can react with a de‐
lay. There is a risk of accident. After installing
new parts or with a new vehicle, drive conser‐
vatively and intervene early if necessary. Ob‐
serve the break-in procedures of the respective
parts and components.
Engine, transmission, and axle
drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speed:
▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circumstan‐
ces.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing
circumstances when tires are brand-new; they
achieve their full traction potential after a break-in
time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full
effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km.
Drive moderately during this break-in period.
Following part replacement
Observe the break-in procedures again, if com‐
ponents mentioned above are replaced.
Seite 282
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving
282
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
General driving notes
Closing the trunk lid
Safety information
Warning
An open trunk lid protrudes from the vehicle
and can endanger occupants and other traffic
participants or damage the vehicle in the event
of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers.
In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the car's
interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not drive with the trunk lid
open.
Driving with the trunk lid open
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
▷ If the convertible top is closed, close all win‐
dows.
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
▷ Drive moderately.
Hot exhaust gas system
Warning
During driving operation, high temperatures can
occur underneath the vehicle body, for instance
caused by the exhaust gas system. If combusti‐
ble materials, such as leaves or grass, come in
contact with hot parts of the exhaust gas sys‐
tem, these materials can ignite. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not
remove the heat shields installed and never ap‐
ply undercoating to them. Make sure that no
combustible materials can come in contact with
hot vehicle parts in driving operation, idle or
during parking. Do not touch the hot exhaust
gas system.
Mobile communication devices
in the vehicle
Warning
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can in‐
fluence one another. There is radiation due to
the transmission operations of mobile phones.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
property. If possible, in the car's interior use
only mobile phones with direct connections to
an exterior antenna in order to exclude mutual
interference and deflect the radiation from the
car's interior.
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplaning.
It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of
contact between the tires and the road surface,
ultimately undermining your ability to steer and
brake the vehicle.
Driving through water
General information
When driving through water, follow the following:
▷ Drive through calm water only.
▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper
than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm.
▷ Drive through water no faster than walking
speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
Safety information
NOTICE
When driving too quickly through too deep wa‐
ter, water can enter into the engine compart‐
ment, the electrical system or the transmission.
There is a risk of damage to property. When
driving through water, do not exceed the maxi‐
Seite 283
Things to remember when driving
DRIVING TIPS
283
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
mum indicated water level and the maximum
speed for driving through water.
Braking safely
General information
The vehicle is equipped with the Antilock Brake
System ABS as a standard feature.
Perform an emergency stop in situations that re‐
quire such.
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any
obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the
hydraulic circuits indicate that the Antilock Brake
System ABS is in its active mode.
In certain braking situations, the perforated brake
discs can emit functional noises. However, func‐
tional noises have no effect on the performance
and operational reliability of the brake.
Objects in the area around the
pedals
Warning
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the
pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the
vehicle such that they are secured and cannot
enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats
that are suitable for the vehicle and can be
safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose
floor mats and do not layer several floor mats.
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for
the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are se‐
curely fastened again after they were removed,
for instance for cleaning.
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, gen‐
tly press the brake pedal every few miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger other
traffic.
The heat generated during braking dries brake
discs and brake pads and protects them against
corrosion.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Hills
General information
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear
that requires least braking effort. Otherwise, the
brakes may overheat and reduce brake effi‐
ciency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if
needed.
Safety information
Warning
Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to
high temperatures, brakes wearing out and
possibly even brake failure. There is a risk of
accident. Avoid placing excessive stress on the
brake system.
Warning
In idle state or with the engine switched off,
safety functions, for instance engine braking ef‐
fect, braking assistance and steering assis‐
tance, may not be available. There is a risk of
accident. Do not attempt to drive in idle state or
with the engine switched off.
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination
on the brake pads are increased by the following
circumstances:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
Seite 284
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving
284
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
agents.
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a
pulsating effect on the brakes in their response -
generally this cannot be corrected.
Condensation water under the
parked vehicle
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water develops and collects under‐
neath the vehicle.
Driving on racetracks
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
racetrack operation lead to increased wear. This
wear is not covered by the warranty. The vehicle
is not designed for use in motor sports competi‐
tion.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
special sport tires, known as high-performance
tires, that have been optimized for use on racing
tracks in dry conditions. To find out more infor‐
mation about sport tires, ask a dealer's service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Seite 285
Things to remember when driving
DRIVING TIPS
285
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Reducing fuel consumption
General information
The vehicle contains advanced technologies for
the reduction of consumption and emission val‐
ues.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
Carrying out certain measures, such as a moder‐
ate driving style and regular maintenance, can in‐
fluence fuel consumption and the environmental
impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts following
use
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aerody‐
namics and increase the fuel consumption.
Close the windows
Open windows increase air resistance and there‐
fore lead to greater fuel consumption.
Tires
General information
Tires can affect consumption in various ways, for
instance tire size may influence consumption.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before start‐
ing on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Drive away without delay
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the quickest way of warming the cold en‐
gine up to operating temperature.
Look well ahead when driving
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
consumption.
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle
driving ahead of you.
Avoid high engine speeds
Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel con‐
sumption and reduces wear.
If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift indi‐
cator, refer to page 150.
Use coasting conditions
When approaching a red light, take your foot off
the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt.
Seite 286
DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
286
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
For going downhill take your foot off the acceler‐
ator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine during
longer stops
Switching off the engine
Switch off the engine during longer stops, for in‐
stance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in
traffic congestion.
Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle auto‐
matically switches off the engine during a stop.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted
rather than leaving the engine running con‐
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are re‐
duced. Savings can begin within a few seconds
of switching off the engine.
In addition, fuel consumption is also determined
by other factors, such as driving style, road con‐
ditions, maintenance or environmental factors.
Switch off any functions that are
not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear win‐
dow defroster require a lot of energy and in‐
crease fuel consumption, especially in city and
stop-and-go traffic.
Switch off these functions if they are not needed.
The ECO PRO driving mode supports the en‐
ergy conserving use of comfort features. These
functions are automatically deactivated partially
or completely.
Have maintenance carried out
Have the vehicle maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. BMW
recommends that maintenance work be per‐
formed by a BMW service center.
For information on the BMW Maintenance Sys‐
tem, refer to page 333.
ECO PRO
Concept
ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves on
consumption. For this purpose, the engine con‐
trol and comfort features, for instance the climate
control output, are adjusted.
Under certain conditions the engine is automati‐
cally decoupled from the transmission in the D
selector lever position. The vehicle continues
traveling with the engine idling to reduce con‐
sumption. The D selector lever position remains
engaged.
In addition, context-sensitive information, ECO
PRO tips, can be displayed to assist with a fuel-
efficient driving style.
The achieved extended range is displayed in the
instrument cluster as bonus range.
General information
The system includes the following
EfficientDynamics functions and
EfficientDynamics displays:
▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 289.
▷ ECO PRO seat climate control, refer to
page 288.
▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to page 288.
▷ ECO PRO light and sight, refer to page 288.
▷ Coasting driving condition, refer to page 289.
▷ Driving style analysis, refer to page 291.
Overview
Seite 287
Saving fuel
DRIVING TIPS
287
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Button
Activating ECO PRO
Press the button. ECO PRO is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
Configuring ECO PRO
INDIVIDUAL
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
1. Activate ECO PRO.
2. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
Via iDrive
1.
"CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driving mode"
4. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Activating/deactivating ECO PRO
functions
The following ECO PRO functions can be acti‐
vated/deactivated:
▷ "ECO PRO speed"
▷ "Coasting"
▷ "ECO PRO seat climate control"
▷ "ECO PRO climate control"
▷ "ECO PRO light and sight"
Settings are stored for the driver profile currently
used.
ECO PRO limit
▷ Activate the ECO PRO limit:
"ECO PRO speed"
An ECO PRO tip is displayed if the speed of
the set ECO PRO limit is exceeded.
▷ Adjust the ECO PRO limit speed:
"Notification at:"
Select the desired speed.
Coasting
Efficiency can be optimized by disengaging the
engine and coasting with the engine idling.
ECO PRO seat climate control
The output of seat heating and, where applica‐
ble, seat ventilation is reduced when ECO PRO
is activated.
ECO PRO climate control
Climate control is set to be efficient.
This means, it is possible to deviate slightly from
the set temperature or to heat or cool the car's
interior more slowly, to economize on consump‐
tion.
ECO PRO light and sight
The output of exterior mirror heating and rear
window defroster is reduced.
Resetting the settings
Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard
settings:
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD"
Display in the instrument cluster
General information
When ECO PRO driving mode is activated, the
display switches to a special configuration.
Seite 288
DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
288
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
ECO PRO bonus range
A modified driving style helps you
extend your driving range.
The range extension can be dis‐
played as the bonus range in the
instrument cluster.
The efficiency display includes the bonus range,
refer to page 144.
If the bonus range appears in gray, the current
driving style is inefficient.
The display turns blue as soon as all conditions
for efficient driving are met.
The intervals for resetting the bonus range de‐
pend on the settings of the trip data, refer to
page 153.
Consumption display
A pointer in the consumption display informs
about the current driving style:
▷ The current consumption in relation to the
average consumption is displayed.
▷ Pointer in the area of arrow 1: display of the
energy recovered by coasting or when brak‐
ing.
▷ Pointer in the area of arrow 2: display when
accelerating.
If the acceleration is inefficient, the area between
the average consumption and the current con‐
sumption is colored red.
In addition, the following information is displayed,
depending on the situation:
▷ Depending on the equipment: the total dis‐
tance driven while coasting, refer to
page 290.
▷ The total time that the engine has been
switched off, refer to page 126, during auto‐
matic engine stops.
▷ A gear shift indicator, refer to page 150, rec‐
ommending the use of a more efficient gear.
Indications on the Control
Display
General information
Information about the current effectiveness of
the ECO PRO functions can be displayed as en‐
ergy flow.
Displaying energy flow information
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Energy flow"
The following functions are displayed:
▷ Auto Start/Stop function.
▷ Energy recovery.
▷ Coasting.
Coasting
Concept
Under certain conditions the engine is automati‐
cally decoupled from the transmission in the D
selector lever position. The vehicle continues
traveling with the engine idling to reduce con‐
sumption. Selector lever position D remains en‐
gaged.
This driving condition is referred to as coasting.
As soon as you step on the brake or accelerator
pedal, the engine is automatically coupled again.
Seite 289
Saving fuel
DRIVING TIPS
289
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
General information
Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO driv‐
ing mode.
Coasting is automatically activated when ECO
PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics
Control.
A proactive driving style helps the driver to use
the function often and supports the efficient ef‐
fect of coasting.
Functional requirements
The function is available in the speed range from
approx. 16 mph/25 km/h to 100 mph/160 km/h.
The function is active if the following conditions
are met:
▷ Accelerator pedal not depressed.
▷ Brake pedal not depressed or only slightly
depressed.
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever position
D.
▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
temperature.
▷ Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function,
ACC, not activated.
Operation via shift paddles
Concept
The coasting driving condition can be influenced
with the shift paddles.
Activating/deactivating coasting via
shift paddles
1.
Shift to the highest gear by pulling the right
shift paddle.
2. To activate coasting mode, actuate the right
shift paddle again.
To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle.
Display
Display in the instrument cluster
The coasting distance traveled is indicated
in coasting mode.
Indications on the Control Display
The coasting mode is displayed under energy
flow while driving.
The distance traveled in coasting mode is dis‐
played in the trip data.
Color code blue: coasting mode.
Displaying energy flow information
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Energy flow"
System limits
The function is not available under one of the fol‐
lowing conditions.
▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on
steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low or
vehicle electrical system drawing excessive
current.
Seite 290
DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
290
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Driving style analysis
Concept
The function helps develop an especially effi‐
cient driving style and to conserve fuel.
For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.
The assessment is done in various categories
and is displayed on the Control Display.
This display will help you adjust your driving style
and save some fuel.
General information
The current trip is assessed.
To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO
PRO tips are displayed during driving.
The range of the vehicle can be extended by ad‐
justing your driving style.
This gain in range is displayed as a bonus range
in the instrument cluster and on the Control Dis‐
play.
Functional requirement
The function is available in ECO PRO driving
mode.
Calling up the Driving style
analysis
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Driving style analysis"
Display on the Control Display
The display of the Driving style analysis shows
the efficiency of the Driving style.
The more efficient the driving style, the more
bars are displayed in color and the faster the bo‐
nus range increases.
In contrast, a reduced number of bars will be dis‐
played with an inefficient driving style.
Seite 291
Saving fuel
DRIVING TIPS
291
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
292
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
MOBILITY
Refueling ................................................................................................... 294
Wheels and tires ...................................................................................... 296
Engine compartment .............................................................................. 323
Operating materials ................................................................................. 326
Maintenance ............................................................................................. 333
Replacing components .......................................................................... 335
Breakdown assistance ........................................................................... 338
Care ........................................................................................................... 345
293
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Refueling
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Follow the following when
refueling
General information
Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 326, prior to refueling.
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely
into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle
during refueling causes:
▷ Premature switching off.
▷ Reduced return of the fuel vapors.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Make sure that the fuel cap is closed properly af‐
ter refueling, otherwise the emissions warning
light may light up.
Follow safety regulations posted at the gas sta‐
tion.
Safety information
NOTICE
With a driving range of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to
property. Refuel promptly.
NOTICE
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of the
fuel tank can damage the fuel system. Painted
surfaces may be damaged by contact with fuel.
Escaping fuel can harm the environment. There
is a risk of damage to property. Avoid overfilling.
Fuel cap
Opening
1.
To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear
edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens.
Seite 294
MOBILITY
Refueling
294
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Closing
Warning
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be jam‐
med and crushed during closing. The cap can‐
not be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors can
escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
age to property. Pay attention that the retaining
strap is not jammed or crushed when closing
the cap.
1.
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it engages.
Emergency unlocking
It may be necessary in certain situations to un‐
lock the fuel filler flap manually, for instance with
an electrical fault.
Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Seite 295
Refueling
MOBILITY
295
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Tire inflation pressure
General information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pressure
influence the following:
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Road safety.
▷ Driving comfort.
▷ Fuel consumption.
Safety information
Warning
A tire with too little or no tire inflation pressure
may heat up significantly and sustain damage.
This will have a negative impact on aspects of
handling, such as steering and braking re‐
sponse. There is a risk of accident. Regularly
check the tire inflation pressure, and correct it
as needed, for instance twice a month and be‐
fore a long trip.
Tire inflation pressure
specifications
In the tire inflation pressure table
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 298, contains all tire inflation pressure
specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
ambient temperature. The tire inflation pressure
values apply to tire sizes approved by the manu‐
facturer of the vehicle for the vehicle type.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
On the Control Display
The current tire inflation pressure values and the
intended tire inflation pressure values for the
mounted tires can be displayed on the Control
Display.
To ensure that they are displayed correctly, the
tire sizes must be stored in the system and must
have been set, refer to page 309, for the
mounted tires.
The current tire inflation pressure value is lo‐
cated on each tire.
The reference tire inflation pressure value is lo‐
cated in the lower area of the Control Display.
Checking the tire inflation
pressure
General information
Tires heat up while driving. The tire inflation
pressure increases with the tire temperature.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire infla‐
tion pressure.
The displays of inflation devices may under-read
by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
Seite 296
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
296
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Checking using tire inflation
pressure specifications in the tire
inflation pressure table
The tire inflation pressure specifications in the
tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold
tires or tires at the same temperature as the am‐
bient temperature.
Only check the tire inflation pressure levels when
the tires are cold, i.e.:
▷ Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has not
been exceeded.
▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at least
2 hours after a trip.
1. Determine, refer to page 296, the intended
tire inflation pressure levels for the mounted
tires.
2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires, using a pressure gage, for example.
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the cur‐
rent tire inflation pressure value deviates from
the specified value.
4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed
onto the tire valves.
Checking using the tire inflation
pressure specifications on the
Control Display
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Check whether the current tire inflation pres‐
sure levels deviate from the intended tire
pressure value.
5. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the cur‐
rent tire inflation pressure value deviates from
the intended value.
After correcting the tire inflation
pressure
With runflat tires:
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
With Tire Pressure Monitor TPM:
The corrected tire inflation pressures are applied
automatically. Make sure that the correct tire set‐
tings have been made.
With tires that cannot be found in the tire pres‐
sure values on the Control Display, reset the Tire
Pressure Monitor TPM.
Tire inflation pressures up to
100 mph/160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure val‐
ues in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 298, and adjust as necessary.
These pressure values can also be found on the
tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door
pillar.
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Seite 297
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
297
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Tire inflation pressure values up
to 100 mph/160 km/h
M850i xDrive
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/40 R 19 98 H
M+S XL RSC
245/40 R 19 98 V
M+S XL RSC
2.4 / 35 2.7 / 39
Front: 245/40 R 19
98 H M+S XL A/S
RSC
2.4 / 35 -
Rear: 275/35 R 19
100 H M+S XL A/S
RSC
- 2.6 / 38
Front: 245/35 R 20
95 Y XL Std/RSC
2.7 / 39 -
Rear: 275/30 R 20
97 Y XL Std/RSC
- 2.8 / 41
Front: 245/40 R 19
98 V M+S XL RSC
2.4 / 35 -
Rear: 275/35 R 19
100 V M+S XL RSC
- 2.6 / 38
Tire inflation pressures at max.
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
Warning
In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess
of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if
necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds ex‐
ceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant
table on the following pages. Otherwise, tire
damage and accidents could occur.
For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for opti‐
mum driving comfort, note the pressure values in
the tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 298, and adjust as necessary.
Tire inflation pressure values
over 100 mph/160 km/h
M850i xDrive
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/40 R 19 98 H
M+S XL RSC
2.7 / 39 3.1 / 45
245/40 R 19 98 V
M+S XL RSC
2.9 / 42 3.4 / 49
Front: 245/40 R 19
98 H M+S XL A/S
RSC
2.7 / 39 -
Rear: 275/35 R 19
100 H M+S XL A/S
RSC
- 2.9 / 42
Front: 245/35 R 20
95 Y XL Std/RSC
3.0 / 44 -
Rear: 275/30 R 20
97 Y XL Std/RSC
- 3.2 / 46
Front: 245/40 R 19
98 V M+S XL RSC
2.9 / 42 -
Rear: 275/35 R 19
100 V M+S XL RSC
- 3.1 / 45
Seite 298
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
298
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Tire identification marks
Tire size
245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
18: rim diameter in inches
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Maximum tire load
Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible
weight for which the tire is approved.
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire sidewall
and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR – on
the certification label on the driver door B-pillar.
Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater
than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross Axle Weight
Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and
tire loads, respectively.
Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h
R = up to 106 mph/170 km/h
S = up to 112 mph/180 km/h
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0119
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
0119: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age
Recommendation
Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at least
every 6 years.
Manufacture date
You can find the manufacture date of the tire on
the tire's sidewall.
Designation Manufacture date
DOT … 0119 1st week, 2019
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width.
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature
A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Fed‐
eral Safety Requirements in addition to these
grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well
on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Seite 299
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
299
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfa‐
ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro‐
planing, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces‐
sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of perform‐
ance which all passenger car tires must meet un‐
der the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
Warning
The temperature grade for this tire is estab‐
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in com‐
bination, can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
RSC – Run-flat tires
Run-flat tires, refer to page 303, are labeled with
a circular symbol containing the letters RSC
marked on the sidewall.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased
risk of hydroplaning.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for
winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's
circumference and have the legally required min‐
imum height of 0.063 inches/1.6 mm.
The positions of the wear indicators are marked
on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indica‐
tor.
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as
well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can
Seite 300
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
300
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐
pension parts. This is more likely to occur with
low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning
between the wheel and the road. Be careful to
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐
pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-pro‐
file tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
functions:
▷ Unusual vibrations.
▷ Unusual tire or running noises.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong tendency
to pull to the left or right.
Damage can be caused by the following situa‐
tions, for instance:
▷ Driving over curbs.
▷ Road damage.
▷ Tire inflation pressure too low.
▷ Vehicle overloading.
▷ Incorrect tire storage.
Safety information
Warning
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pressure,
which can lead to loss of vehicle control. There
is a risk of accident. If tire damage is suspected
while driving, immediately reduce speed and
stop. Have wheels and tires checked. For this
purpose, drive carefully to the nearest dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop. Have vehicle towed or trans‐
ported as needed. Do not repair damaged tires,
but have them replaced.
Warning
Tires can become damaged by driving over ob‐
stacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at high
speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire cross-
section. The smaller the tire cross-section, the
higher the risk of tire damage. There is a dan‐
ger of accidents and property damage. If possi‐
ble, avoid driving over objects or road condi‐
tions that may damage tires, or drive over them
slowly and carefully.
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting and wheel balancing
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried out
by a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Wheel and tire combination
General information
You can ask the dealer's service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
about the correct wheel/tire combination and
wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
Safety information
Warning
Wheels and tires which are not suitable for your
vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle, for in‐
stance due to contact with the body due to tol‐
erances despite the same official size rating.
There is a risk of an accident. The manufac‐
turer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you
use wheels and tires that have been recom‐
mended by the vehicle manufacturer for your
vehicle type.
Warning
Mounted steel wheels can cause technical
problems, for instance independent loosening
of the lug bolts, damage to the brake discs.
There is a risk of accident. Do not mount steel
wheels.
Seite 301
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
301
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Warning
Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will have a
negative impact on the vehicle's handling and
on the function of a variety of systems, such as
the Anti-lock Brake System or Dynamic Stabil‐
ity Control. There is a risk of accident. To main‐
tain good handling and vehicle response, use
only tires with a single tread configuration from
a single manufacturer. The manufacturer of the
vehicle recommends that you use wheels and
tires that have been recommended by the vehi‐
cle manufacturer for your vehicle type. Follow‐
ing tire damage, have the original wheel/tire
combination remounted on the vehicle as soon
as possible.
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehi‐
cle recommends certain tire brands. The tire
brands can be identified by a star on the tire
sidewall.
New tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing
circumstances when tires are brand-new; they
achieve their full traction potential after a break-in
time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
Warning
Retreaded tires can have different tire casing
structures. With advanced age the service life
can be limited. There is a risk of an accident.
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
The manufacturer of the vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Winter tires
General information
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
winter roads.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires provide
better winter traction than summer tires, they
usually do not provide the same level of perform‐
ance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then attach a label showing the permissible maxi‐
mum speed in the field of view. The label is avail‐
able from a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
With winter tires mounted, observe and do not
exceed the permissible maximum speed.
Changing runflat tires
For your own safety, use only runflat tires. No
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Fur‐
ther information is available from a dealer's serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Rotating wheels between axles
Swapping the front wheels with the rear wheels
or vice versa is not permitted on vehicles with
Seite 302
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
302
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
different tire or rim dimensions on the front and
rear axles.
Storing tires
Tire inflation pressure
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark
place.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease, and solvents.
Do not leave tires in plastic bags.
Remove dirt from wheels or tires.
Run-flat tires
Concept
Run-flat tires permit continued driving under re‐
stricted conditions even in the event of a com‐
plete loss of tire inflation pressure.
General information
The wheels consist of tires that are self-support‐
ing, to a limited degree, and possibly special
rims.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐
main drivable to a restricted degree in the event
of a tire inflation pressure loss.
Follow the instructions for continued driving with
a flat tire.
Safety information
Warning
Your vehicle handles differently with a run-flat
tire with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐
stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐
duced, braking distances are longer and the
self-steering properties will change. There is a
risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not
exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Label
The tires are marked on the tire sidewall with
RSC Run-flat System Component.
Repairing a flat tire
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from
passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels
are in the straight-ahead position and engage
the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐
hicle and ensure that they remain outside the
immediate area in a safe place, such as be‐
hind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Seite 303
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
303
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Mobility System
Concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage can
be sealed temporarily to enable continued travel.
To accomplish this, sealant is pumped into the
tires, which seals the damage from the inside.
General information
▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobility
System found on the compressor and sealant
container.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop if the
tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies that
have penetrated the tire. Only remove foreign
objects if they are visibly protruding from the
tire.
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
container and apply it to the steering wheel.
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
wheel electronics. In this case, have the elec‐
tronics checked and replaced at the next op‐
portunity.
▷ The compressor can be used to check the
tire inflation pressure.
Overview
Storage
The Mobility System is in the left storage com‐
partment of the cargo area.
Sealant container
▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.
▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
Observe use-by date on the sealant container.
Compressor
1 Sealant container unlocking
2 Sealant container holder
Seite 304
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
304
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
3 Tire pressure gage
4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button
5 On/off switch
6 Compressor
7 Connector/cable for socket
8 Connection hose
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from
passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels
are in the straight-ahead position and engage
the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐
hicle and ensure that they remain outside the
immediate area in a safe place, such as be‐
hind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Filling the tire with sealant
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐
sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into
the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐
tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐
closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐
late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to
life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐
ficient ventilation.
NOTICE
The compressor can overheat during extended
operation. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Do not run the compressor for more than
10 minutes.
Filling
1. Shake the sealant container.
2. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover of
the sealant container. Do not kink the hose.
3. Slide the sealant container into the holder on
the compressor housing, ensuring that it en‐
gages audibly.
Seite 305
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
305
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant container
onto the tire valve of the nonworking wheel.
5. With the compressor switched off, insert the
plug into the power socket inside the vehicle.
6. With standby state switched on or the engine
running, switch on the compressor.
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to fill
the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation
pressure of approx. 2.0 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire
inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx.
5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor at this
point.
Checking and adjusting the tire
inflation pressure
Checking
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire
pressure gage.
To continue the trip, a tire inflation pressure of at
least 2 bar must be reached.
Removing and stowing the sealant
container
1.
Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer from the tire valve.
2. Press the red unlocking device.
3. Remove the sealant container from the com‐
pressor.
4. Wrap and store the sealant container in suita‐
ble material to avoid dirtying the cargo area.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is
not reached
1.
Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to distrib‐
ute the sealant in the tire.
3. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐
sor directly onto the tire valve stem.
Seite 306
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
306
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
4. Insert the connector into the power socket in‐
side the vehicle.
5. With standby state switched on or the engine
running, switch on the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar can‐
not be reached, contact your dealer's service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is
reached, see Minimum tire inflation pressure
is reached.
6. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
7. Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is
reached
1.
Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
2. Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
4. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to
ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed in
the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.
Adjustment
1. Stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐
sor directly onto the tire valve stem.
3. Insert the connector into the power socket in‐
side the vehicle.
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at least
2.0 bar.
▷ Increase tire inflation pressure: with
standby state switched on or the engine
running, switch on the compressor.
▷ Reduce tire inflation pressure: press the
button on the compressor.
5. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
6. Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed
of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the run-flat tires, refer to page 316.
Seite 307
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
307
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM, refer to
page 309.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant con‐
tainer of the Mobility System promptly.
Snow chains
Safety information
Warning
With the mounting of snow chains on unsuita‐
ble tires, the snow chains can come into con‐
tact with vehicle parts. There may be a risk of
accident or risk of damage to property. Only
mount snow chains on tires that are designated
by their manufacturer as suitable for the use of
snow chains.
Warning
Insufficiently tight snow chains may damage
tires and vehicle components. There may be a
risk of accident or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the snow chains are always suf‐
ficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed according
to the snow chain manufacturer's instructions.
Fine-link snow chains
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
the use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
fine-link snow chains have been tested by the
manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
as road-safe and suitable.
Information regarding suitable snow chains is
available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Use
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 245/45 R18.
▷ 245/40 R19.
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
tions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in
incorrect readings.
Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM af‐
ter mounting snow chains, as doing so may re‐
sult in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control DTC to optimize the
forward momentum.
Maximum speed with snow
chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when
using snow chains.
Rear axle steering during
operation with snow chains
General information
In order to guarantee free running of the wheels
when operating with snow chains, rear axle
steering of the integral active steering must be
switched off when snow chains are mounted.
Safety information
Warning
When rear axle steering is switched on and
snow chains are mounted, there can be contact
between snow chains and the chassis. There
may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to
property. With mounted snow chains, switch off
the rear axle steering.
Switching off rear axle steering
The rear axle steering is switched off by specify‐
ing that snow chains are installed.
Seite 308
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
308
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Tire chains"
5. "Snow chains installed"
Starting with the permissible maximum speed
with snow chains of 30 mph/50 km/h the rear
axle steering will be switched on again automati‐
cally.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Concept
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the
four mounted tires. The system warns you if
there is a loss of pressure in one or more tires.
General information
Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire infla‐
tion pressure and tire temperature.
Using the tire settings in iDrive, the system can
automatically display the specified target pres‐
sures and compare them with the actual tire in‐
flation pressures.
If tires are being used that are not specified on
the tire inflation pressure details on the vehicle,
refer to page 296, such as tires with special ap‐
proval, the system needs to be actively reset.
The system will then take over the actual tire in‐
flation pressures as the target pressures.
When operating the system, also note the addi‐
tional information found in the Tire inflation pres‐
sure, refer to page 296, chapter.
Safety information
Warning
The display of the target pressures is not a
substitute for the tire inflation pressure details
on the vehicle. Incorrect entries in the tire set‐
tings can lead to incorrect target tire inflation
pressure values. In this case, it cannot be guar‐
anteed that the notification of a loss of tire infla‐
tion pressure will be reliable. There is a risk of
injury and risk of damage to property. Ensure
that the tire sizes of the mounted tires are dis‐
played correctly and match the details on the
tires and on the vehicle.
Functional requirements
The following conditions must be met for the
system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of
tire inflation pressure is not assured:
▷ Every time a tire or wheel is changed, the
correct details on the mounted tires must be
entered in the tire settings, refer to
page 309.
▷ For tires with special approval:
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, a reset
was performed with the correct tire infla‐
tion pressure.
▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad‐
justed to a new value, a reset was per‐
formed.
▷ Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.
Tire settings
General information
The tire sizes of the mounted tires can be gath‐
ered from the tire inflation pressure details on the
vehicle, refer to page 296, or directly on the tires.
The tire details do not need to be re-entered
when the tire inflation pressure is corrected.
For summer and winter tires, the tire details en‐
tered last are stored. After a tire or wheel re‐
Seite 309
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
309
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
placement, the settings of the tire sets used last
can be selected.
Opening the menu
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
Changing settings
Via iDrive:
1.
"Tire settings"
2. "Tire selection"
3. "Manual"
4.
▷ "Summer tires"
▷ "Winter/all-year"
5. Select the tire type that is mounted on the
rear axle:
▷ Tire size, e.g., 245/45 R18 96 Y.
▷ For tires with special approval: "Other tire"
6. Select the maximum road speed that will be
used with the tires.
7. "Save tire settings"
The measurement of the current tire inflation
pressure is started. The measurement progress
is displayed.
Status display
Current status
The system status can be displayed on the Con‐
trol Display, e.g., whether or not the system is ac‐
tive.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
The current status is displayed.
Current tire inflation pressure
The current tire inflation pressure is displayed for
each tire.
The current tire inflation pressures may change
during driving operation or depending on the ex‐
ternal temperature.
Current tire temperature
Depending on the model, the current tire tem‐
peratures are displayed.
The current tire temperatures may change while
driving or due to the external temperature.
Target pressure
The target pressure for the tires on the front and
rear axles is displayed.
The target pressures are values stored in the ve‐
hicle.
The specified target pressures take the influence
of driving operation and external temperature on
the tire temperature into account. The appropri‐
ate target pressure is always displayed, inde‐
pendent of the weather situation, tire tempera‐
tures and driving times.
The displayed target pressure may change and
may differ from the tire inflation pressure details
on the door pillar of the driver's door. The tire in‐
flation pressure can thus be corrected to the
value of the displayed target pressures.
The target pressure is immediately adjusted if
the vehicle load is changed in the tire settings.
Tire conditions
General information
Tire and system status are indicated by the color
of the wheels and a SMS text message on the
Control Display.
Any existing messages may not be deleted if the
displayed target pressure is not reached after the
tire inflation pressure is corrected.
Seite 310
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
310
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
All wheels green
▷ The system is active and bases warnings on
the displayed target pressures.
▷ For tires with special approval: the system is
active and bases warnings on the tire inflation
pressures stored during the last reset.
One to four yellow wheels
A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation pres‐
sure has occurred in the indicated tires.
Gray wheels
It may not be possible to identify tire inflation
pressure losses.
Possible causes:
▷ Malfunction.
▷ During tire inflation pressure measurement,
after confirmation of the tire settings.
▷ For tires with special approval: the system is
being reset.
For tires with special approval:
perform a reset
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not drive
off.
5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform reset".
6. Drive away.
The wheels are displayed in gray and the follow‐
ing is displayed "Resetting Tire Pressure
Monitor…".
After a travel time of several minutes, the set tire
inflation pressures are accepted as the target tire
inflation pressures. The reset is completed auto‐
matically while driving.
After a successfully completed reset, the wheels
on the Control Display are shown in green and
the following is displayed: "Tire Pressure Monitor
active. See label for recommended pressure.".
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you
continue the reset resumes automatically.
Messages: for tires without
special approval
General information
A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC
Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on.
Safety information
Warning
A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire
inflation pressure impacts handling, such as
steering and braking response. Run-flat tires
can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of
accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle
is equipped with normal tires. Follow the infor‐
mation on run-flat tires and continued driving
with these tires.
If a tire inflation pressure check is
required
Message
A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐
pears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
Inflation was not carried out accord‐
ing to specifications, e.g., when the
tire has not been sufficiently inflated
or in the case of a natural steady tire
pressure loss.
Measure
Check the tire pressure and correct as needed.
Seite 311
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
311
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
If the tire inflation pressure is too
low
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a tire inflation pressure loss.
Measure
1.
Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a
speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a gas
station, check the tire inflation pressure in all
four tires and correct if necessary.
If there is a significant loss of tire
inflation pressure
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap‐
pears in a Check Control message on the Con‐
trol Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
Measure
1.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐
mal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 303, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
Messages: for tires with special
approval
General information
A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC
Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on.
Safety information
Warning
A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire
inflation pressure impacts handling, such as
steering and braking response. Run-flat tires
can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of
accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle
is equipped with normal tires. Follow the infor‐
mation on run-flat tires and continued driving
with these tires.
If a tire inflation pressure check is
required
Message
A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐
pears on the Control Display.
Seite 312
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
312
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Sym‐
bol
Possible cause
Inflation was not carried out accord‐
ing to specifications, e.g., the tire has
not been sufficiently inflated.
The system has detected a wheel
change, but no reset was done.
The tire inflation pressure has fallen
below the level of the last reset.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Measure
1.
Check the tire pressure and correct as
needed.
2. Perform a system reset.
If the tire inflation pressure is too
low
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a tire inflation pressure loss.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Measure
1.
Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a
speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a gas
station, check the tire inflation pressure in all
four tires and correct if necessary.
3. Reset the system.
If there is a significant loss of tire
inflation pressure
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap‐
pears in a Check Control message on the Con‐
trol Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Measure
1.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐
mal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 303, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage
of a flat tire kit.
For tires with special approval: if the tire infla‐
tion pressure in all four tires is correct, the
TPM may not have been reset. In this case,
perform the reset.
Seite 313
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
313
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
If tire damage cannot be found, contact a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by
changing the wheel.
Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit,
may damage the TPM wheel electronics. Have
the electronics replaced at the next opportunity.
Run-flat tires
Safety information
Warning
Your vehicle handles differently with a run-flat
tire with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐
stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐
duced, braking distances are longer and the
self-steering properties will change. There is a
risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not
exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire at
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Follow the following when continuing to drive
with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires at the next opportunity.
For tires with special approval: if the tire infla‐
tion pressure in all four tires is correct, the
Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been re‐
set. In this case, perform the reset.
Possible driving range with a
depressurized tire
The distance for which it may be possible to
drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle
is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions,
external temperature. The driving range may be
less but may also be more if an economical driv‐
ing style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight
and used under favorable conditions, the dis‐
tance for which it may be safe to drive may be up
to 50 miles/80 km.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle
differently, potentially leading to conditions such
as the following:
▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course.
▷ Longer braking distances.
▷ Changed self-steering properties.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering
maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance
curbs or potholes.
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the
tire could come loose and cause an accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
System limits
Temperature
The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's
temperature.
Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the
tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire infla‐
tion pressure.
The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the
tire temperature falls again.
Seite 314
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
314
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
These circumstances may cause a warning
when temperatures fall very sharply.
Following a temperature-related warning, the tar‐
get pressures are displayed on the Control Dis‐
play again after a short distance.
Sudden tire pressure loss
The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire
damage caused by external circumstances.
Failure performing a reset
Tires with special approval: the system will not
function correctly if a reset was not performed,
for example a flat tire may be indicated although
the tire inflation pressures are correct.
Malfunction
Message
The yellow warning light flashes and is
then illuminated continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. It may not
be possible to identify tire pressure losses.
Measure
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is
mounted: have the wheels checked, if
needed.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leaving
the area of the interference, the system auto‐
matically becomes active again.
▷ For tires with special approval: the system
was unable to complete the reset. Perform a
system reset again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the vehi‐
cle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire in‐
flation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the ve‐
hicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pres‐
sure for those tires.) As an added safety feature,
your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pres‐
sure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of
your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord‐
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi‐
nates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi‐
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi‐
cle's handling and stopping ability. Please note
that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility
to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-
inflation has not reached the level to trigger illu‐
mination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐
mately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
function exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to de‐
tect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement
or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Al‐
ways check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your ve‐
hicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
Seite 315
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
315
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
Concept
The system detects tire inflation pressure loss
on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐
tween the individual wheels while driving.
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
the corresponding wheel changes. The differ‐
ence will be detected and reported as a flat tire.
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.
Functional requirements
The following conditions must be met for the
system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of
tire inflation pressure is not assured:
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, an initializa‐
tion was performed with the correct tire infla‐
tion pressure.
▷ After the tire pressure was adjusted to a new
value, an initialization was performed.
Status display
The current status of the flat tire monitor can be
displayed, for instance whether the RPA is active.
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Initialization required
An initialization must be performed in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been ad‐
justed.
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement.
Performing initialization
When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures
serve as reference values in order to detect a flat
tire. Initialization is started by confirming the tire
inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not drive
off.
5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset"
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
Messages
General information
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control is switched on, if needed.
Safety information
Warning
A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire
inflation pressure impacts handling, such as
steering and braking response. Run-flat tires
can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of
accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle
is equipped with normal tires. Follow the infor‐
mation on run-flat tires and continued driving
with these tires.
Seite 316
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
316
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Indication of a flat tire
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
Measure
1.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐
mal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 303, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
To do this, check the tire inflation pressure in
all four tires, for instance using the tire pres‐
sure gage of a flat tire kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
been initialized. In this case, initialize the sys‐
tem.
If identification of flat tire damage is not pos‐
sible, please contact a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
2.
Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by
changing the wheel.
Run-flat tires
Safety information
Warning
Your vehicle handles differently with a run-flat
tire with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐
stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐
duced, braking distances are longer and the
self-steering properties will change. There is a
risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not
exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire at
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Follow the following when continuing to drive
with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires at the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
been initialized. In this case, initialize the sys‐
tem.
Possible driving range with a
depressurized tire
The distance for which it may be possible to
drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle
is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions,
external temperature. The driving range may be
less but may also be more if an economical driv‐
ing style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight
and used under favorable conditions, the dis‐
tance for which it may be safe to drive may be up
to 50 miles/80 km.
Seite 317
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
317
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Vehicle handling with damaged tires
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle
differently, potentially leading to conditions such
as the following:
▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course.
▷ Longer braking distances.
▷ Changed self-steering properties.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering
maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance
curbs or potholes.
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the
tire could come loose and cause an accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
System limits
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷ A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in
all four tires will not be recognized. Therefore,
check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
▷ Sudden serious tire damage caused by exter‐
nal circumstances cannot be recognized in
advance.
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road sur‐
face.
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction wheels,
high lateral acceleration (drifting).
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Changing wheels/tires
General information
When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a wheel
does not always need to be changed immedi‐
ately when there is a loss of tire inflation pressure
due to a flat tire.
If needed, the tools for changing wheels are
available as accessories from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Safety information
DANGER
The vehicle jack is only provided for short-term
lifting of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if
all safety measures are observed, there is a risk
of the raised vehicle falling, if the vehicle jack
tips over. There is a risk of injuries or danger to
life. If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the
vehicle and do not start the engine.
DANGER
Supports such as wooden blocks under the ve‐
hicle jack reduce the capacity of the vehicle
jack to bear weight. They have the potential to
exert too much strain on the vehicle jack, caus‐
ing it to tip over and the vehicle to fall. There is
a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not place
supports under the vehicle jack.
Warning
The jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer, is
provided in order to perform a wheel change in
the event of a breakdown. The jack is not de‐
signed for frequent use; for example, changing
from summer to winter tires. Using the jack fre‐
quently may cause it to become jammed or
damaged. There is a risk of injury and risk of
damage to property. Only use the jack to attach
Seite 318
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
318
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
an emergency or spare wheel in the event of a
breakdown.
Warning
On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for example
snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip
away. There is a risk of injury. If possible,
change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-re‐
sistant surface.
Warning
The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting the vehi‐
cle and for the jacking points on the vehicle
only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any
other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle jack.
Warning
If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the jacking
point provided for this purpose, the vehicle may
be damaged or the vehicle jack may slip when
it is being cranked up. There is a risk of injury or
risk of damage to property. When cranking up
the vehicle jack, ensure that it is inserted in the
jacking point next to the wheel housing.
Warning
A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack may fall
off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on it.
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
property. While the vehicle is raised, do not ex‐
ert lateral forces on the vehicle or pull abruptly
on the vehicle. Have a stuck wheel removed by
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Securing the vehicle against
rolling
General information
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to addi‐
tionally secure the vehicle against rolling away
when changing a wheel.
On a level surface
Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in
front and behind the wheel that is diagonal to the
wheel to be changed.
On a slight downhill gradient
If you need to change a wheel on a slight down‐
hill grade, place chocks and other suitable ob‐
jects, for instance a rock, under the wheels of
both the front and rear axles against the rolling
direction.
Seite 319
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
319
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Lug bolt lock
Concept
The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The
lug bolts can only be released with the adapter
which matches the coding.
Overview
The adapter of the lug bolt lock is in the onboard
vehicle tool kit or in a storage compartment close
to the onboard vehicle tool kit.
▷ Lug bolt, arrow 1.
▷ Adapter, arrow 2.
Unscrewing
1.
Attach the adapter to the lug bolt.
2. Unscrew the lug bolt.
3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the lug
bolt.
Screwing on
1.
Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If neces‐
sary, turn the adapter until it fits on the lug
bolt.
2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tightening torque
is 140 Nm.
3. Remove the adapter and stow it after screw‐
ing on the lug bolt.
Preparing the vehicle
▷ Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip ground
at a safe distance from traffic.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ Engage a gear or move the selector lever to
position P.
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, have
all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle
and ensure that they remain outside the im‐
mediate area in a safe place, such as behind a
guardrail.
▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment, get
wheel change tools and, if necessary, the
emergency wheel from the vehicle.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or port‐
able hazard warning light at an appropriate
distance.
▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against rolling.
▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated at the indicated positions.
Seite 320
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
320
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Jacking up the vehicle
Warning
Hands and fingers can be jammed when using
the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury. Com‐
ply with the described hand position and do not
change this position while using the vehicle
jack.
1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, arrow 1,
and grasp the vehicle jack crank or lever with
your other hand, arrow 2.
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular re‐
cess of the jacking point closest to the wheel
to be changed.
3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehicle
jack crank or lever clockwise.
4. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack as
soon as the vehicle jack is under load and
continue turning the vehicle jack crank or
lever with one hand.
5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands
vertically and at a right angle beneath the
jacking point.
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands
vertically and perpendicularly beneath the
jacking point after extending the vehicle jack.
7. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle jack is
with the entire surface on the ground and the
relevant wheel is maximum 1.2 inches/3 cm
above ground.
Seite 321
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
321
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Mounting a wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only, as required.
1. Unscrew the lug bolts.
2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two lug bolts in a cross‐
wise pattern until hand-tight.
If non-original light-alloy wheels of the vehicle
manufacturer are mounted, the accompany‐
ing lug bolts may have to be used as well.
4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and
tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pat‐
tern.
5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counterclockwise
to retract the vehicle jack and lower the vehi‐
cle.
6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it securely.
After the wheel change
1.
Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tighten‐
ing torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo area,
if necessary.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored un‐
der the cargo floor panel because of its size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐
portunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the near‐
est dealer's service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Seite 322
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
322
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Overview
For a gasoline engine:
1 Filler neck for washer fluid
2 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal
3 Coolant reservoir, engine
4 Coolant reservoir, auxiliary cooling
5 Oil filler neck
6 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal
7 Vehicle identification number
Seite 323
Engine compartment
MOBILITY
323
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Hood
Safety information
Warning
Improperly executed work in the engine com‐
partment can damage vehicle components and
impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an
accident and damage to property. Have work in
the engine compartment performed by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Warning
The engine compartment accommodates mov‐
ing components. Certain components in the
engine compartment can also move with the
vehicle switched off, for instance the radiator
fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into
the area of moving parts. Keep articles of cloth‐
ing and hair away from moving parts.
Warning
There are protruding parts, for instance locking
hook, on the inside of the hood. There is a risk
of injury. If the hood is open, pay attention to
protruding parts and keep clear of these areas.
Warning
An incorrectly locked hood can open while driv‐
ing and restrict visibility. There is a risk of acci‐
dent. Stop immediately and correctly close the
hood.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when opening and
closing the hood. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the hood is
clear during opening and closing.
NOTICE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the
hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to
property. Make sure that the wipers with the
wiper blades mounted are folded down onto
the windshield before opening the hood.
NOTICE
When the hood is closed, it must engage on
both sides. Pressing again can damage the
hood. There is a risk of damage to property.
Open the hood again and then close it energet‐
ically. Avoid pressing again.
Opening
1.
Pull lever, arrow 1.
Hood is unlocked.
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever again,
arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
Seite 324
MOBILITY
Engine compartment
324
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Closing
Energetically close the hood from approx.
20 in/50 cm.
The hood must engage on both sides.
Seite 325
Engine compartment
MOBILITY
325
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Operating materials
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Fuel recommendation
General information
Depending on the region, many gas stations sell
fuel that has been customized to winter or
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in win‐
ter, for instance helps make a cold start easier.
Gasoline
General information
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used.
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 25 %,
i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refueling.
Ethanol should meet the following quality stan‐
dards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
Safety information
CAUTION
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐
ally, problems relating to drivability, starting and
stalling, especially under certain environmental
conditions such as high ambient temperature
and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur‐
chase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled mainte‐
nance.
NOTICE
Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or
wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel sys‐
tem and engine. Furthermore, the catalytic
converter is permanently damaged. There is a
risk of damage to property. Do not refuel or add
the following in the case of gasoline engines:
▷ Leaded gasoline.
▷ Metallic additives, for instance manganese
or iron.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Seite 326
MOBILITY
Operating materials
326
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
NOTICE
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system and
the engine. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Do not use fuels with a higher percentage
of ethanol than recommended. Do not refuel
with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5 to
M100.
NOTICE
Fuel that does not comply with the minimum
quality can compromise engine function or
cause engine damage. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not fill with fuel that does
not comply with the minimum quality.
Recommended fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 91.
Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 89.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating,
the engine may produce knocking sounds when
starting at high external temperatures. This has
no effect on the engine life.
Engine oil
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
your driving style and driving conditions.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level af‐
ter refueling by taking a detailed measurement.
The engine oil consumption can increase in the
following situations, for instance:
▷ Sporty driving style.
▷ Break-in of the engine.
▷ Idling of the engine.
▷ With use of engine oil types that are classified
as not suitable.
Different Check Control messages appear on the
Control Display depending on the engine oil
level.
Safety information
NOTICE
An engine oil level that is too low causes en‐
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Immediately add engine oil.
NOTICE
Too much engine oil can damage the engine or
the catalytic converter. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not add too much engine
oil. When too much engine oil is added, have
the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Electronic oil measurement
General information
The electronic oil measurement has two measur‐
ing principles:
▷ Monitoring.
▷ Detailed measurement.
When making frequent short-distance trips or
using a dynamic driving style, for instance when
taking curves aggressively, regularly perform a
detailed measurement.
Seite 327
Operating materials
MOBILITY
327
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Monitoring
Concept
The engine oil level is monitored electronically
while driving and can be shown on the Control
Display.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed.
A red indicator light indicates that the en‐
gine oil pressure is too low.
Functional requirements
A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of normal driving.
Displaying the engine oil level
Via iDrive:
1.
"CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
System limits
When making frequent short-distance trips or
using a dynamic driving style, it may not be pos‐
sible to calculate a measured value. In this case,
the measured value for the last, sufficiently long
trip is displayed.
Detailed measurement
Concept
The engine oil level is checked when the vehicle
is stationary and displayed via a scale.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed.
General information
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
creased somewhat.
Functional requirements
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ Selector lever in selector lever position N or P
and accelerator pedal not depressed.
▷ Engine is running and is at operating temper‐
ature.
Performing a detailed measurement
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
4. "Engine oil measurement"
5. "Start measurement"
The engine oil level is checked and displayed via
a scale.
Adding engine oil
General information
Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. The quantity to
be added is indicated in the message shown on
the Control Display.
Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer to
page 329.
Safely park the vehicle and switch off drive-ready
state before adding engine oil.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Safety information
Warning
Operating materials, for instance oils, greases,
coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredients.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Fol‐
low the instructions on the containers. Avoid
the contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes
with operating materials. Do not refill operating
Seite 328
MOBILITY
Operating materials
328
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
materials into different bottles. Store operating
materials out of reach of children.
NOTICE
An engine oil level that is too low causes en‐
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Immediately add engine oil.
NOTICE
Too much engine oil can damage the engine or
the catalytic converter. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not add too much engine
oil. When too much engine oil is added, have
the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Overview
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐
partment, refer to page 323.
Adding engine oil
1.
Open the hood, refer to page 324.
2. Open the lid counterclockwise.
3. Add engine oil.
4. Close the lid.
Engine oil types to add
General information
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
engine.
Only add the types of engine oil which are listed.
Safety information
NOTICE
Oil additives can damage the engine. There is a
risk of damage to property. Do not use oil addi‐
tives.
NOTICE
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunctions in
the engine or damage it. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. When selecting an engine oil,
make sure that the engine oil has the correct oil
rating.
Suitable engine oil types
Add engine oils that meet the following oil rating
standards:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
BMW Longlife-14 FE+.
BMW Longlife-17 FE+.
The BMW Longlife-14 FE+ and BMW Long‐
life-17 FE+ oil ratings are not suitable for the 50i
gasoline engine.
Alternative engine oil types
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not
available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil
with the following oil rating can be added:
Seite 329
Operating materials
MOBILITY
329
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Oil rating
API SL.
API SM.
API SN.
Viscosity grades
Viscosity grades
SAE 0W-20.
SAE 0W-30.
The viscosity grade SAE 0W-20 is not suitable
for gasoline engine 50i.
More information about suitable oil ratings and
viscosity grades of engine oils can be requested
from a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Engine oil change
NOTICE
Engine oil that is not changed in timely fashion
can cause increased engine wear and thus en‐
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not exceed the service data indi‐
cated in the vehicle.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you
have a dealer's service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop change the en‐
gine oil.
Coolant
General information
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are suita‐
ble for the vehicle. Information about suitable ad‐
ditives is available from a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Safety information
Warning
With the engine hot and the cooling system
open, coolant can escape and lead to scalding.
There is a risk of injury. Only open the cooling
system with the engine cooled down.
Warning
Additives are harmful and incorrect additives
can damage the engine. There is a risk of injury
and risk of damage to property. Do not allow
additives to come into contact with skin, eyes
or articles of clothing. Use suitable additives
only.
Coolant level
General information
Vehicles with gasoline engine feature two cool‐
ing circuits. Always check the coolant levels of
both coolant reservoirs and refill as needed.
The coolant level is indicated using minimum
and maximum markings in the filler neck of the
coolant reservoir.
Depending on the engine installation, the coolant
reservoir is located on the right side or the left
side of the engine compartment, refer to
page 323.
Seite 330
MOBILITY
Operating materials
330
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Checking the coolant level
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Open the hood, refer to page 324.
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
sure to dissipate, then open it.
4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
5. The coolant level is correct if it lies between
the minimum and maximum marks in the filler
neck.
6. Close the lid.
Adding
1.
Let the engine cool.
2. Open the hood, refer to page 324.
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
sure to dissipate, then open it.
4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
5. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level; do not overfill.
6. Close the lid.
7. Have the cause of the coolant loss eliminated
as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmental
protection regulations when disposing of
coolant and coolant additives.
Washer fluid
General information
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐
voir.
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield
washer concentrate containing antifreeze can be
used.
Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Safety information
Warning
Some antifreeze agents can contain harmful
substances and are flammable. There is a risk
of fire and a risk of injury. Follow the instruc‐
tions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away
from ignition sources. Do not refill operating
materials into different bottles. Store operating
materials out of reach of children.
United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid
dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage
instructions on the washer fluid container.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concentrate
or the equivalent is recommended.
Warning
Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on con‐
tact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of in‐
jury or risk of damage to property. Only add
washer fluid when the engine is cooled down.
Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐
ervoir.
Seite 331
Operating materials
MOBILITY
331
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
NOTICE
Silicon-containing additives in the washer fluid
for the water-repelling effect on the windows
can lead to damage to the washing system.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
add silicon-containing additives to the washer
fluid.
NOTICE
Mixing different windshield washer concen‐
trates or antifreeze can damage the washing
system. There is a risk of damage to property.
Do not mix different windshield washer concen‐
trates or antifreeze. Follow the information and
mixing ratios provided on the containers.
Overview
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐
gine compartment.
Malfunction
The use of undiluted windshield washer concen‐
trate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead to in‐
correct readings at temperatures below
+5 ℉/-15 ℃.
Seite 332
MOBILITY
Operating materials
332
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Maintenance
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
BMW maintenance system
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides
support in maintaining road safety and the opera‐
tional reliability of the vehicle.
In some cases, scopes and intervals of the main‐
tenance system may vary according to the coun‐
try version. Replacement work, spare parts, fuels
and lubricants, and wear materials are calculated
separately. Further information is available from a
dealer's service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
Condition Based Service
CBS
Concept
Sensors and special algorithms take into account
the driving conditions of the vehicle. CBS uses
these to calculate the need for maintenance.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance corresponding to your
user profile.
General information
Information on service requirements, refer to
page 149, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Service data in the remote
control
Information on the required maintenance is con‐
tinuously stored in the remote control. The serv‐
ice center can read this data out and suggest a
maintenance scope for the vehicle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
control with which the vehicle was driven most
recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle battery
was disconnected are not taken into account.
If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop
update the time-dependent maintenance proce‐
dures, such as checking brake fluid and, if neces‐
sary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for
additional information on service requirements.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that maintenance and repair be performed by a
service center or another qualified service center
Seite 333
Maintenance
MOBILITY
333
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
or repair shop. Records of regular maintenance
and repair work should be retained.
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
General information
Devices connected to the OBD socket trigger
the alarm system when the vehicle is locked. Re‐
move any devices connected at the OBD socket
before locking the vehicle.
Safety information
NOTICE
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an intri‐
cate component intended to be used in con‐
junction with specialized equipment to check
the vehicle’s primary emissions system. Im‐
proper use of the socket for Onboard Diagno‐
sis, or contact with the socket for Onboard Di‐
agnosis for other than its intended purpose,
can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates
risks of personal and property damage. Given
the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the socket
for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop or other persons that have
the specialized training and equipment for pur‐
poses of properly utilizing the socket for On‐
board Diagnosis.
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning light lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have the
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive misfiring
in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious
engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐
ously damage emission control components,
in particular the catalytic converter.
Seite 334
MOBILITY
Maintenance
334
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Replacing components
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Vehicle tool kit
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located in the left
storage compartment of the cargo area.
Wiper blades
Safety information
NOTICE
The window may sustain damage if the wiper
falls onto it without the wiper blade installed.
There is a risk of damage to property. Hold the
wiper firmly when changing the wiper blade. Do
not fold or switch on the wiper without a wiper
blade installed.
NOTICE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the
hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to
property. Make sure that the wipers with the
wiper blades mounted are folded down onto
the windshield before opening the hood.
Replacing the front wiper blades
1.
To change the wiper blades, fold up the wiper
arms, refer to page 136.
2. Lift the wiper all the way off of the windshield.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
wiper blade, arrow 2.
4. Insert the new wiper blade and press it on un‐
til it you hear it snap into the holder.
5. Fold down the wipers.
Seite 335
Replacing components
MOBILITY
335
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Lights and bulbs
General information
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution
to vehicle safety.
All headlights and lights are made using LED or
laser technology.
Some items of equipment use light-emitting di‐
odes installed behind a cover as a light source.
These light-emitting diodes are related to con‐
ventional lasers and are officially designated as
Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you let a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop perform
the work in case of a malfunction.
Safety information
Warning
Focused laser light can irritate or permanently
damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of
injury. The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐
mends that the work on the lighting system in‐
cluding bulb replacement be performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Warning
Intensive brightness can irritate or damage the
retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do not
look directly into the headlights or other light
sources. Do not remove the LED covers.
Headlight glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the
headlight glass in cool or humid weather. When
driving with the lights switched on, the conden‐
sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐
light glass does not need to be changed.
If despite driving with the headlights switched on,
increasing humidity forms, for instance water
droplets in the light, have the headlights
checked.
Vehicle battery
General information
The battery is maintenance-free.
More information about the battery can be re‐
quested from a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Safety information
Register the battery to the
vehicle
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you have a service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop register the ve‐
hicle battery to the vehicle after the battery has
been replaced. Once the battery has been regis‐
tered again, all comfort features will be available
without restriction and any Check Control mes‐
sages displayed which relate to comfort features
will disappear.
Charging the battery
General information
Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently
charged to guarantee that the battery remains
usable for its full service life.
A discharged battery is indicated by a red
indicator light.
Charge the battery in the following situations:
▷ When the inspection glass on the top of the
battery is black.
▷ When the take-off performance is insufficient.
The following circumstances can have a negative
effect on the performance of the battery:
Seite 336
MOBILITY
Replacing components
336
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ Frequent short-distance drives.
▷ The vehicle is not used for more than a
month.
Safety information
Charging the battery
Charge the battery only when the engine is off
and via the starting aid terminals, refer to
page 341, in the engine compartment.
Power failure
After a power loss, some equipment needs to be
newly initialized or individual settings updated, for
example:
▷ Memory function: store the positions again.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop or take
them to a collection point.
Maintain the filled battery in an upright position
for transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Safety information
Warning
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload elec‐
trical lines and components. There is a risk of
fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do
not replace a nonworking fuse with a substitute
of another color or amperage rating.
Accessing the fuses
The fuses are located in the cargo area on the
right side behind a cover.
Remove the cover.
Information on the fuse types and locations, as
well as the positions of any other fuse boxes, is
available on the Internet: www.bmw.com/fuse‐
card.
Where applicable, information on the fuse types
and locations is also found on a separate sheet in
the fuse box.
Replacing fuses
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you
have a dealer's service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop replace the
fuses.
Seite 337
Replacing components
MOBILITY
337
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located in the center console.
The red light in the button flashes when the haz‐
ard warning flashers are activated.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located in the cargo area.
Release the Velcro® fastener to remove it.
First-aid kit
General information
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents regu‐
larly and replace any expired items promptly.
Storage
The first-aid kit is located in the left storage com‐
partment of the cargo area.
Seite 338
MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
338
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
BMW Roadside Assistance
Concept
Contact the BMW Group Roadside Assistance if
assistance is needed in the event of a break‐
down.
General information
In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehi‐
cle's condition is transmitted to the BMW Road‐
side Assistance.
There are various ways of contacting BMW
Roadside Assistance.
▷ Via a Check Control message, refer to
page 145.
▷ Calling with a mobile phone.
▷ Via the BMW Connected app.
Functional requirements
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment
version with Intelligent emergency call or
BMW ConnectedDrive services.
▷ Cellular network reception.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
Starting
If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices, sup‐
port is offered through Teleservice Diagnosis.
Via iDrive:
1.
"COM"
2. "BMW Assist"
3. If necessary, "BMW Roadside Assistance"
A voice connection is established.
Teleservice Diagnosis
Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that is im‐
portant for vehicle diagnosis. This data is trans‐
mitted automatically. It may be necessary to ap‐
prove this on the Control Display.
Teleservice Help
Depending on the country, Teleservice Help en‐
ables an in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle by
BMW Roadside Assistance via wireless trans‐
mission.
You can launch Teleservice Help by requesting it
through BMW Roadside Assistance.
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Control Display is switched on.
4. Confirm Teleservice Help.
BMW Accident Assistance
Concept
BMW Group Accident Assistance can be con‐
tacted if assistance is needed in the event of an
accident.
General information
If the vehicle sensors detect a minor to moder‐
ately severe accident, which did not trigger any
airbags, a Check Control message appears on
the instrument cluster. In addition, a text mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display.
When BMW Accident Assistance is activated,
data on the vehicle's condition is sent to BMW.
Functional requirements
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment
version with Intelligent emergency call or
BMW ConnectedDrive services.
▷ Cellular network reception.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
Seite 339
Breakdown assistance
MOBILITY
339
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Starting BMW Accident
Assistance
If an accident is detected
automatically
A text message relating to BMW Accident Assis‐
tance appears on the Control Display.
The connection can be established directly:
"Call BMW Accident Assistance"
The Check Control message for BMW Accident
Assistance can also be called up from the stored
Check Control messages, refer to page 145, for
a certain length of time.
Starting manually
BMW Accident Assistance can also be con‐
tacted independently of the automatic accident
detection function.
Via iDrive:
1.
"COM"
2. "BMW Assist"
3. "Call BMW Accident Assistance"
Follow the displays on the Control Display. A
voice connection is established.
Emergency Request
Intelligent emergency call
Concept
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐
quest can be triggered automatically by the sys‐
tem or manually.
General information
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
The Intelligent Assist system establishes a con‐
nection with the BMW Response Center.
For technical reasons, the Emergency Request
cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable condi‐
tions.
Overview
SOS button.
Functional requirements
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ The Assist system is functional.
▷ If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent
emergency call: the SIM card integrated in
the vehicle has been activated.
Automatic triggering
Under certain conditions, for instance if the air‐
bags trigger, an Emergency Request is automati‐
cally initiated immediately after an accident of
corresponding severity. Automatic Collision Noti‐
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS but‐
ton.
Manual triggering
1.
Tap the cover.
2. Press and hold the SOS button until the LED
in the area of the button illuminates green.
▷ The LED is illuminated green when an Emer‐
gency Request has been initiated.
If a cancel prompt appears on the Control
Display, the Emergency Request can be
aborted.
Seite 340
MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
340
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until
the voice connection has been established.
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection to
the BMW Response Center has been estab‐
lished.
The BMW Response Center then makes
contact with you and takes further steps to
help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW
Response Center can take further steps to
help you under certain circumstances.
For this, data is transmitted to the BMW Re‐
sponse Center which serves to determine the
necessary rescue measures. For instance,
the current position of the vehicle, if it can be
established.
Even if you can no longer hear the BMW Re‐
sponse Center through the loudspeakers, the
BMW Response Center may still be able to
hear you.
The BMW Response Center ends the Emer‐
gency Request.
Jump-starting
General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle and
two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with
fully insulated clamp handles.
Safety information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to an
electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐
ger to life. Do not touch any components that
are under voltage.
Warning
If the jumper cables are connected in the incor‐
rect order, sparking may occur. There is a risk
of injury. Pay attention to the correct order dur‐
ing connection.
NOTICE
In the case of body contact between the two
vehicles, a short circuit can occur during jump-
starting. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that no body contact occurs.
Preparation
1.
Check whether the battery of the other vehi‐
cle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage in‐
formation can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power con‐
sumers in both vehicles.
Starting aid terminals
The starting aid terminal in the engine compart‐
ment acts as the battery's positive terminal.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
Seite 341
Breakdown assistance
MOBILITY
341
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
A special connection on the body acts as the
battery negative terminal.
Connecting the cables
Before you begin, switch off all unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers, such as
the radio, on the assisting and receiving vehicle.
1.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of
the cable to the positive terminal of the bat‐
tery, or to the corresponding starting aid ter‐
minal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding engine or
body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the neg‐
ative terminal of the battery, or to the corre‐
sponding engine or body ground of the vehi‐
cle to be started.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1.
Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and
let it run for several minutes at an increased
idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before making another at‐
tempt in order to allow the discharged battery
to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order.
Check the battery and recharge, if needed.
Tow-starting and towing
Safety information
Warning
Due to system limits, individual functions can
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
Transporting the vehicle
General information
The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Safety information
NOTICE
The vehicle can be damaged when towing the
vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is a risk of
damage to property. The vehicle should only be
transported on a loading platform.
NOTICE
The vehicle can become damaged when lifting
and securing it.
There is a risk of damage to property.
▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
Seite 342
MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
342
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.
Pushing the vehicle
To remove a broken-down vehicle from the dan‐
ger area, it can be pushed for a short distance.
For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
page 138.
Tow truck
The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform.
Towing other vehicles
General information
Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐
ing on local regulations.
If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify
the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a
warning triangle in the rear window.
Safety information
Warning
If the approved gross vehicle weight of the tow‐
ing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be
towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will not
be possible to control the vehicle's response.
There is a risk of accident. Make sure that the
gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is
heavier than the vehicle to be towed.
NOTICE
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached incor‐
rectly, damage to other vehicle parts can occur.
There is a risk of damage to property. Correctly
attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting.
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the
tow bar at an offset angle, please follow the fol‐
lowing:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is
secured with an offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that
the tow rope is taut.
Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable the
vehicle to be towed without jerking.
Tow fitting
General information
The screw-in tow fitting should always be carried
in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or
rear of the vehicle.
The tow fitting is found in the onboard vehicle
tool kit, refer to page 335.
Seite 343
Breakdown assistance
MOBILITY
343
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the ve‐
hicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads
only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for in‐
stance do not lift the vehicle by the tow fit‐
ting.
Safety information
NOTICE
If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there
may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow fit‐
ting. There is a risk of damage to property. Fol‐
low the notes on using the tow fitting.
Screw thread for tow fitting
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to
push it out.
For covers which have an opening instead of a
marking, pull the cover out by the opening.
Tow-starting
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Start the engine by jump-starting, refer to
page 341, if possible.
Have the reasons for the starting difficulties cor‐
rected by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 344
MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
344
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Care
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Washing the vehicle
General information
Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves
in the area below the windshield when the hood
is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win‐
ter. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the
vehicle.
Steam blaster and high-pressure
washer
Safety information
NOTICE
When cleaning with high-pressure washers,
components can be damaged due to the pres‐
sure or temperatures being too high. There is a
risk of damage to property. Maintain sufficient
distance and do not spray too long continu‐
ously. Follow the operating instructions for the
high-pressure washer.
Distances and temperature
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
Automatic vehicle washes
Safety information
NOTICE
Water can penetrate in the windshield area due
to high-pressure washers. There is a risk of
damage to property. Avoid high-pressure
washers.
NOTICE
Improper use of automatic vehicle washes can
cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of
damage to property. Follow the following in‐
structions:
▷ Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
▷ Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails
higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to
the chassis.
▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to
avoid damage to tires and rims.
▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to
the exterior mirrors.
▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain
sensor to avoid damage to the wiper sys‐
tem.
▷ Do not treat the convertible top with wax.
Ensure that a cycle without wax or a spe‐
cial cycle for convertibles is available to
avoid damage to the convertible top.
Seite 345
Care
MOBILITY
345
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Driving into a vehicle wash with a
Steptronic transmission
Safety information
NOTICE
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐
gaged when standby state is switched off.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
switch standby state off in vehicle washes.
General information
In a vehicle wash, the vehicle must be able to roll
freely.
To roll or push the vehicle, refer to page 138.
Some vehicle washes do not permit persons in
the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from
the outside when in selector lever position N. A
signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock
the vehicle.
Driving out of a vehicle wash
Make sure that the remote control is in the vehi‐
cle.
Switch on drive-ready state, refer to page 42.
Headlights
Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use
abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance
from insects, with shampoo and wash off with
water.
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice
scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can
be reduced. The heat generated during braking
dries brake discs and brake pads and protects
them against corrosion.
Completely remove all residues on the windows,
to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and
to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear.
Vehicle care
Vehicle care products
General information
BMW recommends using vehicle care and
cleaning products from BMW. Suitable care
products are available from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Safety information
Warning
Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐
gerous and harmful to your health. There is a
risk of injury. When cleaning the interior, open
the doors or windows. Only use products in‐
tended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the in‐
structions on the container.
Vehicle paint
General information
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can affect
the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the frequency and
extent of your vehicle care to these influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
mediately to prevent the finish from being altered
or discolored.
Seite 346
MOBILITY
Care
346
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Safety information
Warning
Improperly performed work on the vehicle paint
can lead to a failure or malfunction of the radar
sensors and thereby result in a safety risk.
There may be a risk of accident or risk of dam‐
age to property. Have paintwork or paintwork
repairs on bumpers of vehicles with radar sen‐
sors performed by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop
only.
Matte finish
Only use cleaning and care products suitable for
vehicles with matte finish.
Caring for the convertible top
General information
The appearance and life of the convertible top
depend on correct care and operation
Follow the following instructions:
▷ Clean roofliner with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if
needed.
▷ Do not soak the roofliner.
▷ To avoid water stains, spots of mold, and
chafe marks, do not keep the convertible top
enclosed in its case for a long period of time.
Do not fold up the convertible top or stow it in
its case if it is wet or frozen.
▷ Remove any water stains that have appeared
on the roofliner using a microfiber cloth and
an interior cleaner.
▷ When the vehicle is parked in enclosed areas
for lengthy periods, ensure that the area is
well ventilated.
▷ Park the vehicle in the shade to protect it
from intensive solar radiation so that color,
rubber, and fabric are not affected.
▷ Remove bird droppings immediately as their
corrosive effect will otherwise attack the
convertible top and damage the rubber seals.
▷ Hard to remove tree sap or bird droppings
can be removed from the convertible top with
special tree sap remover and a soft brush.
Safety information
NOTICE
Spot remover, paint thinner, solvents, gasoline
or similar can damage the convertible top or the
rubber coating. There is a risk of damage to
property. To remove spots on the convertible
top, use only suitable cleaning agents, for in‐
stance special convertible top cleaning agent.
Cleaning the convertible top
To remove heavy soiling, especially for light col‐
ored convertible tops, use a special convertible
top cleaner.
Proceed as follows when cleaning:
1.
Spray the convertible top with the convertible
top cleaner. Follow the manufacturer's in‐
structions.
2. Make the convertible top cleaner foam up us‐
ing a well saturated sponge, moving it in cir‐
cular motions.
3. Rinse vehicle with ample amounts of water or
finish washing the vehicle in the vehicle wash.
Follow notes regarding automatic washing
systems or vehicle washes.
Treat the convertible top with an impregnating
agent after it has been washed three to five
times.
Suitable cleaning agents and care products are
available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather regularly, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Seite 347
Care
MOBILITY
347
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe
in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear
and premature degradation of the leather sur‐
face.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care
roughly every two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Upholstery material care
General information
Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vacuum
cleaner.
If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with bever‐
age stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth
with a suitable interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐
terial vigorously.
Safety information
NOTICE
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of clothing
can damage the seat covers. There is a risk of
damage to property. Ensure that any Velcro®
fasteners are closed.
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do
not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets
above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can
destroy the protective layer of adjacent compo‐
nents, such as the brake disc.
After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry
them. The heat generated during braking dries
brake discs and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean Chrome surfaces, especially in
case of exposure to road salt, with plenty of wa‐
ter and added cleanser as needed.
Rubber components
Environmental influences can cause surface soil‐
ing of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use only
water and suitable cleaning agents for cleaning.
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
vehicle care products in order to avoid damage
or noises.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft
cloth.
Plastic components
NOTICE
Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such
as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease remov‐
ers, fuel, or such, can damage plastic parts.
There is a risk of damage to property. Clean
with a microfiber cloth. Dampen the cloth lightly
with water, if needed.
Plastic components are e.g.:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Roofliner.
▷ Light lenses.
Seite 348
MOBILITY
Care
348
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
▷ Matt black spray-coated components.
▷ Painted parts in the car's interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if needed.
Do not soak the roofliner.
Safety belts
Warning
Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety belt
webbing. Missing protective effect of the safety
belts. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the
safety belts.
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the
installed belt straps.
Safety belts should only be allowed to retract if
they are dry.
Carpets and floor mats
Warning
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the
pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the
vehicle such that they are secured and cannot
enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats
that are suitable for the vehicle and can be
safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose
floor mats and do not layer several floor mats.
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for
the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are se‐
curely fastened again after they were removed,
for instance for cleaning.
The floor mats can be removed from the car's in‐
terior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a mi‐
crofiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To
prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth
in the direction of travel only.
Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth
moistened with a small amount of glass deter‐
gent.
Displays, screens, and protective
glass of the Head-up Display
NOTICE
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of any
kind can damage the surface of displays and
screens. There is a risk of damage to property.
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
NOTICE
The surface of displays can be damaged with
improper cleaning. There is a risk of damage to
property. Avoid pressure that is too high and do
not use any scratching materials.
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
Clean the protective glass of the Head-up Dis‐
play, refer to page 155, using a microfiber cloth
and commercially available dish-washing soap.
Long-term vehicle storage
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
three months, special measures must be taken.
Further information is available from a dealer's
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
Seite 349
Care
MOBILITY
349
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
350
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
REFERENCE
Technical data .......................................................................................... 352
Appendix ................................................................................................... 354
Everything from A to Z ............................................................................ 356
351
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Technical data
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
General information
The technical data and specifications in the
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values.
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this,
for instance due to the selected special equip‐
ment, country version or country-specific meas‐
urement method. Detailed values can be found in
the approval documents, on labels on the vehicle
or can be obtained from a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the
model version, equipment or country-specific
measurement method.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, for instance a roof antenna, roof
racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, for in‐
stance due to the selected special equipment,
tires, load and chassis version.
BMW 8 Series Convertible
Width with mirrors in/mm 84.1/2,137
Width without mirrors in/mm 74.9/1,902
Height in/mm 53/1,345
Length in/mm 191.2/4,856
Wheelbase in/mm 111.1/2,822
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 39.0/11.9
Seite 352
REFERENCE
Technical data
352
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Weights
M850i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,545/2,515
Load lbs/kg 772/350
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,723/1,235
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,954/1,340
Capacities
BMW 8 Series Convertible
Fuel tank, approx.
US gal/liters 18.0/68.0
Observe further information on fuel quality, refer
to page 326.
Seite 353
Technical data
REFERENCE
353
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Appendix
General information
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the vehi‐
cle are listed here.
Updates made after the
editorial deadline
The following chapters were updated in the
printed version of the Owner's Manual after the
editorial deadline for the Integrated Owner's
Manual in the vehicle had closed:
▷ Safe transport of children: Receptacles for
lower LATCH anchors: Position, refer to
page 123.
▷ Safety: Emergency stop assistant, refer to
page 199.
▷ Convertible top: Manually closing the
convertible top, refer to page 103.
Seite 354
REFERENCE
Appendix
354
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Seite 355
Appendix
REFERENCE
355
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
A/C button, see Air conditioning 255
ABS, Antilock Brake System 203
Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Control 141
Accessories and parts 10
Accident Assistance 339
ACC, see Active Cruise Control 211
Activated charcoal filter 258
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function
ACC 211
Active damping control, see Adaptive suspen‐
sion 251
Active Guard Plus, see Intelligent Safety 170
Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 170
Active M sport differential 206
Active PDC, see Emergency brake function 230
Active roll stabilization 251
Active seat ventilation 118
Active Steering, integral 206
Adaptive brake assistant 203
Adaptive Light Control 160
Adaptive M suspension Professional 251
ADAPTIVE, see Driving Dynamics Control 130
Adaptive suspension 251
Additives, engine oil types 329
Airbags 166
Airbags, indicator and warning light 167
Air circulation, see Recirculated-air mode 257
Air collar 117
Air conditioning 255
Air distribution, manual 257
Air flow, automatic climate control 257
Air outlets, see Ventilation 258
Air pressure, tires 296
Alarm system 97
Alarm, unintentional 99
All-season tires, see Winter tires 302
All-wheel-drive, see xDrive 205
Ambient light 163
Animal detection, see Night Vision 185
Antifreeze, see Washer fluid 331
Antilock Brake System, ABS 203
Anti-slip control, see DSC 203
Anti-theft protection, see Lug bolt lock 320
Apple CarPlay preparation, connection to the ve‐
hicle 68
Approach control warning with City braking func‐
tion 172
Approved axle load 353
Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐
tertainment, Communication 8
Armrest heating 116
Ashtray 268
Assistance when driving off, see Drive-off assis‐
tant 203
Assistance with breakdown 338
AUC Automatic Recirculating Air Control 256
Audio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communication 8
AUTO H button, see Parking brake 130
Automatic climate control 253
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror 114
Automatic deactivation, front-seat passenger air‐
bags 168
Automatic headlight control 158
Automatic Hold, see Parking brake 130
Automatic locking 97
Automatic Recirculating Air Control AUC 256
Automatic Soft Closing 91
Automatic transmission, see Steptronic trans‐
mission 137
Automatic unlocking 97
Automatic vehicle wash 345
AUTO program, automatic climate control 255
AUTO program, intensity 256
Auto Start/Stop function 125
Average consumption, see Trip data 153
Axle loads, weights 353
Seite 356
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
356
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
B
Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 109
Backrest, seats 108
Backrest tilt 109
Backrest, width 110
Back-up assistant, see Parking Assistant 241
Bandages, see First-aid kit 338
Bar for tow-starting/towing 343
Battery changing, remote control of the vehi‐
cle 75
Battery, disposing of 337
Battery, vehicle 336
Being towed, see Tow-starting and towing 342
Belts, see Safety belts 111
Beverage holder, see Cup holders 273
Blind spot collision warning 192
Bluetooth connection 65
Blu-ray, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 8
BMW Assist, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication 8
BMW Digital Key 86
BMW display key 77
BMW display key, malfunction 80
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant 54
BMW maintenance system 333
Bonus range, ECO PRO 289
Bottle holder, see Cup holders 273
Brake assistant 203
Brake assistant, adaptive 203
Brake discs, see Brake system 282
Brake pads, see Brake system 282
Brake system 282
Braking, information 284
Breakdown assistance 338, 339
Breakdown, see FTM Flat Tire Monitor 316
Breaking in 282
Break recommendation, see Fatigue alert 201
Brightness, Control Display 63
Buttons on the steering wheel 36
Button, SOS, see Intelligent emergency call 340
Button, Start/Stop 125
Bypassing, see Jump-starting 341
C
Cable for tow-starting/towing 343
Calendar, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 8
California Proposition 65 Warning 11
Camera-based assistance systems, see Intelli‐
gent Safety 170
Camera lenses, care 349
Camera, rearview camera, without Surround
View 232
Camera, see Surround View 234
CANCEL button, see Active Cruise Control 211
CANCEL button, see Cruise control 209
Can holder, see Cup holders 273
Care, Head-up Display 349
Care of displays, screens 349
Care, see Washing the vehicle 345
Care, vehicle 346
Cargo area 275
Cargo area, enlarging 277
Cargo area partition 103
Cargo, stowing and securing 276
Cargo straps, see Lashing eyes in the cargo
area 276
Carpet, care 349
CarPlay, connection to the vehicle 68
Car seats, see Transporting children safely 120
Car washing 345
Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas sys‐
tem 283
CBS Condition Based Service 333
Cell phone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication 8
Center armrest 273
Center armrest, front 273
Center console 38
Central Information Display (CID), see Control
Display 47
Central locking system 82
Central screen, see Control Display 47
Changes, technical, see For Your Own
Safety 10
Changing parts 335
Changing wheels 318
Changing wheels/tires 301
Seite 357
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
357
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Chassis number, see Vehicle identification num‐
ber 15
Check Control 144
Checking the engine oil level electronically 327
Children, seating position 120
Children, transporting safely 120
Child restraint system LATCH 122
Child restraint systems, mounting 121
Child restraint systems, see Transporting chil‐
dren safely 120
Child seat, mounting 121
Child seats, see Transporting children
safely 120
Chrome-plated surfaces, care 348
Chrome surfaces, care 348
Cigarette lighter 269
Cigarette lighter, front 269
Cleaning displays, screens 349
Cleaning, Head-up Display 349
Climate control 253
Coasting 289
Coasting with engine decoupled, see Coast‐
ing 289
Coasting with idling engine 289
Combination switch, see Turn signals 133
Combination switch, see Washer/wiper sys‐
tem 134
Comfort Access 82
COMFORT, see Driving Dynamics Control 128
Communication, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment and Communication 8
Comparison of entries, see Entry comparison 45
Compartments, doors 273
Compatible devices, see Suitable devices 65
Compressor 304
Concierge Service, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Condensation water under the parked vehi‐
cle 285
Condensation, windshield 258
Condition Based Service CBS 333
Confirmation signal from the vehicle 96
ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment and Communication 8
Connecting a mobile phone 64
Connecting device 64
Connecting, electrical devices, see Sockets 269
Connecting, mobile devices 64
Connections, Screen Mirroring 69
Consumption display, ECO PRO 289
Consumption display, widget in the instrument
cluster 144
Consumption, see Current consumption 144
Consumption, see Trip data 153
Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 8
Container for washer fluid 331
Continued driving with a flat tire 314, 317
Control Display 47
Control Display, settings 59
Controller 47
Control systems, driving stability 203
Convenient closing, remote control 74
Convenient opening, remote control 73
Convertible, convertible top 100
Convertible mode, automatic climate con‐
trol 256
Convertible program, automatic climate con‐
trol 256
Convertible, roof 100
Convertible top 100
Convertible top, cargo area partition 103
Convertible top, rollover protection system 169
Convertible, wind deflector 105
Coolant 330
Coolant level 330
Coolant temperature 148
Cooling, maximum 255
Cooling system 330
Cornering light 161
Corrosion on brake discs 284
Cosmetic mirror 268
Cross traffic warning 248
Cruise control 209
Cruise control, active with Stop&Go func‐
tion 211
Cruise control, see Active Cruise Control 211
Cruise control with distance control, see Active
Cruise Control with Stop&Go function 211
Cruise control without distance control, see
Cruise control 209
Cruising range 149
Seite 358
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
358
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Cup holder 273
Cup holder, front 273
Current consumption 144
D
Damage, tires 300
Damping control, active, see Adaptive suspen‐
sion 251
Data memory 12
Data protection, settings 63
Data, see Deleting personal data 63
Data, technical 352
Date 60
Daytime running lights 160
DCC, see Cruise control 209
Defrosting, see Defrosting windshield 258
Defrosting, windshield 258
Deleting personal data 63
Departure time, parked-car ventilation 260
Departure time, stationary climate control 263
Device list 70
Diagnosis connection 334
Differential lock 206
Digital Key 86
Dimensions 352
Dimensions, see Technical data 352
Dimmable exterior mirrors 114
Dimmable interior mirror 114
Direct dial buttons, see Programmable memory
buttons 46
Direction indicator, see Turn signals 133
Display and input 44
Display in the windshield, see Head-up Dis‐
play 155
Display key, malfunction 80
Display key, see BMW display key 77
Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 163
Displays 142
Displays and symbols 9
Displays, ECO PRO 288
Displays, screens 349
Disposal, coolant 331
Disposal, vehicle battery 337
Distance control, see PDC 227
Door handle lighting, see Welcome lights 160
Door lock, see Remote control 72
Door opening angle, Surround View 237
Drive-off assistant 203
Drive-off assistant, see DSC 203
Driver activity, see Driver Attention Camera 62
Driver assistance, driving, see Intelligent
Safety 170
Driver assistance, see Intelligent Safety 170
Driver Attention Camera 62
Drive-ready state, idle state, and standby
state 41
Drive-ready state, see Starting the engine 42
Driver profiles 91
Driver profile, setting up 91
Driver profiles, welcome screen 91
Driving 125
Driving Assistant, see Intelligent Safety 170
Driving comfort 251
Driving Dynamics Control 128
Driving instructions, breaking in 282
Driving mode, ECO PRO 287
Driving mode, see Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 128
Driving notes, general 283
Driving stability control systems 203
Driving style analysis, ECO PRO 291
Driving tips 283
Drying air, see Air conditioning 255
DSC Dynamic Stability Control 203
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 205
DVD, video, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
Dynamic damping, see Adaptive suspen‐
sion 251
Dynamic Stability Control DSC 203
Dynamic Traction Control DTC 205
E
ECO PRO 287
ECO PRO, bonus range 289
ECO PRO, Driving style analysis 291
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL, see Driving Dynamics
Control 128
ECO PRO, see Driving Dynamics Control 128
Seite 359
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
359
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Efficiency display, widget in the instrument clus‐
ter 144
Efficient4x4, see xDrive 205
Electronic oil measurement 327
Electronic Stability Program ESP, see DSC 203
E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 8
Emergency brake 199
Emergency brake function when parking, Active
PDC 230
Emergency service, see Accident Assis‐
tance 339
Emergency service, see Breakdown assis‐
tance 339
Emergency stop assistant 199
Emergency unlocking, fuel filler flap 295
Emergency unlocking, transmission lock 140
Emergency unlocking, trunk lid 90
Energy recovery 144
Energy savings, see Gear shift indicator 150
Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 125
Engine compartment 323
Engine coolant 330
Engine idling when driving, see Coasting 289
Engine oil, adding 328
Engine oil change 330
Engine oil filler neck 328
Engine oil temperature 148
Engine oil types to add 329
Engine start, jump-starting 341
Engine start, see Drive-ready state 42
Engine temperature 148
Entering a destination, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 8
Entering an address, navigation, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Com‐
munication 8
Entertainment, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment and Communication 8
Entry comparison, navigation 45
Equipment, interior 265
Error indicators, see Check Control 144
ESP Electronic Stability Program, see DSC 203
Evasion assistance 176
Exchanging wheels and tires 301
Exhaust gas system 283
Exhaustion warner 201
Exhaust, see Exhaust gas system 283
Exterior lighting during unlocking 73
Exterior lighting with the vehicle locked 74
Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor 114
Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 114
Exterior mirrors 113
Exterior mirrors, malfunction 114
External start 341
External temperature 149
Eyelet for towing 343
Eyes, see Lashing eyes in the cargo area 276
F
Factory settings 71
Failure message, see Check Control 144
False alarm, see Avoiding unintentional
alarms 99
Fan, see Air flow 257
Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 111
Fatigue alert 201
Fault indicators, see Check Control 144
Filler neck for engine oil 328
Finding charging stations, see Charging stations
and points of interest, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 8
Fine wood parts, care 348
First-aid kit 338
Flat tire, changing wheels 318
Flat tire, continued driving 314, 317
Flat tire message, FTM 316
Flat tire message, TPM 312
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 316
Flat tire, repairing 303
Flat tire, see Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 309
Flat tire warning light, FTM 316
Flat tire warning light, TPM 312
Flooding 283
Floor carpet, care 349
Floor mats, care 349
Fold-away position of the wipers 136
Foot brake 284
For Your Own Safety 10
Seite 360
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
360
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Front airbags 166
Front collision mitigation 172
Front collision warning, see Intelligent
Safety 170
Front fog lights, replacing, see Lights and
bulbs 336
Front lights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 336
Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic deacti‐
vation 168
Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator light 169
Front seats 108
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 316
Fuel 326
Fuel cap 294
Fuel filler flap 294
Fuel filler flap, unlocking manually 295
Fuel gauge 147
Fuel quality 326
Fuel recommendation 326
Fuel, tank capacity 353
Fuel, tank capacity, see Technical data 352
Fuses 337
G
Garage door opener, see Integrated Universal
Remote Control 265
Gasoline 326
Gear change, Steptronic transmission 137
Gear shift indicator 150
General driving notes 283
General settings 59
Glare shield, see Sun visor 268
Glove compartment 272
GPS geolocation, vehicle position 62
GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Gross vehicle weight, approved 353
H
Handbrake, see Parking brake 130
Hand-held transmitter, alternating code 266
Hands-free device, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Hazard warning flashers 338
Headlight control, automatic 158
Headlight courtesy delay feature 160
Headlight courtesy delay feature, switching
on 75
Headlight flasher 134
Headlight glass 336
Headlights, care 346
Headlights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 336
Head restraints and seats 108
Head restraints, front 112
Head-up Display 155
Head-up Display, care 349
Head-up Display, see Memory function 116
Heated steering wheel 115
Heating, neck 117
Heavy cargo, stowing 276
High-beam Assistant 161
High beams 134
High beams/low beams, see High-beam Assis‐
tant 161
Hills 284
Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assistant 203
Holder for beverages, see Cup holders 273
HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote
Control 265
Homepage 8
Hood 324
Horn 36
Hotel function, see Valet parking mode 94
Hot exhaust gas system 283
Hotline, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 8
Humidity in the headlight, see Headlight
glass 336
Hydroplaning 283
I
iBrake – PostCrash 200
Ice warning, see External temperature 149
Icy roads, see External temperature 149
Identification marks, tires 299
Identification number, see Vehicle identification
number 15
Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready
state 41
Seite 361
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
361
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
iDrive 44
Ignition key, see Remote control 72
Indicator/warning lights 145
Individual air distribution 257
Individual settings, see Driver profiles 91
Inductive charging of a smartphone, see Wireless
charging tray, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
Inflation pressure monitor, see Tire Pressure
Monitor TPM 309
Inflation pressure, tires 296
Inflation pressure warning FTM, tires 316
Information 8
Information window, Control Display 62
Initialization, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 316
Initialization, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 311
Input and display 44
Instrument cluster 142
Instrument lighting 163
Integral Active Steering 206
Integrated key 81
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 16
Integrated Universal Remote Control 265
Intelligent Auto Start/Stop function 127
Intelligent emergency call 340
Intelligent Personal Assistant 54
Intelligent Safety 170
Intended use 10
Intensity, AUTO program 256
Interior camera, see Driver Attention Camera 62
Interior equipment 265
Interior lights 163
Interior lights during unlocking 73
Interior lights with the vehicle locked 74
Interior mirror 113
Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature 114
Interior motion sensor 99
Internet connection 68
Internet page 8
Intersection collision warning 178
Interval display, see Service requirements 149
J
Jacking points for the vehicle jack 320
Jam protection system, windows 100
Joystick, Steptronic transmission 137
Jump-starting 341
Jump-starting terminals 341
K
Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 82
Key, mechanical 81
Key, see BMW display key 77
Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 137
Knee airbag 167
L
Label on recommended tires 302
Lane control assistant 221
Lane control assistant with active side collision
protection, see Side collision mitigation 196
Lane departure warning 189
Lane lines, Surround View 237
Lane threshold, warning 189
Language, set on Control Display 61
Laser headlights, replacing, see Lights and
bulbs 336
Laser high beams 162
Lashing eyes in the cargo area 276
LATCH child restraint fixing system 122
Launch Control 141
Leather care 347
LED headlights, replacing, see Lights and
bulbs 336
LEDs, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 336
Letters and numbers, entering 49
Light-alloy wheels, care 348
Light control, adaptive 160
Light-emitting diodes, replacing LEDs, see
Lights and bulbs 336
Lighter, cigarettes 269
Lighting 158
Lighting, speakers 164
Light in the exterior mirror, see Blind spot colli‐
sion warning 192
Light in the exterior mirror, see Cross traffic
warning 248
Light replacement, see Lights and bulbs 336
Lights 158
Seite 362
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
362
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Lights and bulbs 336
Light switch 158
LIM button, see Manual Speed Limiter 207
List of all messages 59
Load 276
Loading 275
Loading the cargo area, see Stowing cargo 276
Location, vehicle position 62
Locking, automatic 97
Locking, remote control 74
Locking, see Opening and Closing 72
Locking, settings 96
Locking the trunk lid, see Valet parking mode 94
Lock, lug bolts 320
Low beams 159
Low beams, automatic, see High-beam Assis‐
tant 161
Lower back support 109
Lug bolt lock 320
Lumbar support 109
M
Maintenance 333
Maintenance requirements, see Condition Based
Service CBS 333
Maintenance, see Service requirements 149
Maintenance system, BMW 333
Make-up mirror 268
Malfunction, BMW display key 80
Malfunction, remote control 76
Managing devices 70
Manual air distribution 257
Manual air flow 257
Manual brake, see Parking brake 130
Manual mode, Steptronic transmission 137
Manual operation, fuel filler flap 295
Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
Marking, run-flat tire 303
Master key, see Remote control 72
Matte finish 347
Maximum cooling 255
Maximum speed display, see Speed Limit
Info 151
Maximum speed of winter tires 302
Measurement, units of 61
Media of the Owner's Manual 16
Medical supplies, see First-aid kit 338
Memory function 116
Menu, instrument cluster, see Selection
lists 152
Menus, operating, see iDrive 44
Messages 59
Messages, see Check Control 144
Microfilter 258
Minimum tread depth, tires 300
Mirror 113
Mirror, see Memory function 116
Mobile communication devices in the vehi‐
cle 283
Mobile devices, managing 70
Mobile phone, connecting 64
Mobile phone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment and Communication 8
Mobility System 304
MODE button, see Active Cruise Control 211
Mode, ECO PRO 287
Modifications, technical, see For Your Own
Safety 10
Monitor, see Control Display 47
Mounting of child restraint systems 121
MP3 player, see Audio, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 8
M sport differential, active 206
Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 36
Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication 8
Music hard disk, see Owner's Handbook for Nav‐
igation, Entertainment, Communication 8
N
Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication 8
Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints 112
Net, cargo area 276
Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy wheels 348
New wheels and tires 301
Night Vision device, see Night Vision 185
Seite 363
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
363
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐
tion 185
Notes, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 8
No-touch opening and closing of the trunk lid 84
Nylon rope for tow-starting/towing 343
O
OBD Onboard Diagnosis 334
Object detection, see Night Vision 185
Obstacle marking, rearview camera 233
Obstacle marking, Surround View 237
Octane rating, see Recommended fuel
grade 327
Odometer, see Trip data 153
Oil, adding 328
Oil change 330
Oil change interval, see Service require‐
ments 149
Oil filler neck 328
Oil level, checking electronically 327
Oil types to add, engine 329
Onboard Computer, see Trip data 153
Onboard Diagnosis OBD 334
Onboard literature, printed 16
Onboard vehicle tool kit 335
On-call service, see Accident Assistance 339
On-call service, see Breakdown assistance 339
Online Entertainment, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 8
Opening and closing 72
Operating concept, iDrive 44
Outside air, see AUC 256
Overheating of engine, see Coolant tempera‐
ture 148
Overwintering, see Long-term vehicle stor‐
age 349
Owner's Manual, printed 16
P
Paint, vehicle 346
Pairing, mobile devices, see Connections 64
Panic alarm, see Panic mode 98
Panic mode 98
Panorama View, see Surround View 234
Park Distance Control PDC 227
Parked-car ventilation 259
Parking aid, see PDC 227
Parking Assistant 241
Parking assistant Plus, see Surround View 234
Parking, Automatic Hold, see Parking brake 130
Parking brake 130
Parking lights 159
Parts and accessories 10
Passenger's side mirror, tilting, see Automatic
Curb Monitor 114
Pathway lines, rearview camera 233
PDC Park Distance Control 227
Pedestrian detection, see Night Vision 185
Performance Control 252
Performance display, see Sport displays 154
Personal data, deleting 63
Personal profile, see Driver profiles 91
Person warning with braking function 182
Phone, connecting 64
Plastic parts, care 348
PostCrash – iBrake 200
Power failure 337
Power windows 99
Pressure monitor, see Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 309
Pressure, tires 296
Pressure warning FTM, tires 316
Printed onboard literature 16
Profiles, see Driver profiles 91
Programmable memory buttons, iDrive 46
Protective function, windows, see Jam protec‐
tion system 100
Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 47
Q
Queuing Assistant, see Steering and traffic jam
assistant 221
R
Racing track 285
Radiator fluid 330
Seite 364
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
364
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Radio-operated key, see Remote control 72
Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communication 8
Rain sensor 135
Rear axle steering, see Integral Active Steer‐
ing 206
Rear lights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 336
Rear seat backrests, folding down 277
Rearview camera, see Surround View 234
Rearview camera, without Surround View 232
Rear window defroster 258
Recirculated-air filter, see Microfilter/activated-
charcoal filter 258
Recirculated-air mode 257
Recommended fuel grade 327
Recommended tire brands 302
Refueling 294
Remote 3D View 241
Remote control 72
Remote control, additional 76
Remote control for audio, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐
cation 8
Remote control, integrated key 81
Remote control, loss 76
Remote control, malfunction 76
Remote control of the vehicle, changing the bat‐
tery 75
Remote control, universal 265
Remote control with display, malfunction 80
Remote control with display, see BMW display
key 77
Remote Engine Start, see Stationary climate
control 261
Remote services, app, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 8
Remote Software Upgrade 56
Replacing bulbs, see Lights and bulbs 336
Replacing parts 335
Replacing wheels and tires 301
Reporting safety malfunctions 15
Reserve warning, see Range 149
Resetting, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 311
Resetting vehicle settings 71
RESUME button, see Active Cruise Control 211
RESUME button, see Cruise control 209
Retreaded tires 302
Roadside Assistance, see Accident Assis‐
tance 339
Roadside Assistance, see Breakdown assis‐
tance 339
Roadside parking lights 159
Rolling code hand-held transmitter 266
Rollover protection system 169
RON recommended fuel grade 327
Roofliner 40
Roof load capacity 353
Roof, see Convertible top 100
Rope for tow-starting/towing 343
Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
RSC Runflat System, see Runflat tire 303
RSU, see Remote Software Upgrade 56
RTTI, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐
tertainment, Communication 8
Rubber components, care 348
Run-flat tire 303
S
Safe braking 284
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front
passenger seat 112
Safety belts 111
Safety belts, care 349
Safety systems, see Airbags 166
Safety systems, see Intelligent Safety 170
Saving fuel 286
Screen Mirroring, connection 69
Screen, see Control Display 47
Screwdriver, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 335
Sealant, see Mobility System 304
Seat and armrest heating 116
Seating position for children 120
Seats and head restraints 108
Seat, see Memory function 116
Seats, front 108
Seat ventilation, active 118
Securing, cargo 276
Selection list in instrument cluster 152
Selector lever, Steptronic transmission 137
Seite 365
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
365
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Self-supporting tires, see Run-flat tires 303
Sensors, care 349
Service and warranty 11
Service Center, see Accident Assistance 339
Service requirements 149
Service requirements, see Condition Based
Service CBS 333
Services, ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and Communica‐
tion 8
SET button, see Active Cruise Control with
Stop&Go function 211
SET button, see Cruise control 209
Set speed, see Active Cruise Control with
Stop&Go function 211
Settings, Control Display 59
Settings, locking/unlocking 96
Settings, resetting 71
Settings, seats and head restraints 108
Setup assistant 91
Shift paddles on the steering wheel 137
Shift point indicator, tachometer 148
Side airbag 166
Side collision mitigation 196
Side protection, Surround View 237
Side protection without Surround View 230
Signaling, horn 36
Signals when unlocking, see Confirmation sig‐
nals from the vehicle 96
Sitting safely 108
Size 352
Sizes, see Technical data 352
Smartphone, connecting 64
Smartphone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication 8
Smartphone, using via voice activation 55
Smoker's package 268
SMS, see Short messages, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐
cation 8
SMS text message, supplementary 145
Snow chains 308
Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis 334
Sockets 269
Software Upgrade, see Remote Software Up‐
grade 56
SOS button, see Intelligent emergency call 340
Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Speaker lighting 164
Special equipment, see Vehicle features and op‐
tions 9
Speed Limit Assist 219
Speed Limit Device, Manual Speed Limiter 207
Speed limit display, see Speed Limit Info 151
Speed Limiter, manual 207
Speed Limit Info 151
Speed warning 61
Sport displays 154
SPORT INDIVIDUAL, see Driving Dynamics
Control 128
SPORT PLUS, see Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 128
Sport program, Steptronic transmission 137
SPORT, see Driving Dynamics Control 128
Sport suspension, see Adaptive M suspension
Professional 251
Stability control systems 203
Standard equipment, see Vehicle features and
options 9
Standby state, idle state and drive-ready
state 41
Start/stop, automatic function 125
Start/Stop button 125
Starting aid terminals 341
Starting, see Drive-ready state 42
Starting the engine, see Drive-ready state 42
Stationary climate control via Remote Engine
Start 261
Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Status control display, tires 310
Status information, iDrive 45
Status of Owner's Manual 9
Status, vehicle 155
Steering and traffic jam assistant 221
Steering, see Integral Active Steering 206
Steering wheel, adjusting 115
Steering wheel, buttons 36
Steering wheel, see Memory function 116
Steptronic Sport transmission, see Steptronic
transmission 137
Seite 366
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
366
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Steptronic transmission 137
Storage compartment, cargo area 276
Storage compartment, center console 273
Storage compartments 272
Storage compartments, locations 272
Storage, tires 303
Storing the vehicle 349
Stowing, cargo 276
Straps for cargo, see Lashing eyes in the cargo
area 276
Suitable devices 65
Suitable mobile phones 65
Summer tires, tread 300
Sun visor 268
Supplementary Owner's Manuals 16
Supplementary SMS text message 145
Surface heating, see Seat and armrest heat‐
ing 116
Surround View 234
Suspension settings, see Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 128
Switches, see Cockpit 36
Switch for driving dynamics, see Driving Dynam‐
ics Control 128
Switching off the engine, see Drive-ready
state 42
Symbols and displays 9
SYNC program, automatic climate control 258
T
Tachometer 148
Tail lights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 336
Technical changes, see For Your Own Safety 10
Technical data 352
Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication 8
Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
Television, TV, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Temperature, automatic climate control 254
Temperature display, see External tempera‐
ture 149
Temperature, engine oil 148
Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 97
Thermal camera, see Night Vision 185
Thigh support, sport seat 109
Tilt alarm sensor 98
Tilt, backrest 109
Tilting, passenger's side mirror, see Automatic
Curb Monitor 114
Time 60
Tire brands, recommended 302
Tire damage 300
Tire identification marks 299
Tire inflation pressure 296
Tire inflation pressure monitor, see FTM Flat
Tire Monitor 316
Tire pressure 296
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 309
Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 304
Tires and wheels 296
Tires, changing 301
Tire sealant, see Mobility System 304
Tire settings 309
Tires, run-flat 303
Tire tread 300
Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment and Communication 8
Tool 335
Torque display, see Sport displays 154
Total vehicle weight 353
Tow bar 343
Tow fitting 343
Towing 342
Tow rope 343
Tow-starting 342
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 309
Traction control 205
TRACTION, driving dynamics 205
Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Traffic Jam Assist, see Steering and traffic jam
assistant 221
Transmission lock, electronic unlocking 140
Transmission, see Steptronic transmission 137
Transporting children safely 120
Tread, tires 300
Trip data 153
Triple turn signal activation 133
Trip odometer, see Trip data 153
Seite 367
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
367
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Trunk, cargo area partition 103
Trunk, emergency unlocking 90
Trunk lid 89
Trunk lid, emergency unlocking 90
Trunk lid, opening and closing with no-touch ac‐
tivation 84
Trunk lid, remote control 75
Trunk lid, see Trunk lid 89
Turning circle line, Surround View 237
Turning radius lines, rearview camera 233
Turn signal, indicator light 147
Turn signal, replacing bulbs, see Lights and
bulbs 336
Turn signals, high beams, headlight flasher 133
TV, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐
tertainment, Communication 8
U
Unintentional alarm, avoiding 99
Units of measurement 61
Universal remote control 265
Unlock button, Steptronic transmission 137
Unlocking, automatic 97
Unlocking, remote control 73
Unlocking, see Opening and Closing 72
Unlocking, settings 96
Updates made after the editorial deadline 9
Upgrade, see Remote Software Upgrade 56
Upholstery material care 348
USB connection 67
USB interface, position in vehicle 270
Used battery, disposing of 337
Use, intended 10
V
Valet parking mode 94
Vanity mirror 268
Variable steering, see Integral Active Steer‐
ing 206
Vehicle battery 336
Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assis‐
tance 338
Vehicle, breaking in 282
Vehicle care 346
Vehicle care products 346
Vehicle configuration, resetting 71
Vehicle features and options 9
Vehicle identification number 15
Vehicle key, see Remote control 72
Vehicle paint 346
Vehicle position, vehicle location 62
Vehicle status 155
Vehicle storage 349
Vehicle wash 345
Vehicle wash, automatic 345
Vehicle, washing 345
Ventilation 258
Ventilation, see Parked-car ventilation 259
Venting, see Ventilation 258
Vent, see Ventilation 258
Version, see Remote Software Upgrade 56
Video, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communication 8
VIN, see Vehicle identification number 15
Voice activation, see BMW Intelligent Personal
Assistant 54
Voice activation system 52
Voice command response, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐
cation 8
W
Warning/indicator lights 145
Warning against cross traffic 248
Warning light in the exterior mirror, see Blind
spot collision warning 192
Warning light in the exterior mirror, see Cross
traffic warning 248
Warning messages, see Check Control 144
Warning triangle 338
Warranty 10
Washer fluid 331
Washer nozzles, windshield 136
Washer system 134
Washing the vehicle 345
Wash view, Surround View 237
Water on roads 283
Water, see Condensation water under the parked
vehicle 285
Seite 368
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
368
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
Website 8
Weights 353
Weights, see Technical data 352
Welcome light during unlocking 73
Welcome lights 160
Welcome screen, driver profiles 91
Wheel cleaner, light-alloy wheels 348
Wheels and tires 296
Wheels and tires, replacing 301
Wheels, changing 301
Wheels, see FTM Flat Tire Monitor 316
WiFi connection 68
WiFi hotspot 68
WiFi hotspot, see Internet connection 68
Wind deflector 105
Window, defrosting 258
Windows, powered 99
Windshield, defrosting 258
Windshield washer fluid, see Washer fluid 331
Windshield washer nozzles 136
Windshield washer system, see Washer/wiper
system 134
Windshield wiper, see Wiper system 134
Winter storage, see Long-term vehicle stor‐
age 349
Winter tires 302
Winter tires, tread 300
Wiper blades, replacing 335
Wiper fluid, see Washer fluid 331
Wiper, fold-away position 136
Wiper, see Washer/wiper system 134
Wiper system 134
Wireless charging of a smartphone, see Wireless
charging tray, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
Wireless charging tray, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Wood parts, care 348
Wordmatch principle, see Entry comparison 45
Working in, engine compartment 324
Wrench, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 335
X
xDrive 205
Seite 369
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
369
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
*BL2720992007*
01402720992 ue
California Proposition 65
Warning
For vehicles sold in California:
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
BMW DRIVER'S GUIDE APP.
Your customized information about the vehicle in an app.
Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.
*BL2720992007*
01402720992 ue
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720992 - II/19
